945 changed files with 57194 additions and 261132 deletions
--- a/.cvsignore
+++ b/.cvsignore
@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
 Makefile
 Makefile.in
 mkinstalldirs
 aclocal.m4
 autom4te.cache
 config.guess
 config.h
 config.h.in
 config.log
 config.status
 config.rpath
 config.sub
 configure
 depcomp
 install-sh
 libtool
 ltmain.sh
 missing
 stamp-h1
 root
 tags
 cscope.out
 pacman-*.tar.gz
--- a/.editorconfig
+++ b/.editorconfig
@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
 # EditorConfig configuration for pacman
 # https://editorconfig.org
 # Top-most EditorConfig file
 root = true
 # Unix-style newlines without trailing whitespaces, but with a newline
 # ending every file, utf-8 charset, set indent to tabs
 [*]
 end_of_line = lf
 insert_final_newline = true
 trim_trailing_whitespace = true
 charset = utf-8
 indent_style = tab
 [{NEWS,HACKING}]
 indent_style = space
 [meson.build]
 indent_style = space
 indent_size = 2
 [*.py]
 indent_style = space
--- a/.gitattributes
+++ b/.gitattributes
@ -1 +0,0 @@
 *.py  diff=python
--- a/.gitignore
+++ b/.gitignore
@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
 *~
 *.o
 pacman-*.tar.gz
--- a/.gitlab-ci.yml
+++ b/.gitlab-ci.yml
@ -1,132 +0,0 @@
 variables:
  MAKEFLAGS: "-j10"
  VERBOSE: 1
 default:
  after_script:
    - build-aux/print-failed-test-output build/meson-logs/testlog.json
 .arch-test:
  image: archlinux:base-devel
  before_script:
    - >
      pacman -Syu --needed --noconfirm
      git
      gpgme libarchive curl
      python
      fakeroot fakechroot
      meson
  artifacts:
      when: always
      paths:
        - build/meson-logs/meson-log.txt
 arch:
  extends: .arch-test
  script:
    - meson setup build
    - ninja -C build
    - fakechroot meson test -C build
 arch-debug:
  extends: .arch-test
  script:
    - meson setup --buildtype=debug --werror build
    - ninja -C build
    - fakechroot meson test -C build
 arch-docs:
  extends: .arch-test
  script:
    - pacman -Syu --needed --noconfirm asciidoc
    - meson setup -Ddoc=enabled build
    - ninja -C build
 arch-clang:
  extends: .arch-test
  script:
    - pacman -Syu --needed --noconfirm clang
    - CC=clang meson setup build
    - ninja -C build
    - fakechroot meson test -C build
 #arch-valgrind:
 #  extends: .arch-test
 #  script:
 #    - pacman -Syu --needed --noconfirm valgrind
 #    - pacman -U --noconfirm https://geo.mirror.pkgbuild.com/core-debug/os/x86_64/glibc-debug-$(pacman -S --print-format %v glibc)-x86_64.pkg.tar.zst
 #    - meson setup build
 #    - ninja -C build
 #    - PACTEST_VALGRIND=1 fakechroot meson test -C build
 arch-nettle:
  extends: .arch-test
  script:
    - meson setup -Dcrypto=nettle --buildtype=debug build
    - ninja -C build
    - fakechroot meson test -C build
 arch-no-gpg:
  extends: .arch-test
  script:
    - meson setup -Dgpgme=disabled --buildtype=debug build
    - ninja -C build
    - fakechroot meson test -C build
 arch-no-curl:
  extends: .arch-test
  script:
    - meson setup -Dcurl=disabled --buildtype=debug build
    - ninja -C build
    - fakechroot meson test -C build
 arch-no-nls:
  extends: .arch-test
  script:
    - meson setup -Di18n=false --buildtype=debug build
    - ninja -C build
    - fakechroot meson test -C build
 debian:
  image: debian:bookworm
  before_script:
    - apt update
    - >
      apt -y install --no-install-recommends
      git pkg-config meson gcc libtool
      libgpgme-dev libarchive-dev libcurl4-openssl-dev libssl-dev curl
      gettext python3 python3-setuptools dash gawk ca-certificates
      fakeroot fakechroot
  script:
    - meson setup --buildtype=debug build
    - ninja -C build
    - fakechroot meson test -C build
 fedora:
  image: fedora
  before_script:
    - >
      dnf -y install
      git findutils patch sed
      meson gcc libtool bsdtar
      gpgme-devel libarchive-devel libcurl-devel openssl-devel gettext-devel
      asciidoc python3 dash gawk
      fakeroot fakechroot
      perl-Module-Load-Conditional
  script:
    - meson setup --buildtype=debug build
    - ninja -C build
    - fakechroot meson test -C build
 pages:
  extends: .arch-test
  script:
    - pacman -Syu --needed --noconfirm asciidoc
    - meson setup -Ddoc=enabled build
    - ninja -C build html
  artifacts:
    paths:
      - build/doc
  publish: build/doc
  rules:
    - if: $CI_COMMIT_BRANCH == "release/6.1.x"
--- a/.mailmap
+++ b/.mailmap
@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
 Aaron Griffin <aaron@archlinux.org> <aaronmgriffin@gmail.com>
 Allan McRae <allan@archlinux.org> <mcrae_allan@hotmail.com>
 Allan McRae <allan@archlinux.org> <mcrae_allan at hotmail.com>
 Allan McRae <allan@archlinux.org> <allan.mcrae@qimr.edu.au>
 Andres P <aepd87@gmail.com> <stderr@mail.com>
 Andrew Gregory <andrew.gregory.8@gmail.com>
 Barbu Paul - Gheorghe <barbu.paul.gheorghe@gmail.com>
 Bryan Ischo <bryan@ischo.com> <bji-keyword-pacman.3644cb@www.ischo.com>
 Christos Nouskas <nous@archlinux.us> <nouskas@gmail.com>
 Daenyth Blank <daenyth+arch@gmail.com> <Daenyth+Arch@gmail.com>
 Daenyth Blank <Daenyth+arch@gmail.com> <Daenyth+git@gmail.com>
 Dave Reisner <dreisner@archlinux.org> <d@falconindy.com>
 甘露(Gan Lu) <rhythm.gan@gmail.com>
 Giovanni Scafora <giovanni@archlinux.org> <linuxmania@gmail.com>
 Jan Alexander Steffens (heftig) <heftig@archlinux.org> <jan.steffens@gmail.com>
 Jaroslaw Swierczynski <swiergot@gmail.com> <swiergot@juvepoland.com>
 Jonathan Conder <j@skurvy.no-ip.org> <jonno.conder@gmail.com>
 Juan Pablo González Tognarelli <lord_jotape@yahoo.com.ar>
 Juan Pablo González Tognarelli <lord_jotape@yahoo.com.ar> <jotapesan@gmail.com>
 Manuel Tortosa <manutortosa@chakra-project.org> <manutortosa@gmail.com>
 Marc - A. Dahlhaus <mad@wol.de>
 Matthias Gorissen <matthias@archlinux.de> <siquame@web.de>
 morganamilo <morganamilo@archlinux.org> <morganamilo@gmail.com>
 Laszlo Papp <djszapi@archlinux.us> <djszapi2@gmail.com>
 Nagy Gabor <ngaba@bibl.u-szeged.hu> <ngaba@petra.hos.u-szeged.hu>
 Nagy Gabor <ngaba@bibl.u-szeged.hu> <ngaba at bibl.u-szeged.hu>
 Nezmer <git@nezmer.info> <Nezmer@allurelinux.org>
 Roman Kyrylych <roman@archlinux.org> <roman.kyrylych@gmail.com>
 Sebastian Nowicki <sebnow@gmail.com> <xilonmu@gmail.com>
 Vojtěch Gondžala <vojtech.gondzala@gmail.com> <vogo@seznam.cz>
 Vojtěch Gondžala <vojtech.gondzala@gmail.com> Vojtech Gondzala <vojtech.gondzala@gmail.com>
 William Giokas <1007380@gmail.com>
 Xavier Chantry <shiningxc@gmail.com>
 Xavier Chantry <shiningxc@gmail.com> <chantry.xavier@gmail.com>
 Xavier Chantry <shiningxc@gmail.com> <xav@chantry.homelinux.org>
--- a/.tx/config
+++ b/.tx/config
@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
 [main]
 host = https://www.transifex.com
 [o:toofishes:p:archlinux-pacman:r:libalpm-pot]
 file_filter = lib/libalpm/po/<lang>.po
 source_file = lib/libalpm/po/libalpm.pot
 source_lang = en
 [o:toofishes:p:archlinux-pacman:r:pacman-pot]
 file_filter = src/pacman/po/<lang>.po
 source_file = src/pacman/po/pacman.pot
 source_lang = en
 [o:toofishes:p:archlinux-pacman:r:pacman-scripts-pot]
 file_filter = scripts/po/<lang>.po
 source_file = scripts/po/pacman-scripts.pot
 source_lang = en
--- a/14
+++ b/14
@ -1 +1,13 @@
-Use `git shortlog -s` for a list of contributors.
+Judd Vinet <jvinet@zeroflux.org>
 Aurelien Foret <aurelien@archlinux.org>
 Aaron Griffin <aaron@archlinux.org>
 Dan McGee <dan@archlinux.org>
 Miklós Vajna <vmiklos@frugalware.org>
 Christian Hamar <krics@linuxforum.hu>
 Josh Wheeler <deltalima@gmail.com>
 David Kimpe <DNAku@frugalware.org>
 James Rosten <seinfeld90@gmail.com>
 Roman Kyrylych <Roman.Kyrylych@gmail.com>
--- a/31
+++ b/31
@ -1,8 +1,9 @@
 		    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
 		       Version 2, June 1991
- Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
- 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ 		59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
 Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
 of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
@ -15,7 +16,7 @@ software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.  This
 General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
 Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
 using it.  (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
-the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.)  You can apply it to
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.)  You can apply it to
 your programs, too.
  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
@ -55,7 +56,7 @@ patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
 modification follow.
-
+
 		    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
   TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
@ -110,7 +111,7 @@ above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
    License.  (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
    does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
    the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
-
+
 These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
 identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
 and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
@ -168,7 +169,7 @@ access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
 access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
 distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
 compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
-
+
  4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
 except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
 otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
@ -225,7 +226,7 @@ impose that choice.
 This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
 be a consequence of the rest of this License.
-
+
  8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
 certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
 original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
@ -278,8 +279,8 @@ PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
 POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
 		     END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
-
+
-	    How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+	Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
 possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
@ -291,7 +292,7 @@ convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
 the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
    <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
-    Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+    Copyright (C) 19yy  <name of author>
    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
@ -303,16 +304,16 @@ the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
    GNU General Public License for more details.
-    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
+    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-    with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
-    51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
+    Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
 Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
 If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
 when it starts in an interactive mode:
-    Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
+    Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author
    Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
    This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
    under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
@ -335,5 +336,5 @@ necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
 This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
 proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you may
 consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
-library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
+library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
 Public License instead of this License.
--- a/169
+++ b/169
@ -1,178 +1,95 @@
-Pacman - Contributing
+Contributing to pacman
-=====================
+======================
-This file is meant to give you a brief overview of coding style and other
+Please read 'submitting-patches' and 'translation-help' in the same directory
-concerns when hacking on pacman. If you are interested in contributing, please
+as this file.
 read link:submitting-patches.html[submitting-patches] and
 link:translation-help.html[translation-help] as well.
-Coding Style
+Coding style
 ------------
 1.  All code should be indented with tabs. (Ignore the use of only spaces in
-    this file.) A tab size of two spaces is used when calculating line widths,
+    this file) By default, source files contain the following VIM modeline:
-    which should be a maximum of 80 characters. An EditorConfig file is used
+      /* vim: set ts=2 sw=2 noet: */
    to set this project-wide default.
 2.  When opening new blocks such as 'while', 'if', or 'for', leave the opening
    brace on the same line as the beginning of the codeblock. The closing brace
    gets its own line (the only exception being 'else'). Do not use extra
-    spaces around the parentheses of the block. ALWAYS use opening and closing
+    spaces around the parentheses of the block. ALWAYS use opening/closing
-    braces, even if it's just a one-line block. This reduces future error when
+    braces, even if it's just a one-line block.
    blocks are expanded beyond one line.
 +
 [source,C]
 -------------------------------------------
 for(lp = list; lp; lp = lp->next) {
  newlist = _alpm_list_add(newlist, strdup(lp->data));
 }
-while(it) {
+    for(lp = list; lp; lp = lp->next) {
-  ptr = it->next;
+      newlist = _alpm_list_add(newlist, strdup(lp->data));
-  if(fn) {
+    }
-    fn(it->data);
+
-  } else {
+    while(it) {
-    return 1;
+      ptr = it->next;
-  }
+      if(fn) {
-  free(it);
+        fn(it->data);
-  it = ptr;
+      } else {
-}
+        return(1);
-------------------------------------------
+      }
      free(it);
      it = ptr;
    }
 3.  When declaring a new function, put the opening and closing braces on their
    own line. Also, when declaring a pointer, do not put a space between the
    asterisk and the variable name.
 +
 [source,C]
 -------------------------------------------
 alpm_list_t *alpm_list_add(alpm_list_t *list, void *data)
 {
  alpm_list_t *ptr, *lp;
-  ptr = list;
+    pmlist_t *_alpm_list_add(pmlist_t *list, void *data)
-  if(ptr == NULL) {
+    {
-  ...
+      pmlist_t *ptr, *lp;
  }
  ...
 }
 -------------------------------------------
-4.  Comments should be ANSI-C89 compliant. That means no `// Comment` style;
+      ptr = list;
-    use only `/* Comment */` style.
+     if(ptr == NULL) {
    ...
    }
-    /* This is a comment */
+4.  Comments should be ANSI-C89 compliant. That means no "// Comment" style;
-       NOT
+    use only "/* Comment */" style.
    // This is a comment
-5.  Return statements should *not* be written like function calls.
+5.  Return statements should be written like a function call.
    return 0;
       NOT
    return(0);
 6.  When using strcmp() (or any function that returns 0 on success) in a
    conditional statement, use != 0 or == 0 and not the negation (!) operator.
    It reads much cleaner for humans (using a negative to check for success is
    confusing) and the compiler will treat it correctly anyway.
    if(strcmp(a, b) == 0)
       NOT
-    if(!strcmp(a, b))
+    return 0;
-7.  Use spaces around almost all arithmetic, comparison and assignment
+6.  The sizeof() operator should accept a type, not a value. (TODO: in certain
-    operators and after all ',;:' separators.
+    cases, it may be better- should this be a set guideline? Read "The Practice
-
+    of Programming")
 	foobar[2 * size + 1] = function(a, 6);
 	   NOT
 	foobar[2*size+1]=function(a,6);
 	for(a = 0; a < n && n > 0; a++, n--) {}
 	   NOT
 	for(a=0;a<n&&n>0;a++,n--) {}
 8.  Declare all variables at the start of the block.
 [source,C]
 -------------------------------------------
 int SYMEXPORT alpm_db_remove_server(alpm_db_t *db, const char *url)
 {
  char *newurl, *vdata = NULL;
  newurl = url;
  if(!newurl) {
    return -1;
  }
  ...
  if(vdata) {
    ...
  }
  return 1;
 }
 -------------------------------------------
    NOT
 [source,C]
 -------------------------------------------
 int SYMEXPORT alpm_db_remove_server(alpm_db_t *db, const char *url)
 {
  char *newurl = url;
  if(!newurl) {
    return -1;
  }
  char *vdata = NULL;
  if(vdata) {
    ...
  }
  return 1;
 }
 -------------------------------------------
    sizeof(alpm_list_t);
       NOT
    sizeof(*mylist);
 Other Concerns
 --------------
 Header Includes
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 Currently our #include usage is in messy shape, but this is no reason to
 continue down this messy path. When adding an include to a file, follow this
 general pattern, including blank lines:
-[source,C]
+#include "config.h"
-------------------------------------------
+
 #include <standardheader.h>
 #include <another.h>
 #include <...>
 -------------------------------------------
 Follow this with some more headers, depending on whether the file is in libalpm
 or pacman proper. For libalpm:
 [source,C]
 -------------------------------------------
 /* libalpm */
 #include "yourfile.h"
 #include "alpm_list.h"
 #include "anythingelse.h"
 -------------------------------------------
 For pacman:
 [source,C]
 -------------------------------------------
 #include <alpm.h>
 #include <alpm_list.h>
 /* pacman */
 #include "yourfile.h"
 #include "anythingelse.h"
 -------------------------------------------
-Never directly include config.h. This will always be added via Makefiles.
+vim: set ts=2 sw=2 et:
--- a/234
+++ b/234
@ -0,0 +1,234 @@
 Installation Instructions
 *************************
 Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1996, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005,
 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 This file is free documentation; the Free Software Foundation gives
 unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it.
 Basic Installation
 ==================
 Briefly, the shell commands `./configure; make; make install' should
 configure, build, and install this package.  The following
 more-detailed instructions are generic; see the `README' file for
 instructions specific to this package.
   The `configure' shell script attempts to guess correct values for
 various system-dependent variables used during compilation.  It uses
 those values to create a `Makefile' in each directory of the package.
 It may also create one or more `.h' files containing system-dependent
 definitions.  Finally, it creates a shell script `config.status' that
 you can run in the future to recreate the current configuration, and a
 file `config.log' containing compiler output (useful mainly for
 debugging `configure').
   It can also use an optional file (typically called `config.cache'
 and enabled with `--cache-file=config.cache' or simply `-C') that saves
 the results of its tests to speed up reconfiguring.  Caching is
 disabled by default to prevent problems with accidental use of stale
 cache files.
   If you need to do unusual things to compile the package, please try
 to figure out how `configure' could check whether to do them, and mail
 diffs or instructions to the address given in the `README' so they can
 be considered for the next release.  If you are using the cache, and at
 some point `config.cache' contains results you don't want to keep, you
 may remove or edit it.
   The file `configure.ac' (or `configure.in') is used to create
 `configure' by a program called `autoconf'.  You need `configure.ac' if
 you want to change it or regenerate `configure' using a newer version
 of `autoconf'.
 The simplest way to compile this package is:
  1. `cd' to the directory containing the package's source code and type
     `./configure' to configure the package for your system.
     Running `configure' might take a while.  While running, it prints
     some messages telling which features it is checking for.
  2. Type `make' to compile the package.
  3. Optionally, type `make check' to run any self-tests that come with
     the package.
  4. Type `make install' to install the programs and any data files and
     documentation.
  5. You can remove the program binaries and object files from the
     source code directory by typing `make clean'.  To also remove the
     files that `configure' created (so you can compile the package for
     a different kind of computer), type `make distclean'.  There is
     also a `make maintainer-clean' target, but that is intended mainly
     for the package's developers.  If you use it, you may have to get
     all sorts of other programs in order to regenerate files that came
     with the distribution.
 Compilers and Options
 =====================
 Some systems require unusual options for compilation or linking that the
 `configure' script does not know about.  Run `./configure --help' for
 details on some of the pertinent environment variables.
   You can give `configure' initial values for configuration parameters
 by setting variables in the command line or in the environment.  Here
 is an example:
     ./configure CC=c99 CFLAGS=-g LIBS=-lposix
   *Note Defining Variables::, for more details.
 Compiling For Multiple Architectures
 ====================================
 You can compile the package for more than one kind of computer at the
 same time, by placing the object files for each architecture in their
 own directory.  To do this, you can use GNU `make'.  `cd' to the
 directory where you want the object files and executables to go and run
 the `configure' script.  `configure' automatically checks for the
 source code in the directory that `configure' is in and in `..'.
   With a non-GNU `make', it is safer to compile the package for one
 architecture at a time in the source code directory.  After you have
 installed the package for one architecture, use `make distclean' before
 reconfiguring for another architecture.
 Installation Names
 ==================
 By default, `make install' installs the package's commands under
 `/usr/local/bin', include files under `/usr/local/include', etc.  You
 can specify an installation prefix other than `/usr/local' by giving
 `configure' the option `--prefix=PREFIX'.
   You can specify separate installation prefixes for
 architecture-specific files and architecture-independent files.  If you
 pass the option `--exec-prefix=PREFIX' to `configure', the package uses
 PREFIX as the prefix for installing programs and libraries.
 Documentation and other data files still use the regular prefix.
   In addition, if you use an unusual directory layout you can give
 options like `--bindir=DIR' to specify different values for particular
 kinds of files.  Run `configure --help' for a list of the directories
 you can set and what kinds of files go in them.
   If the package supports it, you can cause programs to be installed
 with an extra prefix or suffix on their names by giving `configure' the
 option `--program-prefix=PREFIX' or `--program-suffix=SUFFIX'.
 Optional Features
 =================
 Some packages pay attention to `--enable-FEATURE' options to
 `configure', where FEATURE indicates an optional part of the package.
 They may also pay attention to `--with-PACKAGE' options, where PACKAGE
 is something like `gnu-as' or `x' (for the X Window System).  The
 `README' should mention any `--enable-' and `--with-' options that the
 package recognizes.
   For packages that use the X Window System, `configure' can usually
 find the X include and library files automatically, but if it doesn't,
 you can use the `configure' options `--x-includes=DIR' and
 `--x-libraries=DIR' to specify their locations.
 Specifying the System Type
 ==========================
 There may be some features `configure' cannot figure out automatically,
 but needs to determine by the type of machine the package will run on.
 Usually, assuming the package is built to be run on the _same_
 architectures, `configure' can figure that out, but if it prints a
 message saying it cannot guess the machine type, give it the
 `--build=TYPE' option.  TYPE can either be a short name for the system
 type, such as `sun4', or a canonical name which has the form:
     CPU-COMPANY-SYSTEM
 where SYSTEM can have one of these forms:
     OS KERNEL-OS
   See the file `config.sub' for the possible values of each field.  If
 `config.sub' isn't included in this package, then this package doesn't
 need to know the machine type.
   If you are _building_ compiler tools for cross-compiling, you should
 use the option `--target=TYPE' to select the type of system they will
 produce code for.
   If you want to _use_ a cross compiler, that generates code for a
 platform different from the build platform, you should specify the
 "host" platform (i.e., that on which the generated programs will
 eventually be run) with `--host=TYPE'.
 Sharing Defaults
 ================
 If you want to set default values for `configure' scripts to share, you
 can create a site shell script called `config.site' that gives default
 values for variables like `CC', `cache_file', and `prefix'.
 `configure' looks for `PREFIX/share/config.site' if it exists, then
 `PREFIX/etc/config.site' if it exists.  Or, you can set the
 `CONFIG_SITE' environment variable to the location of the site script.
 A warning: not all `configure' scripts look for a site script.
 Defining Variables
 ==================
 Variables not defined in a site shell script can be set in the
 environment passed to `configure'.  However, some packages may run
 configure again during the build, and the customized values of these
 variables may be lost.  In order to avoid this problem, you should set
 them in the `configure' command line, using `VAR=value'.  For example:
     ./configure CC=/usr/local2/bin/gcc
 causes the specified `gcc' to be used as the C compiler (unless it is
 overridden in the site shell script).
 Unfortunately, this technique does not work for `CONFIG_SHELL' due to
 an Autoconf bug.  Until the bug is fixed you can use this workaround:
     CONFIG_SHELL=/bin/bash /bin/bash ./configure CONFIG_SHELL=/bin/bash
 `configure' Invocation
 ======================
 `configure' recognizes the following options to control how it operates.
 `--help'
 `-h'
     Print a summary of the options to `configure', and exit.
 `--version'
 `-V'
     Print the version of Autoconf used to generate the `configure'
     script, and exit.
 `--cache-file=FILE'
     Enable the cache: use and save the results of the tests in FILE,
     traditionally `config.cache'.  FILE defaults to `/dev/null' to
     disable caching.
 `--config-cache'
 `-C'
     Alias for `--cache-file=config.cache'.
 `--quiet'
 `--silent'
 `-q'
     Do not print messages saying which checks are being made.  To
     suppress all normal output, redirect it to `/dev/null' (any error
     messages will still be shown).
 `--srcdir=DIR'
     Look for the package's source code in directory DIR.  Usually
     `configure' can determine that directory automatically.
 `configure' also accepts some other, not widely useful, options.  Run
 `configure --help' for more details.
--- a/Makefile.am
+++ b/Makefile.am
@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
 SUBDIRS = lib/libalpm src/util src/pacman scripts doc etc pactest contrib
 #DISTCHECK_CONFIGURE_FLAGS = --disable-fakeroot
 # Some files automatically included, so they aren't specified below:
 #   AUTHORS, COPYING, NEWS, README
 EXTRA_DIST = HACKING
 check-local:  src/pacman
 	python $(top_srcdir)/pactest/pactest.py --test $(top_srcdir)/pactest/tests/*.py -p $(top_builddir)/src/pacman/pacman
 	rm -rf $(top_builddir)/root
--- a/1447
+++ b/1447
--- a/684
+++ b/684
@ -2,19 +2,20 @@ ALPM library overview & internals
 =================================
 Here is a list of the main objects and files from the ALPM (i.e. Arch Linux
-Package Management) library. This document, while not exhaustive, also
+Package Management) library. This document, whilst not exhaustive, also
 indicates some limitations (on purpose, or sometimes due to its poor design) of
 the library at the present time.
-There is one special file, "alpm.h", which is the public interface that
+There is one special file,"alpm.h", which is the public interface that
 should be distributed and installed on systems with the library. Only
 structures, data and functions declared within this file are made available to
 the frontend. Lots of structures are of an opaque type and their fields are
 only accessible in read-only mode, through some clearly defined functions.
 In addition to "alpm.h", the interfaces of "alpm_list.h" have also been made
-available to the frontend, for allowing it to manipulate the lists returned by
+available to the frontend. It is not a requirement for the frontend to use
-the backend.
+these list functions; however, it prevents frontends from having to reimplement
 a list data structure.
 Several structures and functions have been renamed compared to pacman 2.9 code.
 This was done at first for the sake of naming scheme consistency, and then
@ -24,7 +25,7 @@ same name declared in both spaces. To avoid such conflicts, internal function
 names have been prepended with "_alpm_".
 In a general manner, public library functions are named "alpm_<type>_<action>"
-(examples: alpm_trans_commit(), alpm_release(), alpm_pkg_get_name(), ...).
+(examples: alpm_trans_commit(), alpm_release(), alpm_pkg_getinfo(), ...).
 Internal (and thus private) functions should be named "_alpm_XXX" for instance
 (examples: _alpm_needbackup(), _alpm_runscriplet(), ...). Functions defined and
 used inside a single file should be defined as "static".
@ -32,62 +33,60 @@ used inside a single file should be defined as "static".
 [Initialization]
-alpm_initialize() is used to initialize library internals and to create
+alpm_init() is used to initialize library internals and to create
 a transparent handle object. Before its call, the library can't be used.
-alpm_release() just does the opposite (memory used by the library, and the
+alpm_lib_release() just does the opposite (memory used by the library, and the
-handle is freed). After its call, the library is no longer available.
+handle is freed).  After its call, the library is no longer available.
 [Options]
-The library does not use any configuration file. It is up to the front end to
+In the future, the library will not use any configuration file.  It will be up
-configure the library as needed; the handle holds a number of configuration
+to the front end to The handle holds a
-options instead.
+number of configuration options instead (IGNOREPKG, SYSLOG usage,
 log file name, registered databases, ...).
 All of the following options have a alpm_option_get_* and alpm_option_set_*
-function for getting and setting the value. They cannot be set before the
+function for getting and setting the value.  The cannot be set before the
 library is initialized.
 * logcb: The callback function for "log" operations.
-* dlcb: The callback function for download progress of each package.
+* dlcb: The callback function for download progress.
-* fetchcb: Callback for custom download function.
+* logmask: The logging mask for which level of output is sent to the logcb.
-* eventcb: Callback for transaction messages.
+* root: The root directory on which pacman operates (Default: /)
-* questioncb: Callback for selecting amongst choices.
+* dbpath: The base path to pacman's databases (Default: var/lib/pacman)
-* progresscb: Callback to handle display of transaction progress.
+* cachedir: The base path to pacman's download cache (Default: var/cache/pacman)
-* gpgdir: Directory where GnuPG files are stored.
+* logfile: The base path to pacman's log file (Default: var/log/pacman.log)
 * arch: Allowed package architecture.
 * checkspace: Check disk space before installing.
 * default_siglevel: Default signature verification level.
 * local_file_siglevel: Signature verification level for local file upgrades.
 * remote_file_siglevel: Signature verification level for remote file upgrades.
 * logfile: The base path to pacman's log file (Default: /var/log/pacman.log)
 * usesyslog: Log to syslog instead of `logfile` for file-base logging.
 * upgradedelay: The time span to wait before listing a package as an upgrade (Default: 0)
 * xfercommand: The command to use for downloading instead of pacman's internal
             downloading functionality.
 * nopassiveftp: Do not use passive FTP commands for ftp connections.
 * chomp: No way, easter eggs are secret!
 * usecolor: Unimplemented, but for the future. You can assume what it means.
-The following options also have `alpm_option_{add,remove}_*` functions, as the
+The following options also have a `alpm_option_add_*` function, as the values
-values are list structures.
+are list structures (NOTE: The add functions are NOT plural, as they're in
-NOTE: The add and remove functions are NOT plural, as they are in English:
+english: alpm_option_get_noupgrades -> alpm_option_add_noupgrade).
 alpm_option_{get,set}_noupgrades -> alpm_option_{add,remove}_noupgrade.
 * cachedirs: Paths to pacman's download caches (Default: /var/cache/pacman/pkg)
 * noupgrades: Files which will never be touched by pacman (extracted as .pacnew)
 * noextracts: Files which will never be extracted at all (no .pacnew file)
 * ignorepkgs: Packages to ignore when upgrading.
-* ignoregrps: Groups to ignore when upgrading.
+* holdpkgs: Packages which must be upgraded before continuing.
 The following options are read-only, having ONLY alpm_option_get_* functions:
-* root: The root directory for pacman to install to
+* localdb: A pmdb_t structure for the local (installed) database
-* dbpath: The toplevel database directory
+* syncdbs: A list of pmdb_t structures to which pacman can sync from.
 * lockfile: The file used for locking the database (Default: <dbpath>/db.lck)
 [Transactions]
-The transaction structure permits easy manipulations of several packages
+The transaction sturcture permits easy manipulations of several packages
 at a time (i.e. adding, upgrade and removal operations).
-A transaction can be initiated with a type (SYNC, UPGRADE or REMOVE),
+A transaction can be initiated with a type (ADD, UPGRADE or REMOVE),
 and some flags (NODEPS, FORCE, CASCADE, ...).
 Note: there can only be one type at a time: a transaction is either
@ -107,7 +106,7 @@ These targets represent the list of packages to be handled.
 Then, a transaction needs to be prepared (alpm_trans_prepare()). It
 means that the various targets added, will be inspected and challenged
-against the set of already installed packages (dependency checking, etc...)
+against the set of already installed packages (dependency checkings,
 Last, a callback is associated with each transaction. During the
 transaction resolution, each time a new step is started or done (i.e
@ -118,27 +117,27 @@ the resolution. Can be useful to implement a progress bar.
 [Package Cache]
-libalpm maintains two caches for each DB. One is a general package cache, the
+libalpm maintains two caches for each DB.  One is a general package cache, the
-other is a group cache (for package groups). These caches are loaded on demand,
+other is a group cache (for package groups).  These caches are loaded on demand,
-and freed when the library is.
+and freed when the libary is.
-
+It is important to note tha, as a general rule, package structures should NOT be
-It is important to note that, as a general rule, package structures should NOT
+freed manually, as they SHOULD be part of the cache.
-be freed manually, as they SHOULD be part of the cache.  The cache of a
+The cache of a database is always updated by the library after
-database is always updated by the library after an operation changing the
+an operation changing the database content (adding and/or removal of
-database content (adding and/or removal of packages).  Beware frontends ;)
+packages). Beware frontends ;)
 [Package]
-The package structure maintains all information for a package. In general,
+The package structure maintains all information for a package.  In general,
-packages should never be freed from front-ends, as they should always be part
+packages should never be freed from front-ends, as they should always be part of
-of the package cache.
+the package cache.
-The 'origin' data member indicates whether the package is from a file (i.e. -U
+The 'origin' data member indicates whether the package is from a file
-operations) or from the package cache. In the case of a file, all data members
+(i.e. -U operations) or from the package cache.  In the case of a file, all data
-available are present in the structure. Packages indicated as being from the
+members available are present in the structure.  Packages indicated as being
-cache have data members filled on demand. For this reason, the alpm_pkg_get_*
+from the cache have data members filled on demand.  For this reason, the
-functions will load the data from the DB as needed.
+alpm_pkg_get_* functions will load the data from the DB as needed.
 [Errors]
@ -151,15 +150,13 @@ indicating success, -1 indicating a failure.
 If -1 is returned, the variable pm_errno is set to a meaningful value
 Wise frontends should always care for these returned values.
-Note: the helper function alpm_strerror() can also be used to translate one
+Note: the helper function alpm_strerror() can also be used to translate
-specified error code into a more friendly sentence, and alpm_strerrorlast()
+the error code into a more friendly sentence.
 does the same for the last error encountered (represented by pm_errno).
 [List - alpm_list_t] 
 The alpm_list_t structure is a doubly-linked list for use with the libalpm
-routines. This type is provided publicly so that frontends are free to use it
+routines.  This type is provided publicly so that frontends are free to use it
 if they have no native list type (C++, glib, python, etc all have list types).
 See the proper man pages for alpm_list_t references.
@ -183,576 +180,41 @@ perform a special action.
 [MAIN] (see pacman.c)
-Calls for alpm_initialize(), and alpm_release().
+Calls for alpm_lib_init(), and alpm_lib_release().
 Read the configuration file, and parse command line arguments.
 Based on the action requested, it initiates the appropriate transactions
-(see pacman_upgrade(), pacman_remove(), pacman_sync() in files upgrade.c,
+(see pacman_add(), pacman_remove(), pacman_sync() in files add.c,
 remove.c and sync.c).
-[CONFIGURATION] (see conf.h)
+[CONFIGURATION] (see conf.c)
-The frontend is using a configuration file, usually "/etc/pacman.conf".  Some
+The frontend is using a configuration file, usually "/etc/pacman.conf".
-of these options are only useful for the frontend only (mainly the ones used to
+Part of these options are only useful for the frontend only (mainly,
-control the output like verbosepkglist, or the behavior with cleanmethod).
+the download stuffs, and some options like HOLDPKG).
 The rest is used to configure the library.
-[UPGRADE/REMOVE/SYNC]
+[ADD/UPGRADE/REMOVE/SYNC]
 Nothing new here, excepted some reorganization.
 The file pacman.c has been divided into several smaller files, namely
-upgrade.c, remove.c, sync.c and query.c, to hold the big parts: pacman_upgrade,
+add.c, remove.c, sync.c and query.c, to hold the big parts: pacman_add,
 pacman_remove, pacman_sync.
 These 3 functions have been split to ease the code reading.
 LIMITATIONS/BEHAVIOR CHANGES COMPARED TO PACMAN 2.9
 ===================================================
-API CHANGES BETWEEN 3.1 AND 3.2
+Excepted missing features still needing to be implemented, one can
-===============================
+notice the following limitations:
-[REMOVED]
+- If pacman is out of date, the frontend displays a warning and recommends
- alpm_db_whatprovides()
+to give up the on-going transanction. The frontend does not allow to
- alpm_splitdep (no longer public)
+upgrade pacman itself on-the-fly, and thus it should be restarted with
- trans->targets was removed, so alpm_trans_get_targets() as well
+only "pacman" as a target.
 - error codes:
    PM_ERR_OPT_*, PM_ERR_PKG_INSTALLED, PM_ERR_DLT_CORRUPTED,
    PM_ERR_LIBARCHIVE_ERROR
 - event: PM_TRANS_EVT_EXTRACT_DONE
 - PM_TRANS_TYPE_ADD pmtranstype_t (add transaction)
 - PM_TRANS_FLAG_DEPENDSONLY pmtransflag_t
-[CHANGED]
+- ...
 - alpm_grp_get_pkgs returns with pmpkg_t list, not package-name list
 - Swap parameters on PM_TRANS_CONV_INSTALL_IGNOREPKG callback function
 - download callback API changed: alpm_cb_download, alpm_cb_totaldl split
  (+ new alpm_option_get_totaldlcb(), alpm_option_set_totaldlcb() functions)
 - unsigned long->off_t changes where size is used
 - pmsyncpkg_t struct changes:
  - pmsynctype_t and alpm_sync_get_type() were removed
  - alpm_sync_get_data() was removed
  - alpm_sync_get_removes() was added
 [ADDED]
 - alpm_delta_get_from_md5sum(), alpm_delta_get_to_md5sum()
 - alpm_miss_get_causingpkg() (new causingpkg field in pmdepmissing_t)
 - alpm_checkdbconflicts()
 - alpm_sync_newversion()
 - alpm_deptest()
 - error codes:
    PM_ERR_DLT_INVALID, PM_ERR_LIBARCHIVE, PM_ERR_LIBDOWNLOAD and
    PM_ERR_EXTERNAL_DOWNLOAD
 - flags:
    PM_TRANS_FLAG_ALLEXPLICIT, PM_TRANS_FLAG_UNNEEDED and
    PM_TRANS_FLAG_RECURSEALL
 API CHANGES BETWEEN 3.2 AND 3.3
 ===============================
 [REMOVED]
 - pmsyncpkg_t struct (pmpkg_t is used for all types of transaction targets):
  - alpm_sync_get_pkg()
  - alpm_sync_get_removes() (use alpm_pkg_get_removes() instead)
 - HoldPkg handling (it is the front-end's task):
  - alpm_option_get_holdpkgs()
  - alpm_option_add_holdpkg()
  - alpm_option_set_holdpkgs()
  - alpm_option_remove_holdpkg()
  - PM_TRANS_CONV_REMOVE_HOLDPKG conversation
 - Print URIs feature (it is the front-end's task):
  - flag: PM_TRANS_FLAG_PRINTURIS
  - event: PM_TRANS_EVT_PRINTURI
 - alpm_delta_get_from_md5sum() and alpm_delta_get_to_md5sum()
 - alpm_sync_sysupgrade()
 - error codes:
    PM_ERR_TRANS_COMMITING, PM_ERR_TRANS_DOWNLOADING, PM_ERR_PKG_LOAD,
    PM_ERR_PKG_CANT_FRESH, PM_ERR_GRP_NOT_FOUND, PM_ERR_USER_ABORT,
    PM_ERR_INTERNAL_ERROR, PM_ERR_DB_SYNC, PM_ERR_PKG_HOLD and
    PM_ERR_LIBDOWNLOAD
 [CHANGED]
 - XferCommand support was removed, any fetch callback function can be defined:
  - alpm_option_get_xfercommand() and alpm_option_set_xfercommand() were removed
  - alpm_option_get_fetchcb() and alpm_option_set_fetchcb() were added
 - function renames:
  - alpm_db_getpkgcache() -> alpm_db_get_pkgcache()
  - alpm_db_getgrpcache() -> alpm_db_get_grpcache()
  - alpm_dep_get_string() -> alpm_dep_compute_string()
  - alpm_get_md5sum() -> alpm_compute_md5sum()
  - alpm_checkdbconflicts() -> alpm_checkconflicts()
 - alpm_trans_sysupgrade() has a new enable_downgrade parameter
 - alpm_checkdeps() and alpm_checkconflicts() require local package list instead
  of local database
 - the to-be-upgraded package is passed to the callback function with
  PM_TRANS_EVT_UPGRADE_START (as the second parameter)
 - the "requiredby" package is never passed to the callback function with
  PM_TRANS_CONV_INSTALL_IGNOREPKG (the second parameter is always NULL)
 [ADDED]
 - alpm_pkg_get_db()
 - alpm_pkg_get_removes()
 - conversation: PM_TRANS_CONV_REMOVE_PKGS (remove unresolvable targets)
 - flag: PM_TRANS_FLAG_NOLOCK (do not lock database)
 - error codes:
    PM_ERR_SERVER_NONE, PM_ERR_TRANS_NOT_LOCKED, PM_ERR_PKG_IGNORED and
    PM_ERR_LIBFETCH
 API CHANGES BETWEEN 3.3 AND 3.4
 ===============================
 [REMOVED]
 - pmtranstype_t struct (transaction type), alpm_trans_get_type()
 - alpm_option_get_nopassiveftp(), alpm_option_set_nopassiveftp()
 [CHANGED]
 - interface for target loading:
  - alpm_trans_addtarget() and alpm_trans_sysupgrade() were removed
  - alpm_sync_target() and alpm_sync_dbtarget() can be used to add a sync target
  - alpm_sync_sysupgrade() can be used to add outdated packages (for sysupgrade)
  - alpm_add_target() can be used to add an add/upgrade target
  - alpm_remove_target() can be used to add a remove target
 - interface for target listing:
  - alpm_trans_get_pkgs() was removed
  - alpm_pkg_get_removes() was removed
  - alpm_trans_get_add() can be used to list add/upgrade/sync targets
  - alpm_trans_get_remove() can be used to list to-be-removed packages
 - the type parameter of alpm_trans_init() was removed
 - the type of alpm_db_fetch callback function: mtimeold and mtimenew parameters
  were replaced by force parameter
 - unsigned short -> int changes for Boolean variables
 [ADDED]
 - alpm_db_set_pkgreason()
 - alpm_option_get_arch(), alpm_option_set_arch()
 - alpm_option_get_usedelta()
 - alpm_pkg_unused_deltas()
 - alpm_conflict_get_reason()
 - error code: PM_ERR_PKG_INVALID_ARCH
 API CHANGES BETWEEN 3.4 AND 3.5
 ===============================
 [REMOVED]
 - alpm_db_register_local()
 - alpm_pkg_has_force()
 - alpm_depcmp()
 [CHANGED]
 - alpm_trans_cb_progress type had some types changed from int to size_t
 - alpm_cb_log format string is now const char *
 - the interface to add/remove targets:
  - functions take pmpkg_t * rather than char *.
  - alpm_sync_target() and alpm_sync_dbtarget() are replaced by alpm_add_pkg()
  - alpm_add_target() is replaced by alpm_add_pkg()
  - alpm_remove_target() is replaced by alpm_remove_pkg()
  - packages can come from:
     - alpm_db_get_pkg() for normal targets
     - alpm_find_dbs_satisfier() for versioned provisions
     - alpm_find_grp_pkgs() for groups
 - alpm_deptest() is replaced by the more flexible alpm_find_satisfier()
 - size_t used for alpm_list_t sizes
  - return type for alpm_list_count()
  - parameter type in alpm_list_msort() and alpm_list_nth()
 [ADDED]
 - alpm_option_get_checkspace(), alpm_option_set_checkspace()
 - alpm_find_grp_pkgs()
 - alpm_trans_get_flags()
 - error codes:
    PM_ERR_DISK_SPACE, PM_ERR_WRITE
 - flags:
    PM_TRANS_FLAG_NODEPVERSION, PM_TRANS_EVT_DISKSPACE_START,
    PM_TRANS_EVT_DISKSPACE_DONE, PM_TRANS_CONV_SELECT_PROVIDER,
    PM_TRANS_PROGRESS_DISKSPACE_START, PM_TRANS_PROGRESS_INTEGRITY_START
 API CHANGES BETWEEN 3.5 AND 4.0
 ===============================
 [REMOVED]
 - error codes:
    PM_ERR_LIBFETCH, PM_ERR_WRITE
 - alpm_option_set_root(), alpm_option_set_dbpath()
 - alpm_list_first()
 - alpm_grp_get_name(), alpm_grp_get_pkgs()
 - alpm_delta_get_from(), alpm_delta_get_to(), alpm_delta_get_filename(),
    alpm_delta_get_md5sum(), alpm_delta_get_size()
 - alpm_miss_get_target(), alpm_miss_get_dep(), alpm_miss_get_causingpkg()
 - alpm_dep_get_mod(), alpm_dep_get_name(), alpm_dep_get_version()
 - alpm_conflict_get_package1(), alpm_conflict_get_package2(),
    alpm_conflict_get_reason()
 - alpm_fileconflict_get_target(), alpm_fileconflict_get_type(),
    alpm_fileconflict_get_file(), alpm_fileconflict_get_ctarget()
 - alpm_db_get_url()
 [CHANGED]
 - PM_ prefixes for enum values are now ALPM_
 - pm prefixes for structs and enums are now alpm_
 - alpm_initialize now has parameters: char *root, char *dbpath,
    alpm_errno_t *err and returns an alpm_handle_t struct.
 - alpm_release now takes an alpm_handle_t *.
 - alpm_db_register_sync() now requires a extra parameter of a alpm_siglevel_t.
 - alpm_pkg_load() now requires an extra parameter of an alpm_siglevel_t
 - alpm_db_setserver() replaced by alpm_db_set_servers(), alpm_db_add_server(),
    alpm_db_remove_server()
 - alpm_trans_init() no longer takes callbacks, set those using
    alpm_option_set_*cb() functions
 - many functions now require a first parameter of an alpm_handle_t *:
  - alpm_option_get_*
  - alpm_option_set_*
  - alpm_option_add_*
  - alpm_option_remove_*
  - alpm_trans_*
  - alpm_add_pkg
  - alpm_checkconflicts
  - alpm_checkdeps
  - alpm_db_register_sync
  - alpm_db_set_pkgreason
  - alpm_db_unregister_all
  - alpm_fetch_pkgurl
  - alpm_find_dbs_satisfier
  - alpm_logaction
  - alpm_pkg_load
  - alpm_release
  - alpm_remove_pkg
  - alpm_sync_sysupgrade
 - several structs are no longer opaque:
  - alpm_conflict_t
  - alpm_delta_t
  - alpm_depend_t
  - alpm_depmissing_t
  - alpm_depmod_t
  - alpm_fileconflict_t
  - alpm_group_t
  - alpm_pkg_reason_t
 [ADDED]
 - option functions:
  - alpm_{get,set}_eventcb()
  - alpm_option_{get,set}_convcb()
  - alpm_option_{get,set}_progresscb()
 - package signing functions:
  - alpm_option_get_default_siglevel()
  - alpm_option_set_default_siglevel()
  - alpm_option_get_gpgdir()
  - alpm_option_set_gpgdir()
  - alpm_db_get_siglevel()
  - alpm_siglist_cleanup()
  - alpm_db_check_pgp_signature()
  - alpm_pkg_check_pgp_signature()
  - alpm_pkg_get_origin()
  - alpm_pkg_get_sha256sum()
  - alpm_pkg_get_base64_sig()
 - list functions:
  - alpm_list_to_array()
  - alpm_list_previous()
 - structs:
  - alpm_backup_t
  - alpm_file_t
  - alpm_filelist_t
 - enums:
  - alpm_siglevel_t
  - alpm_sigstatus_t
  - alpm_sigvalidity_t
  - alpm_pkgfrom_t
 - error codes:
    ALPM_ERR_DB_INVALID, ALPM_ERR_DB_INVALID_SIG, ALPM_ERR_GPGME,
    ALPM_ERR_PKG_INVALID_CHECKSUM, ALPM_ERR_PKG_INVALID_SIG, ALPM_ERR_SIG_INVALID,
    ALPM_ERR_SIG_MISSING
 API CHANGES BETWEEN 4.0 AND 4.1
 ===============================
 [REMOVED]
 - alpm_list_getdata()
 [CHANGED]
 - alpm_pkgfrom_t members are now prefixed with ALPM_
 - alpm_siglevel_t - added members ALPM_SIG_PACKAGE_SET, ALPM_SIG_PACKAGE_TRUST_SET
 - alpm_depend_t - additional desc member
 - alpm_filelist_t - additional resolved_path member
 - alpm_pgpkey_t - added members length, revoked, pubkey_algo
 - alpm_logaction - added caller identifier argument
 - function renaming:
  - alpm_option_get_localdb -> alpm_get_localdb
  - alpm_option_get_syncdbs -> alpm_get_syncdbs
  - alpm_db_register_sync -> alpm_register_syncdb
  - alpm_db_unregister_all -> alpm_unregister_all_syncdbs
  - alpm_db_readgroup -> alpm_db_get_group
  - alpm_db_set_pkgreason -> alpm_pkg_set_reason (handle parameter removed)
 - alpm_time_t typedef used for all times:
  - members of alpm_pgpkey_t
  - return types of alpm_pkg_get_builddate and alpm_pkg_get_installdate
 - delta options now use required ratio rather than on/off:
  - alpm_option_get_usedelta -> alpm_option_get_deltaratio
  - alpm_option_set_usedelta -> alpm_option_set_deltaratio
 [ADDED]
 - tracking of how a package was validated:
  - alpm_pkgvalidation_t
  - alpm_pkg_get_validation()
 - adjustable signature verification levels for upgrade operations:
  - alpm_option_get_local_file_siglevel()
  - alpm_option_set_local_file_siglevel()
  - alpm_option_get_remote_file_siglevel()
  - alpm_option_set_remote_file_siglevel()
 - sync database usage functions:
  - alpm_db_usage_t
  - alpm_db_set_usage()
  - alpm_db_get_usage()
 - wrapper functions for reading mtree files:
  - alpm_pkg_mtree_open()
  - alpm_pkg_mtree_next()
  - alpm_pkg_mtree_close()
 - utility functions:
  - alpm_pkg_find()
  - alpm_pkg_compute_optionalfor()
  - alpm_filelist_contains()
 - types:
  - alpm_time_t
  - alpm_errno_t
 - flags:
    ALPM_EVENT_OPTDEP_REQUIRED, ALPM_EVENT_DATABASE_MISSING,
    ALPM_EVENT_KEYRING_START, ALPM_EVENT_KEYRING_DONE, ALPM_EVENT_KEY_DOWNLOAD_START,
    ALPM_EVENT_KEY_DOWNLOAD_DONE, ALPM_PROGRESS_KEYRING_START
 API CHANGES BETWEEN 4.1 AND 4.2
 ===============================
 [CHANGED]
 - alpm_filelist_t - removed member resolved_path
 - alpm_filelist_contains - now returns alpm_file_t
 - event callback:
  - alpm_event_t renamed to alpm_event_type_t
  - alpm_event_t union added
  - alpm_event_cb now takes only an alpm_event_t parameter
  - alpm_event_any_t, alpm_package_operation_t, alpm_event_package_operation_t,
    alpm_event_optdep_removal_t, alpm_event_delta_patch_t, alpm_event_scriptlet_info_t,
    alpm_event_database_missing_t, alpm_event_pkgdownload_t, alpm_event_pacnew_created_t,
    alpm_event_pacsave_created_t, alpm_event_pacorig_created_t added
  - ALPM_EVENT_*_START -> ALPM_EVENT_PACKAGE_OPERATION_START
  - ALPM_EVENT_*_DONE -> ALPM_EVENT_PACKAGE_OPERATION_DONE
 - question callback:
  - alpm_question_t renamed to alpm_question_type_t
  - alpm_question_t union added
  - alpm_cb_question now takes only an alpm_question_t parameter
  - alpm_question_any_t, alpm_question_install_ignorepkg_t, alpm_question_replace_t
    alpm_question_conflict_t, alpm_question_corrupted_t, alpm_question_remove_pkgs_t,
    alpm_question_select_provider_t, alpm_question_import_key_t added
 [ADDED]
 - memory management:
  - alpm_fileconflict_free()
  - alpm_depmissing_free()
  - alpm_conflict_free()
  - alpm_dep_free()
 - database usage:
  - alpm_db_usage_t
  - alpm_db_set_usage()
  - alpm_db_get_usage()
 - assume installed:
  - alpm_option_get_assumeinstalled()
  - alpm_option_add_assumeinstalled()
  - alpm_option_set_assumeinstalled()
  - alpm_option_remove_assumeinstalled()
 - using noupgrade/noextract:
  - alpm_option_match_noupgrade()
  - alpm_option_match_noextract()
 - utility functions:
  - alpm_dep_from_string()
  - alpm_pkg_should_ignore()
  - alpm_decode_signature()
  - alpm_extract_keyid()
 - flags:
    ALPM_EVENT_RETRIEVE_DONE, ALPM_EVENT_RETRIEVE_FAILED, ALPM_EVENT_PKGDOWNLOAD_START,
    ALPM_EVENT_PKGDOWNLOAD_DONE, ALPM_EVENT_PKGDOWNLOAD_FAILED, ALPM_EVENT_OPTDEP_REMOVAL,
    ALPM_EVENT_PACNEW_CREATED, ALPM_EVENT_PACSVAE_CREATED, ALPM_EVENT_PACORIG_CREATED
 API CHANGES BETWEEN 4.2 AND 5.0
 ===============================
 [REMOVED]
 - alpm_siglevel_t - removed members ALPM_SIG_PACKAGE_SET, ALPM_SIG_PACKAGE_TRUST_SET
 - removed .pacorig generation:
  - ALPM_EVENT_PACORIG_CREATED
  - alpm_event_pacorig_created_t
  - alpm_event_t.pacorig_created
 [ADDED]
 - hook support:
  - alpm_option_get_hookdirs()
  - alpm_option_set_hookdirs()
  - alpm_option_add_hookdir()
  - alpm_option_remove_hookdir()
  - alpm_event_hook_t, alpm_event_hook_run_t
  - alpm_hook_when_t
  - ALPM_EVENT_HOOK_START, ALPM_EVENT_HOOK_DONE
  - ALPM_EVENT_HOOK_RUN_START, ALPM_EVENT_HOOK_RUN_DONE
  - ALPM_ERR_TRANS_HOOK_FAILED
 - different database extension support:
  - alpm_option_get_dbext()
  - alpm_option_set_dbext()
 - pkgbase accessor:
  - alpm_pkg_get_base()
 - transaction events:
  - ALPM_EVENT_TRANSACTION_START, ALPM_EVENT_TRANSACTION_DONE
 - database unlocking:
  - alpm_unlock()
 API CHANGES BETWEEN 5.0 AND 5.1
 ===============================
 [CHANGED]
 - alpm_errno_t - added member ALPM_ERR_OK
 - alpm_siglevel_t - value of ALPM_SIG_USE_DEFAULT changed
 - functions using bitfields return/pass an int instead of an enum:
  - alpm_option_get_default_siglevel()
  - alpm_option_set_default_siglevel()
  - alpm_option_get_remote_file_siglevel()
  - alpm_option_set_remote_file_siglevel()
  - alpm_register_syncdb()
  - alpm_db_get_siglevel()
  - alpm_db_set_usage()
  - alpm_db_get_usage()
  - alpm_pkg_load()
  - alpm_pkg_get_validation()
  - alpm_trans_get_flags()
  - alpm_trans_init()
  - alpm_option_get_local_file_siglevel()
  - alpm_option_set_local_file_siglevel()
 [ADDED]
 - overwrite support:
  - alpm_option_get_overwrite_files()
  - alpm_option_set_overwrite_files()
  - alpm_option_add_overwrite_file()
  - alpm_option_remove_overwrite_file()
 - download timeout control:
  - alpm_option_set_disable_dl_timeout()
 - access make/checkdepends info:
  - alpm_pkg_get_checkdepends()
  - alpm_pkg_get_makedepends()
 - check pacman capabilities:
  - alpm_capabilities()
 - duplicate and add to list:
  - alpm_list_append_strdup()
 API CHANGES BETWEEN 5.1 AND 5.2
 ===============================
 [REMOVED]
 - package delta support:
  - alpm_delta_t
  - alpm_event_delta_patch_t
  - alpm_event_t union - removed alpm_event_delta_patch_t
  - ALPM_EVENT_DELTA_INTEGRITY_START, ALPM_EVENT_DELTA_INTEGRITY_DONE,
    ALPM_EVENT_DELTA_PATCHES_START, ALPM_EVENT_DELTA_PATCHES_DONE,
    ALPM_EVENT_DELTA_PATCH_START, ALPM_EVENT_DELTA_PATCH_DONE,
    ALPM_EVENT_DELTA_PATCH_FAILED
  - ALPM_ERR_DLT_INVALID, ALPM_ERR_DLT_PATCHFAILED
  - alpm_option_get_deltaratio()
  - alpm_option_set_deltaratio()
  - alpm_pkg_get_deltas()
  - alpm_pkg_unused_deltas()
 - alpm_transflag_t - removed member ALPM_TRANS_FLAG_FORCE
 [CHANGED]
 - alpm_errno_t - added member ALPM_ERR_MISSING_CAPABILITY_SIGNATURES
 - alpm_sync_newversion() replaced with alpm_sync_get_new_version() which
  does not filter on any ALPM_DB_USAGE_*.
 API CHANGES BETWEEN 5.2 AND 6.0
 ===============================
 [REMOVED]
 - ALPM_EVENT_PKGDOWNLOAD_START, ALPM_EVENT_PKGDOWNLOAD_DONE, ALPM_EVENT_PKGDOWNLOAD_FAILED
 - ALPM_ERR_PKG_REPO_NOT_FOUND
 - old TotalDownload implementation:
  - alpm_cb_totaldl
  - alpm_option_get_totaldlcb()
  - alpm_option_set_totaldlcb()
 [CHANGED]
 - alpm_db_update() now accepts a list of databases rather than a single database.
 - alpm_fetch_pkgurl() accepts a list of packages to download.
 - alpm_db_search() now has an additional parameter and returns success status
 - ALPM_EVENT_RETRIEVE_* -> ALPM_EVENT_DB_RETRIEVE_* and ALPM_EVENT_PKG_RETRIEVE_*
 - alpm_cb_download pass event and data
 - multi architecture support:
  - alpm_option_get_arch() -> alpm_option_get_architectures()
  - alpm_option_set_arch() -> alpm_option_set_architectures()
 - alpm_db_get_servers() copies parameter data
 [ADDED]
 - parallel download support:
  - alpm_option_set_parallel_downloads()
  - alpm_option_get_parallel_downloads()
 - file download events:
  - alpm_download_event_type_t
  - alpm_download_event_init_t
  - alpm_download_event_progress_t
  - alpm_download_event_completed_t
 - download misc:
  - ALPM_DOWNLOAD_RETRY
  - alpm_download_event_retry_t
  - alpm_event_pkg_retrieve_t
 - multiarchitecture support:
  - alpm_option_add_architecture()
  - alpm_option_remove_architecture()
 - misc:
  - alpm_pkg_get_sig()
 - callbacks add front-end provided context
 API CHANGES BETWEEN 6.0 AND 6.1
 ===============================
 [REMOVED]
 - alpm_trans_t
 [CHANGED]
 - alpm_conflict_t - full package added as member, removing package name and name
  hash members
 - alpm_question_import_key_t - holds key uid and fingerprint rather than alpm_pgpkey_t
 - alpm_pkgreason_t - added ALPM_PKG_REASON_UNKNOWN
 - alpm_transflag_t - added ALPM_TRANS_FLAG_NOHOOKS
 [ADDED]
 - extensible package data type:
  - alpm_pkg_xdata_t
  - alpm_pkg_get_xdata()
 - accessor functions:
  - alpm_db_get_handle()
  - alpm_pkg_get_handle()
 - cache server support:
  - alpm_db_get_cache_servers()
  - alpm_db_set_cache_servers()
  - alpm_db_add_cache_server()
 API CHANGES BETWEEN 6.1 AND 7.0
 ===============================
 [ADDED]
 - sandbox functions:
  - alpm_option_get_sandboxuser()
  - alpm_option_set_sandboxuser()
  - alpm_option_set_disable_sandbox()
  - alpm_sandbox_setup_child()
 API CHANGES BETWEEN 7.0 AND 7.1
 ===============================
 [CHANGED]
 - error codes:
    PM_ERR_TRANS_COMMITING renamed to PM_ERR_TRANS_COMMITTING
--- a/34
+++ b/34
@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
 The following checklist should be used for making a pacman release.
 - Ensure "ninja dist" succeeds
 - Call a freeze to development.
 - Send translation updates to Transifex at least two weeks before a major
  release (see below).  At this stage, strings can only be changed for a
  major issue.
 - Update NEWS and README files
 - Pull translation updates from Transifex
 - Update version in meson.build as described in file
 - Update doc/index.asciidoc
 - Create a signed git tag (git tag -s vX.Y.Z -m "commit message")
 - Create and sign release tarballs (generate with "ninja dist")
 - Create release on gitlab project page
 - Upload release tarball and signature to gitlab ("glab release upload ...")
 - Create branch release/?.?.x (with ?.? replaced by major version number)
 - Update .gitlab-ci.yml to point the website pages run at release branch
 Transifex updates are handled using the transifex client. The basic process is:
 - Pull updates from transifex ("tx pull -f --minimum-perc 75")
 - Update po files ("./build-aux/update-po")
 - Fix all translation errors found (e.g. using "mint-check-translations")
 - Add any new locales to the relevant LINGUAS file
 - Optional: Make any manual changes needed (e.g. fixing spacing in a string)
  and update po files again
 - Push updated po files to transifex ("tx push -s -t --skip")
 Point releases:
 - all bugs fixes slated for the release branch must first land on master
  (unless no longer relevant)
 - following the initial post-release period when the release and master
  branches may be kept in sync, commits are backported to the release branch
  using "git cherry-pick -x"
 - translation updates should be pulled onto the release branch only
--- a/TODO.aaron
+++ b/TODO.aaron
@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
 == This is my custom TODO file ==
 * transaction object should contain two package list (install and remove)
  instead of a single list of syncpkgs - this should allow us to get rid of that
  type.  This also requires seperate functionality to return a list of
  "replaces" packages to the front end, so the frontend can handle the QUESTION()
  stuff in that case
 * Look into other VCSs to use.  The main CVS repo will remain, but having a
  distributed system to allow for easy patching/pushing/pulling would be nice
  - monotone and mercurial look like the top contenders in my book, but I need
    to evaluate both a bit more.
 * src/pacman:
  There's quite a few single function headers which contain the pacman_*
  functions.  We should move these to a single header (pacman.h) to clean up
  the source a bit.
 * libalpm -> front end communication needs a work-up.  Both progress functions
  can be combined into one callback, IFF we adjust it to accept a prefix string
  for the progress bars, and format it at the lib side.  Question functions
  should also do the same - create the string at the library side, and simply
  call some sort of int yes_no = ask_question("Do foo with bar?");
 * move logging (alpm_logaction) out of the library.  log files should be
  written by the app, not the library.  Adding a PM_LOG_* constant that
  frontends can recognize and send to a file is probably a good idea.
 * clear up list allocation/deallocation - some lists need to be free'd, some
  do not and there is no clear indication WHEN this should happen.
 * remove DB entries (directories) on a read error?
 * Add a pm_errstr error string, which will allow us to do things like:
    pm_errno = PM_ERR_LIBARCHIVE;
    pm_errstr = archive_error_string(archive);
  or:
    pm_errno = PM_ERR_LIBDOWNLOAD;
    pm_errstr = downloadLastErrString;
  This way we don't break abstraction when returning specific errors in
  cases like the above.
 * pacman: A LOT of functions are way too long.  There should be an upper limit of
  100-200 lines.  _alpm_add_commit is around 600 lines, and is far too complex.
 * pacman: fixup doxygen documentation for public interface
 * libalpm: just because a function is in alpm.h doesn't mean it needs to be in
  alpm.c - we should move functions around where they should be.  In fact,
  alpm.c might not be needed at all, if things were organized properly.
 * feature for 3.1: package file hooks *
  I've been planning on this one for some time.  Here's a simple rundown:
  in /etc/pacman.d/hooks:
     Hook /usr/include/* : /usr/bin/ctags -R /usr/include/*.h -f /usr/include/systags
  This will allow us to make "global hooks" to simplify a lot of repetitive
  install files (scrollkeeper, depmod, etc).  This also allows us to move
  ldconfig out of pacman entirely.
  possible: /etc/pacman.hooks/* files for hooks, so packages can add them too
 * feature for 3.1: multiple search/match types
  option: MatchType regex (current way)
          MatchType fnmatch (use fnmatch to match things like 'pacman -S gnome*')
          MatchType plain (no matching.  expect plain text).
 * feature for 3.1: revamp the autotools system.  I'd LOVE to use a manual system
  like wmii and friends do.  It'd be real nice if we could just do away with
  autotools altogether.
 **** BUGS ****
 * Removal of conflicts on -A and -U (INCOMPLETE)
--- a/TODO.dan
+++ b/TODO.dan
@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
 TODO.dan
 ========
 This is my personal TODO list. No guarantees if it is out of date and things no
 longer apply. If you want to help out with any of it, send me an email.
 Only vaguely related to pacman:
 -------------------------------
 Port the libdownload (libfetch) manpage from BSD style to Linux style, or at
 very least change references to BSD.
 Pacman 3.0:
 -----------
 ideas mentioned here- http://bbs.archlinux.org/viewtopic.php?id=29450- add a
 .install message about mirrors, maybe comment whole file, encourage rankmirrors
 usage
 Pacman 3.1:
 -----------
 Documentation- look into moving man page format to a more portable source
 format to make translation easier to keep up-to-date (something like txt2tags,
 docbook, asciidoc) This will need some research.
 Update cache cleaning functionality - keep installed version, choose number to
 keep, etc. Good python script in the forums that we should try to emulate.
 Downgrade feature - allow users to see cached packages and downgrade to
 (previous or any?) available options.
 Extreme similarity between some of the sync and add code...we have to be able
 to abstract more away from sync actions and add actions to just 'actions'
 (example: sync,c, add.c, and deptest.c all contain a switch on PM_DEP_MOD_*).
 Merge update, add, and sync code when possible, so we reduce duplication.
 Review progress/transaction event subsystem. (from TODO)
 Add Doxygen comments to every function in libalpm including private functions.
 Ensure functions are doing exactly their purpose and nothing more. Find
 functions that perform duplicate behavior and merge them. Combine and refactor
 others. Delete unnecessary functions. Stop keeping everything clustered in
 little add/sync/remove parts, allow transactions to share code.
 Go through options list. Decide if namings are good, all options are still
 relevant, etc. Ideas for -Re (#6273), changing meaning of -c (has two meanings,
 another FS bug), etc. Remove the -A flag and possibly -D, -T, and -Y (-Y is
 killed now in favor of vercmp binary) if they can be done by other actions.
 Possible switch of -U --> -I (#5571).
 Rewrite _alpm_sortbydeps to use Topological Sort. Should work using a standard
 topo sort algorithm, once the crazy types can be fixed up a bit. Include a
 cycle check - print a big error message if this happens.
  -- http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Topological_sort
  -- http://everything2.com/?node_id=556079
 Review display and logging functions. There seems to be an abundance of them.
 Make it extensible to use color, review what verbose/debug means. Perhaps
 separate logging functionality- Pacman has its normal log, and alpm backend
 keeps a very simple log file - listing only adds (including syncs) and removes.
 This way a consistency list can be kept of what is currently installed and what
 isn't, without all the logging junk from the front end.
 If we stick with autotools, add more defines to configure.in, including
 CACHEDIR, PKGEXT, so these can be specified at configure time for ease of use
 by other distributions which may want to change the defaults. Also, review what
 needs to be in config.h and what does not. There may be excess #depends which
 are hard coded into the sources. (from TODO.autoconf)
 Profile the code. Find the functions that are being called a lot, and see what
 can be done about it. Find out if all these calls are necessary (e.g. excessive
 alpm_list_count calls), and maybe think about changing data structures to speed
 operations up (e.g. a 'count' field). NOTE: already found two huge issues with
 quick profiling- excessive setlocale calls, and extremely excessive strcmp
 calls.
 Localize the date display done in --info output. Also, fix other localized
 issues- use non-printf when necessary, make sure all two line printed messages
 (especially usage instructions) are printed using one print statement. We
 may need to use some wchar_t output on the progress bar as char/byte counts
 differ here.
 Rewrite makepkg to use terminal-safe coloring/bolding. tput utility should
 allow us to do this. Make universal message functions for systemwide use,
 including all pacman utilites- abs, pacman-optimize, etc.
 Bugs/FRs to smash: 6468, 6437, 6430?, 6420, 6404, 6389, 6312?, 6284, 6273?,
 6255?, 6208, 5987, 5885, 5571, 4182, 3492, 2810?, 1769, 1588, 1571
 Remove _alpm from function names now that we have SYMHIDDEN and static
 declarations.
 Remove alpm.c, put functions where they should be.
 Update doxygen comments, they may need some work. Try to document all of the
 private internal functions too- it helps a ton for people just getting a
 start on pacman hacking.
 Other smaller things:
 ---------------------
 unsigned int vs. unsigned- determine a standard and stick with it
 FS #4185 - move where message is logged, perhaps?
 Update copyrights (2007)
 Update pacman website, and add/finish pacman coding style page
 autogen.sh / autoclean.sh - these seem messy. Can we clean this up?
 Refine makepkg error codes. Each kind of failure could have its own code:
  --package already built
  --failed integ checks
  --failed build
  --etc.
 Add utility function to either frontend or backend to convert sizes: e.g. bytes
 to KB, MB, GB.
 Revamp the downloadprog function a bit. Seems kind of messy.
 Add localized pkgdesc variables to makepkg.
 --print-uri option to sync should not require saying yes or no to up to date
 Add testing scripts to pactest for issues we have been working on (especially 
 files moving between packages). Also, take a look at cleaning up the output and
 structure of the pactest.py program itself.
 Build a replacement for this, or at least standardize its use. We shouldn't
 always need to pass handle->root around, it is constant. Something like char*
 buildpath(file).
 	/* build the new entryname relative to handle->root */
 	snprintf(filename, PATH_MAX, "%s%s", handle->root, entryname);
 Random ideas:
 -------------
 Possibly split utilities/extras from pacman package
 Make .indent.pro file for GNU indent (started, but didn't finish)
--- a/60
+++ b/60
@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
 Thanks to all of those who have helped translate pacman, both in the past and
 currently. Our translations are currently maintained in Transifex; please read
 doc/translation-help.txt for more details.
 Below is a list of past translators before we switched to Transifex; more can
 be found by looking in the Git history.
 If your language is not already in the various po/ subdirectories and you wish
 it was, set up a team in Transifex for your language and we will be happy to
 add your language to the mix.
 Catalan (ca):
 	Manuel Tortosa <manutortosa@chakra-project.org>
 Czech (cs):
 	Vojtěch Gondžala <vojtech.gondzala@gmail.com>
 German (de):
 	Matthias Gorissen <matthias@archlinux.de>
 Greek (el):
 	Christos Nouskas <nouskas@gmail.com>
 British English (en_GB):
 	Jeff Bailes <thepizzaking@gmail.com>
 Spanish (es):
 	Juan Pablo González Tognarelli <lord_jotape@yahoo.com.ar>
 	Fernando Lagos <fernando@zerial.org>
 French (fr):
 	Chantry Xavier <shiningxc@gmail.com>
 Hungarian (hu):
 	Nagy Gabor <ngaba@bibl.u-szeged.hu>
 	Avramucz Péter <muczyjoe@gmail.com>
 Italian (it):
 	Giovanni Scafora <giovanni@archlinux.org>
 Kazakh (kk):
 	Baurzhan Muftakhidinov <baurthefirst@gmail.com>
 Norwegian (nb):
 	Hans-Kristian Arntzen <maister@archlinux.us>
 Polish (pl):
 	Mateusz Herych <heniekk@gmail.com>
 	Jaroslaw Swierczynski <swiergot@gmail.com>
 	Mateusz Jędrasik <m.jedrasik@gmail.com>
 Brazilian Portuguese (pt_BR):
 	Armando M. Baratti <ambaratti@archlinux-br.org>
 	Rodrigo Flores <flores@archlinux-br.org>
 	Marcelo Cavalcante <kalibslack@gmail.com>
 Romanian (ro):
 	Volodia Macovei <blog@volodia.ro>
 Russian (ru):
 	Sergey Tereschenko <serg.partizan@gmail.com>
 	Vitaly Dolgov <ferhiord@gmail.com>
 	Oleg Finkelshteyn <olegfink@gmail.com>
 	Vladimir Bayrakovskiy <4rayven@gmail.com>
 Swedish (sv):
 	Christian Larsson <congacx@gmail.com>
 Turkish (tr):
 	Samed Beyribey <ras0ir@eventualis.org>
 	Alper KANAT <alperkanat@gmail.com>
 Ukrainian (uk):
 	Roman Kyrylych (Роман Кирилич) <roman.kyrylych@gmail.com>
 	Ivan Kovnatsky (Іван Ковнацький) <sevenfourk@gmail.com>
 Simplified Chinese (zh_CN):
 	甘露(Lu.Gan) <rhythm.gan@gmail.com>
--- a/acinclude.m4
+++ b/acinclude.m4
--- a/autoclean.sh
+++ b/autoclean.sh
@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
 #!/bin/sh -xu
 [ -f Makefile ] && make distclean
 rm -rf autom4te.cache
 rm -rf {Makefile.in,Makefile}
 rm -rf {config.h.in,config.h}
 rm -rf config.status
 rm -rf configure
 rm -rf stamp*
 rm -rf aclocal.m4
 rm -rf compile
 rm -rf libtool
 rm -rf lib/libalpm/{Makefile.in,Makefile}
 rm -rf src/util/{Makefile.in,Makefile}
 rm -rf src/pacman/{Makefile.in,Makefile}
 rm -rf scripts/{Makefile.in,Makefile}
 rm -rf etc/{Makefile.in,Makefile}
 rm -rf etc/pacman.d/{Makefile.in,Makefile}
 rm -rf etc/abs/{Makefile.in,Makefile}
 rm -rf pactest/{Makefile.in,Makefile}
 rm -rf doc/{Makefile.in,Makefile}
 rm -rf doc/html/*.html
 rm -rf doc/man3/*.3
 rm -rf src/pacman/po/{Makefile.in,Makefile}
 rm -rf src/pacman/po/POTFILES
 rm -rf src/pacman/po/stamp-po
 rm -rf src/pacman/po/*.gmo
 rm -rf lib/libalpm/po/{Makefile.in,Makefile}
 rm -rf lib/libalpm/po/POTFILES
 rm -rf lib/libalpm/po/stamp-po
 rm -rf lib/libalpm/po/*.gmo
--- a/autogen.sh
+++ b/autogen.sh
@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
 #!/bin/sh -xu
 aclocal
 autoheader
 automake --foreign
 autoconf
--- a/build-aux/.gitignore
+++ b/build-aux/.gitignore
@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
 *
 !ltmain-asneeded.patch
--- a/build-aux/cat-test-file
+++ b/build-aux/cat-test-file
@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
 #!/usr/bin/python3
 import sys
 for path in sys.argv[1:]:
    print('# -----------------------------------')
    print('# ' + path + ':')
    print('# -----------------------------------')
    with open(path, 'r') as f:
        for line in f:
            print('# ' + line, end='')
--- a/build-aux/edit-script.sh.in
+++ b/build-aux/edit-script.sh.in
@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
 #!@BASH@
 input=$1
 output=$2
 mode=$3
 sed \
  -e "s|@rootdir[@]|@ROOTDIR@|g" \
  -e "s|@localedir[@]|@LOCALEDIR@|g" \
  -e "s|@sysconfdir[@]|@sysconfdir@|g" \
  -e "s|@localstatedir[@]|@localstatedir@|g" \
  -e "s|@libmakepkgdir[@]|@LIBMAKEPKGDIR@|g" \
  -e "s|@pkgdatadir[@]|@PKGDATADIR@|g" \
  -e "s|@keyringdir[@]|@KEYRINGDIR@|g" \
  -e "s|@prefix[@]|@PREFIX@|g" \
  -e "1s|#!/bin/bash|#!@BASH@|g" \
  -e "s|@PACKAGE_VERSION[@]|@PACKAGE_VERSION@|g" \
  -e "s|@PACKAGE_NAME[@]|@PACKAGE_NAME@|g" \
  -e "s|@BUILDSCRIPT[@]|@BUILDSCRIPT@|g" \
  -e "s|@TEMPLATE_DIR[@]|@TEMPLATE_DIR@|g" \
  -e "s|@DEBUGSUFFIX[@]|@DEBUGSUFFIX@|g" \
  -e "s|@INODECMD[@]|@INODECMD@|g" \
  -e "s|@FILECMD[@]|@FILECMD@|g" \
  -e "s|@BSDTAR_NO_READ_SPARSE[@]|@BSDTAR_NO_READ_SPARSE@|g" \
  "$input" >"$output"
 if [[ $mode ]]; then
  chmod "$mode" "$output"
 fi
--- a/build-aux/meson-make-symlink.sh
+++ b/build-aux/meson-make-symlink.sh
@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
 #!/bin/sh
 set -eu
 # this is needed mostly because $DESTDIR is provided as a variable,
 # and we need to create the target directory...
 mkdir -vp "$(dirname "${DESTDIR:-}$2")"
 rm -f "${DESTDIR:-}$2"
 ln -vs "$1" "${DESTDIR:-}$2"
--- a/build-aux/print-failed-test-output
+++ b/build-aux/print-failed-test-output
@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
 #!/usr/bin/python
 import json
 import sys
 def print_result(result):
    print('==================================================================')
    print(result['name'])
    print(' '.join(result['command']))
    print('==================================================================')
    print(result['stdout'])
 with open(sys.argv[1], 'r') as f:
    for line in f:
        result = json.loads(line)
        if result['result'] == 'FAIL':
            print_result(result)
--- a/build-aux/script-wrapper.sh.in
+++ b/build-aux/script-wrapper.sh.in
@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
 #!/bin/bash
 # This script serves as a trampoline for running scripts which depend on
 # libmakepkg with the libmakepkg within the build tree.
 MAKEPKG_LIBRARY=@BUILDDIR@/libmakepkg exec @BASH@ -$- @REAL_PROGPATH@ "$@"
--- a/build-aux/update-copyright
+++ b/build-aux/update-copyright
@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
 #! /bin/sh
 OLD=$1
 NEW=$2
 for file in $(git grep -l "Copyright .* Pacman Development" | grep -v "\.po"); do \
 	sed -i -e "/Copyright (/s/-${OLD}/-${NEW}/" -e "/Copyright (/s/ ${OLD}/ ${OLD}-${NEW}/" "$file"
 done
--- a/build-aux/update-po
+++ b/build-aux/update-po
@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
 #!/bin/bash
 find_build_directory() {
  local build_dirs=(*/build.ninja)
  if [[ ! -e ${build_dirs[0]} ]]; then
    echo "error: No build directory found. Have you run 'meson build' yet?" >&2
    return 1
  elif (( ${#build_dirs[*]} > 1 )); then
    echo "error: Multiple build directories found. Unable to proceed." >&2
    return 1
  fi
  printf '%s\n' "${build_dirs[0]%/*}"
 }
 filter_targets_by_name() {
  if command -v jq &>/dev/null; then
    jq --arg re "$1" -r 'map(.name)[] | select(match($re))'
  else
    json_pp | awk -v filter="$1" -F'[:"]' \
        '$2 == "name" && $(NF - 1) ~ filter { print $(NF - 1) }'
  fi
 }
 # Make things simple and require that we're in the build root rather than
 # trying to chase down the location of this script and the relative build dir.
 if [[ ! -d .git ]]; then
  echo "This script must be run from the root of the repository" >&2
  exit 1
 fi
 build_dir=$(find_build_directory) || exit 1
 mapfile -t targets < \
    <(meson introspect "$build_dir" --targets | filter_targets_by_name "-update-po$")
 ninja -C "$build_dir" "${targets[@]}"
--- a/config.guess
+++ b/config.guess
--- a/config.rpath
+++ b/config.rpath
@ -0,0 +1,614 @@
 #! /bin/sh
 # Output a system dependent set of variables, describing how to set the
 # run time search path of shared libraries in an executable.
 #
 #   Copyright 1996-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 #   Taken from GNU libtool, 2001
 #   Originally by Gordon Matzigkeit <gord@gnu.ai.mit.edu>, 1996
 #
 #   This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation gives
 #   unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, with or without
 #   modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
 #
 # The first argument passed to this file is the canonical host specification,
 #    CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-OPERATING_SYSTEM
 # or
 #    CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-KERNEL-OPERATING_SYSTEM
 # The environment variables CC, GCC, LDFLAGS, LD, with_gnu_ld
 # should be set by the caller.
 #
 # The set of defined variables is at the end of this script.
 # Known limitations:
 # - On IRIX 6.5 with CC="cc", the run time search patch must not be longer
 #   than 256 bytes, otherwise the compiler driver will dump core. The only
 #   known workaround is to choose shorter directory names for the build
 #   directory and/or the installation directory.
 # All known linkers require a `.a' archive for static linking (except MSVC,
 # which needs '.lib').
 libext=a
 shrext=.so
 host="$1"
 host_cpu=`echo "$host" | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\1/'`
 host_vendor=`echo "$host" | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\2/'`
 host_os=`echo "$host" | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\3/'`
 # Code taken from libtool.m4's _LT_CC_BASENAME.
 for cc_temp in $CC""; do
  case $cc_temp in
    compile | *[\\/]compile | ccache | *[\\/]ccache ) ;;
    distcc | *[\\/]distcc | purify | *[\\/]purify ) ;;
    \-*) ;;
    *) break;;
  esac
 done
 cc_basename=`echo "$cc_temp" | sed -e 's%^.*/%%'`
 # Code taken from libtool.m4's AC_LIBTOOL_PROG_COMPILER_PIC.
 wl=
 if test "$GCC" = yes; then
  wl='-Wl,'
 else
  case "$host_os" in
    aix*)
      wl='-Wl,'
      ;;
    darwin*)
      case $cc_basename in
        xlc*)
          wl='-Wl,'
          ;;
      esac
      ;;
    mingw* | pw32* | os2*)
      ;;
    hpux9* | hpux10* | hpux11*)
      wl='-Wl,'
      ;;
    irix5* | irix6* | nonstopux*)
      wl='-Wl,'
      ;;
    newsos6)
      ;;
    linux*)
      case $cc_basename in
        icc* | ecc*)
          wl='-Wl,'
          ;;
        pgcc | pgf77 | pgf90)
          wl='-Wl,'
          ;;
        ccc*)
          wl='-Wl,'
          ;;
        como)
          wl='-lopt='
          ;;
        *)
          case `$CC -V 2>&1 | sed 5q` in
            *Sun\ C*)
              wl='-Wl,'
              ;;
          esac
          ;;
      esac
      ;;
    osf3* | osf4* | osf5*)
      wl='-Wl,'
      ;;
    sco3.2v5*)
      ;;
    solaris*)
      wl='-Wl,'
      ;;
    sunos4*)
      wl='-Qoption ld '
      ;;
    sysv4 | sysv4.2uw2* | sysv4.3* | sysv5*)
      wl='-Wl,'
      ;;
    sysv4*MP*)
      ;;
    unicos*)
      wl='-Wl,'
      ;;
    uts4*)
      ;;
  esac
 fi
 # Code taken from libtool.m4's AC_LIBTOOL_PROG_LD_SHLIBS.
 hardcode_libdir_flag_spec=
 hardcode_libdir_separator=
 hardcode_direct=no
 hardcode_minus_L=no
 case "$host_os" in
  cygwin* | mingw* | pw32*)
    # FIXME: the MSVC++ port hasn't been tested in a loooong time
    # When not using gcc, we currently assume that we are using
    # Microsoft Visual C++.
    if test "$GCC" != yes; then
      with_gnu_ld=no
    fi
    ;;
  interix*)
    # we just hope/assume this is gcc and not c89 (= MSVC++)
    with_gnu_ld=yes
    ;;
  openbsd*)
    with_gnu_ld=no
    ;;
 esac
 ld_shlibs=yes
 if test "$with_gnu_ld" = yes; then
  # Set some defaults for GNU ld with shared library support. These
  # are reset later if shared libraries are not supported. Putting them
  # here allows them to be overridden if necessary.
  # Unlike libtool, we use -rpath here, not --rpath, since the documented
  # option of GNU ld is called -rpath, not --rpath.
  hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath ${wl}$libdir'
  case "$host_os" in
    aix3* | aix4* | aix5*)
      # On AIX/PPC, the GNU linker is very broken
      if test "$host_cpu" != ia64; then
        ld_shlibs=no
      fi
      ;;
    amigaos*)
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir'
      hardcode_minus_L=yes
      # Samuel A. Falvo II <kc5tja@dolphin.openprojects.net> reports
      # that the semantics of dynamic libraries on AmigaOS, at least up
      # to version 4, is to share data among multiple programs linked
      # with the same dynamic library.  Since this doesn't match the
      # behavior of shared libraries on other platforms, we cannot use
      # them.
      ld_shlibs=no
      ;;
    beos*)
      if $LD --help 2>&1 | grep ': supported targets:.* elf' > /dev/null; then
        :
      else
        ld_shlibs=no
      fi
      ;;
    cygwin* | mingw* | pw32*)
      # hardcode_libdir_flag_spec is actually meaningless, as there is
      # no search path for DLLs.
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir'
      if $LD --help 2>&1 | grep 'auto-import' > /dev/null; then
        :
      else
        ld_shlibs=no
      fi
      ;;
    interix3*)
      hardcode_direct=no
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath,$libdir'
      ;;
    linux*)
      if $LD --help 2>&1 | grep ': supported targets:.* elf' > /dev/null; then
        :
      else
        ld_shlibs=no
      fi
      ;;
    netbsd*)
      ;;
    solaris*)
      if $LD -v 2>&1 | grep 'BFD 2\.8' > /dev/null; then
        ld_shlibs=no
      elif $LD --help 2>&1 | grep ': supported targets:.* elf' > /dev/null; then
        :
      else
        ld_shlibs=no
      fi
      ;;
    sysv5* | sco3.2v5* | sco5v6* | unixware* | OpenUNIX*)
      case `$LD -v 2>&1` in
        *\ [01].* | *\ 2.[0-9].* | *\ 2.1[0-5].*)
          ld_shlibs=no
          ;;
        *)
          if $LD --help 2>&1 | grep ': supported targets:.* elf' > /dev/null; then
            hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='`test -z "$SCOABSPATH" && echo ${wl}-rpath,$libdir`'
          else
            ld_shlibs=no
          fi
          ;;
      esac
      ;;
    sunos4*)
      hardcode_direct=yes
      ;;
    *)
      if $LD --help 2>&1 | grep ': supported targets:.* elf' > /dev/null; then
        :
      else
        ld_shlibs=no
      fi
      ;;
  esac
  if test "$ld_shlibs" = no; then
    hardcode_libdir_flag_spec=
  fi
 else
  case "$host_os" in
    aix3*)
      # Note: this linker hardcodes the directories in LIBPATH if there
      # are no directories specified by -L.
      hardcode_minus_L=yes
      if test "$GCC" = yes; then
        # Neither direct hardcoding nor static linking is supported with a
        # broken collect2.
        hardcode_direct=unsupported
      fi
      ;;
    aix4* | aix5*)
      if test "$host_cpu" = ia64; then
        # On IA64, the linker does run time linking by default, so we don't
        # have to do anything special.
        aix_use_runtimelinking=no
      else
        aix_use_runtimelinking=no
        # Test if we are trying to use run time linking or normal
        # AIX style linking. If -brtl is somewhere in LDFLAGS, we
        # need to do runtime linking.
        case $host_os in aix4.[23]|aix4.[23].*|aix5*)
          for ld_flag in $LDFLAGS; do
            if (test $ld_flag = "-brtl" || test $ld_flag = "-Wl,-brtl"); then
              aix_use_runtimelinking=yes
              break
            fi
          done
          ;;
        esac
      fi
      hardcode_direct=yes
      hardcode_libdir_separator=':'
      if test "$GCC" = yes; then
        case $host_os in aix4.[012]|aix4.[012].*)
          collect2name=`${CC} -print-prog-name=collect2`
          if test -f "$collect2name" && \
            strings "$collect2name" | grep resolve_lib_name >/dev/null
          then
            # We have reworked collect2
            hardcode_direct=yes
          else
            # We have old collect2
            hardcode_direct=unsupported
            hardcode_minus_L=yes
            hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir'
            hardcode_libdir_separator=
          fi
          ;;
        esac
      fi
      # Begin _LT_AC_SYS_LIBPATH_AIX.
      echo 'int main () { return 0; }' > conftest.c
      ${CC} ${LDFLAGS} conftest.c -o conftest
      aix_libpath=`dump -H conftest 2>/dev/null | sed -n -e '/Import File Strings/,/^$/ { /^0/ { s/^0  *\(.*\)$/\1/; p; }
 }'`
      if test -z "$aix_libpath"; then
        aix_libpath=`dump -HX64 conftest 2>/dev/null | sed -n -e '/Import File Strings/,/^$/ { /^0/ { s/^0  *\(.*\)$/\1/; p; }
 }'`
      fi
      if test -z "$aix_libpath"; then
        aix_libpath="/usr/lib:/lib"
      fi
      rm -f conftest.c conftest
      # End _LT_AC_SYS_LIBPATH_AIX.
      if test "$aix_use_runtimelinking" = yes; then
        hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-blibpath:$libdir:'"$aix_libpath"
      else
        if test "$host_cpu" = ia64; then
          hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-R $libdir:/usr/lib:/lib'
        else
          hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-blibpath:$libdir:'"$aix_libpath"
        fi
      fi
      ;;
    amigaos*)
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir'
      hardcode_minus_L=yes
      # see comment about different semantics on the GNU ld section
      ld_shlibs=no
      ;;
    bsdi[45]*)
      ;;
    cygwin* | mingw* | pw32*)
      # When not using gcc, we currently assume that we are using
      # Microsoft Visual C++.
      # hardcode_libdir_flag_spec is actually meaningless, as there is
      # no search path for DLLs.
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec=' '
      libext=lib
      ;;
    darwin* | rhapsody*)
      hardcode_direct=no
      if test "$GCC" = yes ; then
        :
      else
        case $cc_basename in
          xlc*)
            ;;
          *)
            ld_shlibs=no
            ;;
        esac
      fi
      ;;
    dgux*)
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir'
      ;;
    freebsd1*)
      ld_shlibs=no
      ;;
    freebsd2.2*)
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-R$libdir'
      hardcode_direct=yes
      ;;
    freebsd2*)
      hardcode_direct=yes
      hardcode_minus_L=yes
      ;;
    freebsd* | kfreebsd*-gnu | dragonfly*)
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-R$libdir'
      hardcode_direct=yes
      ;;
    hpux9*)
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}+b ${wl}$libdir'
      hardcode_libdir_separator=:
      hardcode_direct=yes
      # hardcode_minus_L: Not really in the search PATH,
      # but as the default location of the library.
      hardcode_minus_L=yes
      ;;
    hpux10*)
      if test "$with_gnu_ld" = no; then
        hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}+b ${wl}$libdir'
        hardcode_libdir_separator=:
        hardcode_direct=yes
        # hardcode_minus_L: Not really in the search PATH,
        # but as the default location of the library.
        hardcode_minus_L=yes
      fi
      ;;
    hpux11*)
      if test "$with_gnu_ld" = no; then
        hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}+b ${wl}$libdir'
        hardcode_libdir_separator=:
        case $host_cpu in
          hppa*64*|ia64*)
            hardcode_direct=no
            ;;
          *)
            hardcode_direct=yes
            # hardcode_minus_L: Not really in the search PATH,
            # but as the default location of the library.
            hardcode_minus_L=yes
            ;;
        esac
      fi
      ;;
    irix5* | irix6* | nonstopux*)
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath ${wl}$libdir'
      hardcode_libdir_separator=:
      ;;
    netbsd*)
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-R$libdir'
      hardcode_direct=yes
      ;;
    newsos6)
      hardcode_direct=yes
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath ${wl}$libdir'
      hardcode_libdir_separator=:
      ;;
    openbsd*)
      hardcode_direct=yes
      if test -z "`echo __ELF__ | $CC -E - | grep __ELF__`" || test "$host_os-$host_cpu" = "openbsd2.8-powerpc"; then
        hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath,$libdir'
      else
        case "$host_os" in
          openbsd[01].* | openbsd2.[0-7] | openbsd2.[0-7].*)
            hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-R$libdir'
            ;;
          *)
            hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath,$libdir'
            ;;
        esac
      fi
      ;;
    os2*)
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir'
      hardcode_minus_L=yes
      ;;
    osf3*)
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath ${wl}$libdir'
      hardcode_libdir_separator=:
      ;;
    osf4* | osf5*)
      if test "$GCC" = yes; then
        hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath ${wl}$libdir'
      else
        # Both cc and cxx compiler support -rpath directly
        hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-rpath $libdir'
      fi
      hardcode_libdir_separator=:
      ;;
    solaris*)
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-R$libdir'
      ;;
    sunos4*)
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir'
      hardcode_direct=yes
      hardcode_minus_L=yes
      ;;
    sysv4)
      case $host_vendor in
        sni)
          hardcode_direct=yes # is this really true???
          ;;
        siemens)
          hardcode_direct=no
          ;;
        motorola)
          hardcode_direct=no #Motorola manual says yes, but my tests say they lie
          ;;
      esac
      ;;
    sysv4.3*)
      ;;
    sysv4*MP*)
      if test -d /usr/nec; then
        ld_shlibs=yes
      fi
      ;;
    sysv4*uw2* | sysv5OpenUNIX* | sysv5UnixWare7.[01].[10]* | unixware7*)
      ;;
    sysv5* | sco3.2v5* | sco5v6*)
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='`test -z "$SCOABSPATH" && echo ${wl}-R,$libdir`'
      hardcode_libdir_separator=':'
      ;;
    uts4*)
      hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir'
      ;;
    *)
      ld_shlibs=no
      ;;
  esac
 fi
 # Check dynamic linker characteristics
 # Code taken from libtool.m4's AC_LIBTOOL_SYS_DYNAMIC_LINKER.
 libname_spec='lib$name'
 case "$host_os" in
  aix3*)
    ;;
  aix4* | aix5*)
    ;;
  amigaos*)
    ;;
  beos*)
    ;;
  bsdi[45]*)
    ;;
  cygwin* | mingw* | pw32*)
    shrext=.dll
    ;;
  darwin* | rhapsody*)
    shrext=.dylib
    ;;
  dgux*)
    ;;
  freebsd1*)
    ;;
  kfreebsd*-gnu)
    ;;
  freebsd* | dragonfly*)
    ;;
  gnu*)
    ;;
  hpux9* | hpux10* | hpux11*)
    case $host_cpu in
      ia64*)
        shrext=.so
        ;;
      hppa*64*)
        shrext=.sl
        ;;
      *)
        shrext=.sl
        ;;
    esac
    ;;
  interix3*)
    ;;
  irix5* | irix6* | nonstopux*)
    case "$host_os" in
      irix5* | nonstopux*)
        libsuff= shlibsuff=
        ;;
      *)
        case $LD in
          *-32|*"-32 "|*-melf32bsmip|*"-melf32bsmip ") libsuff= shlibsuff= ;;
          *-n32|*"-n32 "|*-melf32bmipn32|*"-melf32bmipn32 ") libsuff=32 shlibsuff=N32 ;;
          *-64|*"-64 "|*-melf64bmip|*"-melf64bmip ") libsuff=64 shlibsuff=64 ;;
          *) libsuff= shlibsuff= ;;
        esac
        ;;
    esac
    ;;
  linux*oldld* | linux*aout* | linux*coff*)
    ;;
  linux*)
    ;;
  knetbsd*-gnu)
    ;;
  netbsd*)
    ;;
  newsos6)
    ;;
  nto-qnx*)
    ;;
  openbsd*)
    ;;
  os2*)
    libname_spec='$name'
    shrext=.dll
    ;;
  osf3* | osf4* | osf5*)
    ;;
  solaris*)
    ;;
  sunos4*)
    ;;
  sysv4 | sysv4.3*)
    ;;
  sysv4*MP*)
    ;;
  sysv5* | sco3.2v5* | sco5v6* | unixware* | OpenUNIX* | sysv4*uw2*)
    ;;
  uts4*)
    ;;
 esac
 sed_quote_subst='s/\(["`$\\]\)/\\\1/g'
 escaped_wl=`echo "X$wl" | sed -e 's/^X//' -e "$sed_quote_subst"`
 shlibext=`echo "$shrext" | sed -e 's,^\.,,'`
 escaped_hardcode_libdir_flag_spec=`echo "X$hardcode_libdir_flag_spec" | sed -e 's/^X//' -e "$sed_quote_subst"`
 LC_ALL=C sed -e 's/^\([a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)=/acl_cv_\1=/' <<EOF
 # How to pass a linker flag through the compiler.
 wl="$escaped_wl"
 # Static library suffix (normally "a").
 libext="$libext"
 # Shared library suffix (normally "so").
 shlibext="$shlibext"
 # Flag to hardcode \$libdir into a binary during linking.
 # This must work even if \$libdir does not exist.
 hardcode_libdir_flag_spec="$escaped_hardcode_libdir_flag_spec"
 # Whether we need a single -rpath flag with a separated argument.
 hardcode_libdir_separator="$hardcode_libdir_separator"
 # Set to yes if using DIR/libNAME.so during linking hardcodes DIR into the
 # resulting binary.
 hardcode_direct="$hardcode_direct"
 # Set to yes if using the -LDIR flag during linking hardcodes DIR into the
 # resulting binary.
 hardcode_minus_L="$hardcode_minus_L"
 EOF
--- a/config.sub
+++ b/config.sub
--- a/configure.ac
+++ b/configure.ac
@ -0,0 +1,225 @@
 ENV_CFLAGS=$CFLAGS
 CFLAGS=""
 AC_PREREQ(2.59)
 dnl Update it right before the release since $pkgver_foo are all _post_ release snapshots
 AC_INIT([Pacman package manager], 3.0.0, [pacman-dev@archlinux.org], [pacman])
 AC_LANG([C])
 AC_CONFIG_HEADERS(config.h)
 AC_CANONICAL_HOST
 AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE
 AM_GNU_GETTEXT([external])
 AM_GNU_GETTEXT_VERSION(0.13.1)
 dnl Define the libalpm version number here
 LIB_MAJOR_VERSION=1
 LIB_MINOR_VERSION=0
 LIB_MICRO_VERSION=0
 LIB_VERSION=$LIB_MAJOR_VERSION.$LIB_MINOR_VERSION.$LIB_MICRO_VERSION
 dnl Needed for libtool to create proper shared lib version.
 dnl This is not completely correct- see 
 dnl http://sourceware.org/autobook/autobook/autobook_91.html for details.
 LIB_VERSION_INFO=`expr $LIB_MAJOR_VERSION + $LIB_MINOR_VERSION`:$LIB_MICRO_VERSION:$LIB_MINOR_VERSION
 dnl Set subsitution values for version stuff in Makefiles and anywhere else
 AC_SUBST(LIB_VERSION)
 AC_SUBST(LIB_VERSION_INFO)
 dnl Put version number in config.h
 AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED([LIB_VERSION], ["$LIB_VERSION"], [libalpm version number])
 dnl Configuration files
 dnl AC_CONFIG_FILES([etc/makepkg.conf] [etc/pacman.conf])
 AC_PROG_CC
 AC_HEADER_STDC
 AC_PROG_INSTALL
 AC_CHECK_FUNCS([strverscmp])
 AM_PROG_LIBTOOL
 AM_CONDITIONAL(LINKSTATIC, test "$enable_static" = "yes")
 dnl Help line for doxygen
 AC_ARG_ENABLE(doxygen,
    AC_HELP_STRING([--disable-doxygen], [Build API docs via Doxygen]),
    [wantdoxygen=$enableval], [wantdoxygen=yes])
 dnl Help line for config file
 AC_ARG_WITH(config-file,
    AC_HELP_STRING([--with-config-file=path], [Set the location of pacman's config file]),
    [configfile=$withval], [configfile=/etc/pacman.conf])
 dnl Help line for debug
 AC_ARG_ENABLE(debug,
    AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-debug], [Enable debugging support]),
    [debug=$enableval], [debug=no])
 dnl Help line for fakeroot
 AC_ARG_ENABLE(fakeroot,
    AC_HELP_STRING([--disable-fakeroot], [Disable fakeroot proof support]),
    [fakeroot=$enableval], [fakeroot=yes])
 dnl Host-dependant flags
 case "${host}" in
 	*-*-cygwin*)
 		ENV_CFLAGS="$ENV_CFLAGS -DCYGWIN"
 		;;
 esac
 dnl Check for architecture
 case "${host}" in
 	i686-*) 
 		CARCH="i686"
 		CARCHFLAGS="i686"
 		ARCHSWITCH="march"
 		;;
 	x86_64-*) 
 		CARCH="x86_64"
 		CARCHFLAGS="x86-64"
 		ARCHSWITCH="march"
 		;;
 	ia64-*) 
 		CARCH="ia64"
 		CARCHFLAGS="ia64"
 		ARCHSWITCH="march"
 		;;
 	sparc-*) 
 		CARCH="sparc"
 		CARCHFLAGS="v9"
 		ARCHSWITCH="mcpu"
 		;;
 	ppc-* | powerpc-*)
 		CARCH="ppc"
 		CARCHFLAGS="750"
 		ARCHSWITCH="mcpu"
 		;;
 	i386-*) 
 		CARCH="i386"
 		CARCHFLAGS="i386"
 		ARCHSWITCH="march"
 		;;
 	*)
 		AC_MSG_ERROR([Your architecture is not supported])
 		;;
 esac
 dnl Now do some things common to all architectures
 CHOST="${host}"
 AC_SUBST(CARCH)
 AC_SUBST(CARCHFLAGS)
 AC_SUBST(ARCHSWITCH)
 AC_SUBST(CHOST)
 dnl Humor lowers blood pressure
 AC_MSG_CHECKING(your blood pressure)
 AC_MSG_RESULT([a bit high, but we can proceed])
 dnl Check for doxygen support
 AC_MSG_CHECKING(for doxygen)
 if test "x$wantdoxygen" = "xyes" ; then
    AC_CHECK_PROGS([DOXYGEN], [doxygen])
    if test $DOXYGEN ; then
 		AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)
 		usedoxygen=yes
    else
 		AC_MSG_RESULT(no, doxygen missing)
 		usedoxygen=no
    fi
 else
    AC_MSG_RESULT(no, disabled by configure)
 	usedoxygen=no
 fi
 AM_CONDITIONAL(HAS_DOXYGEN, test "x$usedoxygen" = "xyes")
 dnl Check for math
 AC_CHECK_LIB([m], [sqrt], [AC_CHECK_HEADER([math.h], [LIBM='-lm'])])
 if test -z "$LIBM"; then
    AC_MSG_ERROR("math library needed to compile pacman!");
 fi
 dnl Check for libarchive
 AC_CHECK_LIB([archive], [archive_read_data], [AC_CHECK_HEADER([archive.h], [LIBARCHIVE='-larchive'])])
 if test -z "$LIBARCHIVE"; then
    AC_MSG_ERROR("libarchive is needed to compile pacman!");
 fi
 dnl Check for libdownload
 AC_CHECK_LIB([download], [downloadParseURL], [AC_CHECK_HEADER([download.h], [LIBDOWNLOAD='-ldownload'])])
 if test -z "$LIBDOWNLOAD"; then
    AC_MSG_ERROR("libdownload is needed to compile pacman!");
 fi
 dnl Set config location
 AC_MSG_CHECKING(for configuration file name)
 if test -n "$configfile"; then
 	AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED([PACCONF], "$configfile", [Location of pacman conf file])
    AC_MSG_RESULT(["$configfile"])
 else
    AC_MSG_ERROR(["pacman config file (--with-config-file is not set"])
 fi
 dnl Enable or disable debug code
 AC_MSG_CHECKING(for debug mode request)
 if test "x$debug" = "xyes" ; then
 	AC_DEFINE([PACMAN_DEBUG], , [Enable debug code])
 	CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -g -Wall -Werror -fstack-protector -std=c99"
 	LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -lmcheck"
    AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)
 else
 	CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -Wall -std=c99"
    AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
 fi
 dnl Enable or disable fakeroot code
 AC_MSG_CHECKING(for fakeroot proof support)
 if test "x$fakeroot" = "xyes" ; then
 	AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)
 else
 	AC_DEFINE([FAKEROOT], , [Disable fakeroot-proof code])
 	AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
 fi
 dnl Set CFLAGS to both $CFLAGS and ones from env ($ENV_CFLAGS)
 CFLAGS="$CFLAGS $ENV_CFLAGS"
 dnl ==========================================================================
 AC_OUTPUT([
 lib/libalpm/Makefile
 lib/libalpm/po/Makefile.in
 src/pacman/Makefile
 src/pacman/po/Makefile.in
 src/util/Makefile
 scripts/Makefile
 doc/Makefile
 etc/Makefile
 etc/makepkg.conf
 etc/pacman.conf
 etc/pacman.d/Makefile
 etc/pacman.d/mirrorlist
 etc/abs/Makefile
 pactest/Makefile
 contrib/Makefile
 Makefile
 ])
 echo "
 pacman-$VERSION:
    prefix                 : ${prefix}
    source code location   : ${srcdir}
    compiler               : ${CC}
    compiler flags         : ${CFLAGS}
    defines                : ${DEFS}
    Architecture           : ${CARCH}
    Architecture flags     : -${ARCHSWITCH}=${CARCHFLAGS}
    Host Type              : ${CHOST}
    libalpm version        : ${LIB_VERSION}
    pacman version         : ${PACKAGE_VERSION}
    pacman.conf location   : ${configfile}
    Doxygen support        : ${usedoxygen}
    debug support          : ${debug}
    fakeroot-proof support : ${fakeroot}
 "
--- a/contrib/.cvsignore
+++ b/contrib/.cvsignore
@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
 Makefile
 Makefile.in
--- a/contrib/Makefile.am
+++ b/contrib/Makefile.am
@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
 EXTRA_DIST = \
 	bash_completion \
 	pacsearch \
 	pacdiff \
 	re-pacman \
 	zsh_completion \
 	README
--- a/contrib/README
+++ b/contrib/README
@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
 Here is a brief description of the files included in this directory:
 bash_completion - a bash completion script for pacman, install in
 /etc/bash_completion.d/ for use (but rename to something descriptive!).
 zsh_completion - a zsh completion script, install (with a rename) to
 /usr/share/zsh/site-functions/.
 pacsearch - a colorized search combining both -Ss and -Qs output. Installed
 packages are easily identified with a *** and local-only packages are also
 listed.
 pacdiff - a simple pacnew/pacorig/pacsave updater for /etc/.
 re-pacman - regenerate a pacman package based on installed files and the pacman
 database entries. Useful for reuse, or possible config file extension.
--- a/contrib/bash_completion
+++ b/contrib/bash_completion
@ -0,0 +1,363 @@
 # vim: set ft=sh ts=2 sw=2 et:
 # file: /etc/bash_completion.d/pacman
 # Bash completion for pacman
 # Original: Manolis Tzanidakis <mtzanidakis@freemail.gr>
 #
 # Distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License, v2 or later.
 #
 ## ChangeLog ##
 #
 # * 3.0 (2007-02-18)
 #   - Updated to pacman 3.0.0 options
 # * 1.1 (2004-01-17)
 #   - Code cleanup
 #   - Updated to pacman 2.7.2-2
 # * 2004-02-16 (orelien)
 #   - Improved available_{pkgs,groups) functions
 #   - Added support for querying groups
 #
 ## initial functions
 rem_selected ()
 {
  # (Adapted from bash_completion by Ian Macdonald <ian@caliban.org>)
  # This removes any options from the list of completions that have
  # already been specified on the command line.
  COMPREPLY=($(echo "${COMP_WORDS[@]}" | \
    (while read -d ' ' i; do
      [ "${i}" == "" ] && continue
      # flatten array with spaces on either side,
      # otherwise we cannot grep on word boundaries of
      # first and last word
      COMPREPLY=" ${COMPREPLY[@]} "
      # remove word from list of completions
      COMPREPLY=(${COMPREPLY/ ${i%% *} / })
    done
    echo ${COMPREPLY[@]})))
  return 0
 }
 _available_repos ()
 {
  COMPREPLY=( $( compgen -W "$(grep '\[' /etc/pacman.conf | grep -v -e 'options' -e '^#' | tr -d '[]' )" -- $cur ) )
 }
 _installed_pkgs ()
 {
  local installed_pkgs
  installed_pkgs=$( ls /var/lib/pacman/local/ )
  COMPREPLY=( $( compgen -W "$( for i in $installed_pkgs; do echo ${i%-*-*}; done )" -- $cur ) )
 }
 _available_pkgs ()
 {
  #find balks easilly on a find /foo/*/* type dir, especially one like
  #   /var/lib/pacman/*/*
  # This little change-up removes the find *and* only uses enabled repos
  local available_pkgs
  local enabled_repos
  enabled_repos=$( grep '\[' /etc/pacman.conf | grep -v -e 'options' -e '^#' | tr -d '[]' )
  available_pkgs=$( for r in $enabled_repos; do echo /var/lib/pacman/$r/*; done )
  COMPREPLY=( $( compgen -W "$( for i in $available_pkgs; do j=${i##*/}; echo ${j%-*-*}; done )" -- $cur ) )
 }
 _installed_groups ()
 {
  local installed_groups
  installed_groups=$( find /var/lib/pacman/local -name desc -exec sed -ne '/%GROUPS%/,/^$/{//d; p}' {} \; | sort -u )
  COMPREPLY=( $( compgen -W "$( for i in $installed_groups; do echo ${i%-*-*}; done )" -- $cur ) )
 }
 _available_groups ()
 {
  #find balks easilly on a find /foo/*/* type dir, especially one like
  #   /var/lib/pacman/*/*
  # This little change-up removes the find *and* only uses enabled repos
  local available_groups
  local enabled_repos
  enabled_repos=$( grep '\[' /etc/pacman.conf | grep -v -e 'options' -e '^#' | tr -d '[]' )
  available_groups=$( for r in $enabled_repos; do sed '/%GROUPS%/,/^$/{//d; p}' /var/lib/pacman/$r/*/desc | sort -u; done )
  COMPREPLY=( $( compgen -W "$( for i in $available_groups; do echo ${i%-*-*}; done )" -- $cur ) )
 }
 ## makepkg completion
 _makepkg ()
 {
  local cur prev
  COMPREPLY=()
  cur=${COMP_WORDS[COMP_CWORD]}
  prev=${COMP_WORDS[COMP_CWORD-1]}
  case "$prev" in
    -p)
      _filedir
      return 0
    ;;
    --help|--cleancache)
      COMPREPLY=''
      return 0
    ;;
  esac
  if [[ "$cur" == -* ]]; then
    COMPREPLY=( $( compgen -W '\
      -b --builddeps \
      -B --noccache \
      -c --clean \
      -C --cleancache \
      -d --nodeps \
      -e --noextract \
      -f --force \
      -g --geninteg \
      -h --help \
      -i --install \
      -j \
      -L --log \
      -m --nocolor \
      -o --nobuild \
      -p \
      -r --rmdeps \
      -s --syncdeps \
      -S --usesudo \
      --noconfirm \
      --noprogressbar' -- $cur ) )
  fi
  rem_selected
 }
 complete -o default -F _makepkg makepkg
 ## pacman completion
 _instring ()
 {
  str="${1}"
  shift 1
  for c in "${@}"; do
    if [ $(expr index "${str}" "${c}") -gt 0 ]; then
      return 0
    fi
  done
  return 1
 }
 _pacman ()
 {
  local a arg toparse op mod cur
  COMPREPLY=()
  # This argument parsing is done so we can check for flag existance later
  #  right now it's a tad crappy, but does the job
  for (( i=1; i < ${#COMP_WORDS[@]}-1; i++ )); do
    a=${COMP_WORDS[i]}
    arg="${a:0:2}"
    toparse="${a:2}"
    case "${arg}" in
      -@(A|U|F|R|S|Q|h|V))
        op="${arg/-}"
        mod="${mod}${a:2}"
        ;;
      --)
        arg="${a:2}"
        case "${arg}" in
          add) op="A" ;;
          remove) op="R" ;;
          upgrade) op="U" ;;
          freshen) op="F" ;;
          query) op="Q" ;;
          sync) op="S" ;;
          help) op="h" ;;
          version) op="V" ;;
          verbose) mod="${mod}v" ;;
          root) mod="${mod}r" ;;
          dbpath) mod="${mod}b" ;;
          nodeps) mod="${mod}d" ;;
          force) mod="${mod}f" ;;
          groups) mod="${mod}g" ;;
          info) mod="${mod}i" ;;
          list) mod="${mod}l" ;;
          print-uris) mod="${mod}p" ;;
          search) mod="${mod}s" ;;
          sysupgrade) mod="${mod}u" ;;
          downloadonly) mod="${mod}w" ;;
          refresh) mod="${mod}y" ;;
          orphans) mod="${mod}e" ;;
          foreign) mod="${mod}m" ;;
          owns) mod="${mod}o" ;;
          file) mod="${mod}p" ;;
          search) mod="${mod}s" ;;
          cascade) mod="${mod}c" ;;
          nodeps) mod="${mod}d" ;;
          dbonly) mod="${mod}k" ;;
          nosave) mod="${mod}n" ;;
          recursive) mod="${mod}s" ;;
        esac ;;
      *) toparse="${a}" ;;
    esac
    arglen=$(( ${#toparse}-1 ))
    for c in $(seq 0 "${arglen}"); do
      arg=${toparse:$c:1}
      [ "${arg}" != "-" ] && mod="${mod}${arg}"
    done
  done
  cur=${COMP_WORDS[COMP_CWORD]}
  if [ $COMP_CWORD -eq 1 ] && [[ "$cur" == -* ]]; then
    COMPREPLY=( $( compgen -W '\
      -A --add \
      -F --freshen \
      -h --help \
      -Q --query \
      -R --remove \
      -S --sync \
      -U --upgrade \
      -V --version \
      ' -- $cur ) )
    rem_selected
    return 0
  fi
  if [[ "$cur" == -* ]]; then
    case "${op}" in
      A|U|F)
        COMPREPLY=( $( compgen -W '\
          -d --nodeps \
          -f --force \
          -h --help \
          --config \
          --noconfirm \
          --ask \
          --noprogressbar \
          --noscriptlet \
          -v --verbose \
          -r --root \
          -b --dbpath \
          --cachedir \
          ' -- $cur ) )
        return 0
        ;;
      R)
        COMPREPLY=( $( compgen -W '\
          -c --cascade \
          -d --nodeps \
          -f --force \
          -h --help \
          -k --dbonly \
          -n --nosave \
          -s --recursive \
          --config \
          --noconfirm \
          --ask \
          --noprogressbar \
          --noscriptlet \
          -v --verbose \
          -r --root \
          -b --dbpath \
          --cachedir \
          ' -- $cur ) )
        return 0
        ;;
      S)
        COMPREPLY=( $( compgen -W '\
          -c --clean \
          -d --nodeps \
          -e --dependsonly \
          -f --force \
          -g --groups \
          -h --help \
          -i --info \
          -l --list \
          -p --print-uris \
          -s --search \
          -u --sysupgrade \
          -w --downloadonly \
          -y --refresh \
          --ignore \
          --config \
          --noconfirm \
          --ask \
          --noprogressbar \
          --noscriptlet \
          -v --verbose \
          -r --root \
          -b --dbpath \
          --cachedir \
          ' -- $cur ) )
        return 0
        ;;
      Q)
        COMPREPLY=( $( compgen -W '\
          -c --changelog \
          -e --orphans \
          -g --groups \
          -h --help \
          -i --info \
          -l --list \
          -m --foreign \
          -o --owns \
          -p --file \
          -s --search \
          --config \
          --noconfirm \
          --ask \
          --noprogressbar \
          --noscriptlet \
          -v --verbose \
          -r --root \
          -b --dbpath \
          --cachedir \
          ' -- $cur ) )
        return 0
        ;;
    esac
    rem_selected
  else
    case "${op}" in
      A|U)
        COMPREPLY=( $( compgen -d -- "$cur" ) \
                    $( compgen -f -X '!*.pkg.tar.gz' -- "$cur" ) )
        return 0
        ;;
      h|V)
        COMPREPLY=''
        return 0
        ;;
      Q)
        if _instring $mod g; then
          _installed_groups
        elif _instring $mod o; then
          COMPREPLY=( $( compgen -d -- "$cur" ) \
                      $( compgen -f -- "$cur" ) )
        elif _instring $mod p; then
          COMPREPLY=( $( compgen -d -- "$cur" ) \
                      $( compgen -f -X '!*.pkg.tar.gz' -- "$cur" ) )
        else
          _installed_pkgs
        fi
        return 0
        ;;
      R)
        _installed_pkgs
        return 0
        ;;
      S)
        if _instring $mod l; then
          _available_repos
        else
          _available_pkgs
        fi
        return 0
        ;;
    esac
  fi
  rem_selected
 }
 complete -o filenames -F _pacman pacman
--- a/contrib/pacdiff
+++ b/contrib/pacdiff
@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
 #!/bin/sh
 #   pacdiff : a simple pacnew/pacorig/pacsave updater for /etc/
 #
 #   Copyright (c) 2007 Aaron Griffin <aaronmgriffin@gmail.com>
 #
 #   This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
 #   it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
 #   the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
 #   (at your option) any later version.
 #
 #   This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
 #   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
 #   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
 #   GNU General Public License for more details.
 #
 #   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 #   along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
 #   Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
 #   USA.
 #
 # Original http://phraktured.net/config/bin/pacdiff
 diffprog=${DIFFPROG:-vimdiff}
 for x in $(find /etc/ -name *.pacnew -o -name *.pacorig -o -name *.pacsave)
 do
    echo "File: ${x%.pac*}"
    chk="$(cmp $x ${x%.pac*})"
    if [ -z "${chk}" ]; then
        echo "  Files are identical, removing..."
        rm $x
    else
        echo -n "  File differences found. (V)iew, (S)kip, (R)emove: [v/s/r] "
        read c
        c="$(echo $c| tr A-Z a-z)" #tolower
        if [ "$c" = "r" ]; then
            rm $x
        elif [ "$c" = "s" ]; then
            continue
        else
            [ "$c" = "n" -o "$c" = "N" ] || $diffprog $x ${x%.pac*}
            echo -n "  Remove file? [Y/n] "
            read c
            [ "$c" = "n" -o "$c" = "N" ] || rm $x
        fi
    fi
 done
--- a/contrib/pacsearch
+++ b/contrib/pacsearch
@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
 #!/bin/bash
 # pacsearch - Adds color and install information to a 'pacman -Ss' search
 #
 # Copyright (C) 2006-2007 Dan McGee <dpmcgee@gmail.com>
 #
 # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
 # modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
 # as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
 # of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
 #
 # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
 # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
 # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
 # GNU General Public License for more details.
 #
 # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
 # Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301, USA
 #TODO: colors flag on commandline
 readonly progname="pacsearch"
 readonly version="1.0"
 readonly CLR1='\\\e[0;34m'
 readonly CLR2='\\\e[0;32m'
 readonly CLR3='\\\e[0;35m'
 readonly CLR4='\\\e[0;36m'
 readonly CLR5='\\\e[0;31m'
 readonly CLR6='\\\e[0;33m'
 readonly CLR7='\\\e[1;36m'
 readonly INST='\\\e[1;31m'
 readonly BASE='\\\e[0m'
 if [ "$1" = "--help" -o "$1" = "-h" ]; then
 	echo "Usage: $progname <pattern>"
 	echo "Ex:    $progname ^gnome"
 	exit 0
 fi
 if [ "$1" = "--version" -o "$1" = "-v" ]; then
 	echo "$progname version $version"
 	echo "Copyright (C) 2006-2007 Dan McGee"
 	exit 0
 fi
 if [ -z "$1" -o "${1:0:1}" = "-" ]; then
 	echo "Usage: $progname <pattern>"
 	echo "Ex:    $progname ^gnome"
 	exit 1
 fi
 # Make two temp files and send output of commands to these files
 querydump=$(mktemp)
 pacman -Qs $1 > $querydump
 syncdump=$(mktemp)
 pacman -Ss $1 > $syncdump
 # Strip descriptions and 'local/' from -Qs query
 instpkg=$(mktemp)
 egrep '^[^ ]' $querydump | sed -e 's@^local/@@' > $instpkg
 # Add pkgs not in sync db, mark pkgs that are installed
 cat $instpkg | while read -r pkg; do
 	if [ -z "$(grep "$pkg" $syncdump)" ]; then
 		# grep package name; pipe to another grep that prints at most one
 		#   line starting with 'local/', allows for comments >1 line
 		grep -A10 "$pkg" $querydump | grep -A10 -m1 "local/" >> $syncdump
 	fi
 	sed -i "s@^\(.\+/$pkg\)@\***\1@" $syncdump
 done
 # Print colorized package list and descriptions to screen
 echo -e "$(sed -r \
 	-e "s@current/.*@$CLR1&$BASE@" \
 	-e "s@extra/.*@$CLR2&$BASE@" \
 	-e "s@community/.*@$CLR3&$BASE@" \
 	-e "s@testing/.*@$CLR4&$BASE@" \
 	-e "s@unstable/.*@$CLR5&$BASE@" \
 	-e "s@custom/.*@$CLR6&$BASE@" \
 	-e "s@local/.*@$CLR7&$BASE@" \
 	-e "s@(^|\*\*\*)([[:alnum:]]*/.* .*)@\1$CLR6\2$BASE@" \
 	-e "s@\*\*\*@$INST&@" \
 	< $syncdump )"
 echo -en "\e[0m"
 rm $querydump
 rm $syncdump
 rm $instpkg
--- a/contrib/re-pacman
+++ b/contrib/re-pacman
@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
 #!/bin/sh
 #
 #   re-pacman: regenerate a pacman package based on installed files and the
 #   pacman database entries.  Useful for reuse, or possible config file
 #   extension
 #  
 #   Copyright (c) 2006 Aaron Griffin <aaron@archlinux.org>
 #  
 #   This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
 #   it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
 #   the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
 #   (at your option) any later version.
 # 
 #   This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
 #   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
 #   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
 #   GNU General Public License for more details.
 #  
 #   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 #   along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
 #   Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, 
 #   USA.
 #
 #TODO
 #   * Check for md5 changes in backup lines and change pkgrel
 pacinfo () {
 	[ $# -ne 2 ] && return 1
 	#use echo to strip spaces
 	echo $(pacman -Qi ${1} | grep "${2}" | cut -d: -f2-)
 }
 make_pkginfo () {
 	echo "# Generated by re-pacman 1.0.0"
 	echo "# On $(date)"
 	echo "pkgname =$(pacinfo ${1} Name)"
 	echo "pkgver =$(pacinfo ${1} Version)"
 	echo "pkgdesc =$(pacinfo ${1} Description)"
 	echo "url =$(pacinfo ${1} URL)"
 	echo "builddate =$(pacinfo ${1} 'Build Date')"
 	echo "packager =$(pacinfo ${1} Packager)"
 	echo "size =$(pacinfo ${1} Size)"
 	echo "arch =$(pacinfo ${1} Architecture)"
 	deps=$(pacinfo ${1} 'Depends On')
 	for d in ${deps}; do
 		echo "depend = ${d}"
 	done
 }
 if [ $# -ne 1 ]; then
 	echo "usage: re-pacman <installed package name>"
 	exit 1
 fi
 ver=$(pacinfo ${1} Version)
 if [ "x${ver}" = "x" ]; then
 	echo "Package '${1}' not found, aborting."
 	exit 1
 fi
 echo ":: Cleaning up old files"
 rm -f .PKGINFO .FILELIST "${1}-${ver}.pkg.tar.gz"
 echo ":: Building PKGINFO"
 make_pkginfo ${1} > .PKGINFO
 echo ":: Building FILELIST"
 pacman -Ql ${1} | cut -d' ' -f2- > .FILELIST
 flist=".PKGINFO .FILELIST"
 flist="${flist} $(pacman -Ql ${1} | sed 's|\w* \(.*\)|/\1|g' | grep -v '/$')"
 echo ":: Building final package tarball"
 echo ${flist} | tr ' ' '\n' | tar czf "${1}-${ver}.pkg.tar.gz" -T - 2>/dev/null
 rm -f .PKGINFO .FILELIST
 echo ":: Package '${1}-${ver}.pkg.tar.gz' is now ready for installation"
 # vim: set ts=2 sw=2 noet:
--- a/contrib/vimproject
+++ b/contrib/vimproject
@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
 This is a project file for the vim-project
 plugin.  I like it, so decided to contribute
 this to the main repo.
 $ pacman -S vim-project
 change the pacman= path below
 $ vim
 :Project vimproject
 pacman=~/devel/pacman-lib CD=. flags=S {
 Makefile.am
 configure.ac
 libalpm=lib/libalpm/ filter="*.c *.h *.am"{
  add.c
  alpm.c
  alpm_list.c
  backup.c
  be_files.c
  cache.c
  conflict.c
  db.c
  deps.c
  error.c
  group.c
  handle.c
  log.c
  md5.c
  md5driver.c
  package.c
  provide.c
  remove.c
  server.c
  sha1.c
  sync.c
  trans.c
  util.c
  versioncmp.c
  add.h
  alpm.h
  alpm_list.h
  backup.h
  cache.h
  conflict.h
  db.h
  deps.h
  error.h
  group.h
  handle.h
  log.h
  md5.h
  package.h
  provide.h
  remove.h
  server.h
  sha1.h
  sync.h
  trans.h
  util.h
  versioncmp.h
  Makefile.am
  Makefile.in
 }
 pacman=src/pacman/ filter="*.c *.h *.am" {
  add.c
  conf.c
  deptest.c
  downloadprog.c
  log.c
  package.c
  pacman.c
  query.c
  remove.c
  sync.c
  trans.c
  upgrade.c
  util.c
  add.h
  conf.h
  deptest.h
  downloadprog.h
  log.h
  package.h
  query.h
  remove.h
  sync.h
  trans.h
  upgrade.h
  util.h
  Makefile.am
 }
 utils=src/util filter="*.c *.h *.am" {
  testpkg.c
  vercmp.c
  Makefile.am
 }
 contrib=contrib CD=. {
  bash_completion
  pacsearch
  vimproject
  zsh_completion
 }
 }
--- a/contrib/zsh_completion
+++ b/contrib/zsh_completion
@ -0,0 +1,320 @@
 # file: /usr/share/zsh/site-functions/_pacman
 # use the following in your zsh config:
 #   compdef pacman pacman.static=pacman
 typeset -A opt_args
 # options for passing to _arguments: main pacman commands
 _pacman_opts_commands=(
 	'-A[Add a package to the system]'
 	'-F[Upgrade an installed package]'
 	'-Q[Query the package database]'
 	'-R[Remove a package from the system]'
 	'-S[Synchronize packages]'
 	'-U[Upgrade a package]'
 	'-V[Display version and exit]'
 	'-h[Display usage]'
 )
 # options for passing to _arguments: options common to all commands
 _pacman_opts_common=(
 	'-b[Alternate database location]:database_location:_files -/'
 	'-h[Display syntax for the given operation]'
 	'-r[Set alternate installation root]:installation root:_files -/'
 	'-v[Be more verbose]'
 	'--config[An alternate configuration file]:config file:_files'
 	'--noconfirm[Do not ask for confirmation]'
 )
 # options for passing to _arguments: options for --add, --freshen and --update commands
 _pacman_opts_pkgfile=(
 	'-d[Skip dependency checks]'
 	'-f[Overwrite conflicting files]'
 	'*:package file:_files -g "*.pkg.tar.gz(.)"'
 )
 # options for passing to _arguments: subactions for --query command
 _pacman_opts_query_actions=(
 	'-e[List orphaned packages]:*:orphans:->query_orphans'
 	'-g[View all members of a package group]:*:package groups:->query_group'
 	'-o[Query the package that owns a file]:file:_files'
 	'-p[Package file to query]:*:package file:->query_file'
 	'-s[Search package names and descriptions]:*:search text:->query_search'
 )
 # options for passing to _arguments: options for --query and subcommands
 _pacman_opts_query_modifiers=(
 	'-i[View package information]'
 	'-l[List package contents]'
 )
 # options for passing to _arguments: options for --remove command
 _pacman_opts_remove=(
 	'-c[Remove all dependent packages]'
 	'-d[Skip dependency checks]'
 	'-k[Only remove database entry, do not remove files]'
 	'-n[Remove protected configuration files]'
 	'-s[Remove dependencies not required by other packages]'
 	'*:installed package:_pacman_completions_installed_packages'
 )
 # options for passing to _arguments: options for --sync command
 _pacman_opts_sync_actions=(
 	'*-c[Remove old packages from cache]:*:clean:->sync_clean'
 	'-g[View all members of a package group]:*:package groups:->sync_group'
 	'-s[Search package names and descriptions]:*:search text:->sync_search'
 )
 # options for passing to _arguments: options for --sync command
 _pacman_opts_sync_modifiers=(
 	'-d[Skip dependency checks]'
 	'-f[Overwrite conflicting files]'
 	'-i[View package information]'
 	'-l[List all packages in a repository]'
 	'-p[Print download URIs for each package to be installed]'
 	'-u[Upgrade all out-of-date packages]'
 	'-w[Download packages only]'
 	'-y[Download fresh package databases]'
 	'*--ignore[Ignore a package upgrade]:package:_pacman_completions_installed_packages'
 )
 # handles --action subcommand
 _pacman_action_add() {
 	_arguments -s : \
 		"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 		"$_pacman_opts_pkgfile[@]"
 }
 # handles --freshen subcommand
 _pacman_action_freshen() {
 	_arguments -s : \
 		"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 		"$_pacman_opts_pkgfile[@]"
 }
 # handles --help subcommand
 _pacman_action_help() {
 	_arguments -s : \
 		"$_pacman_opts_commands[@]"
 }
 # handles cases where no subcommand has yet been given
 _pacman_action_none() {
 	_arguments -s : \
 		"$_pacman_opts_commands[@]"
 }
 # handles --query subcommand
 _pacman_action_query() {
 	local context state line
 	typeset -A opt_args
 #	_arguments -s : \
 #		"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 #		"$_pacman_opts_query_actions[@]" \
 #		"$_pacman_opts_query_modifiers[@]"
 	case $state in
 		query_file)
 			_arguments -s : \
 				"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 				"$_pacman_opts_query_modifiers[@]" \
 				'*:package file:_files -g "*.pkg.tar.gz"'
 				;;
 		query_group)
 			_arguments -s : \
 				"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 				"$_pacman_opts_query_modifiers[@]" \
 				'*:groups:_pacman_completions_installed_groups'
 				;;
 		query_orphans)
 			_arguments -s : \
 				"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 				"$_pacman_opts_query_modifiers[@]"
 				;;
 		query_owner)
 			_arguments -s : \
 				"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 				"$_pacman_opts_query_modifiers[@]" \
 				'*:file:_files'
 				;;
 		query_search)
 			_arguments -s : \
 				"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 				"$_pacman_opts_query_modifiers[@]" \
 				'*:search text: '
 				;;
 		*)
 			_arguments -s : \
 				"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 				"$_pacman_opts_query_actions[@]" \
 				"$_pacman_opts_query_modifiers[@]" \
 				'*:package:_pacman_completions_installed_packages'
 				;;
 	esac
 }
 # handles --remove subcommand
 _pacman_action_remove() {
 	_arguments -s : \
 		"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 		"$_pacman_opts_remove[@]"
 }
 # handles --sync subcommand
 _pacman_action_sync() {
 	local context state line
 	typeset -A opt_args
 #	_arguments -s : \
 #		"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 #		"$_pacman_opts_sync_actions[@]" #\
 #		#"$_pacman_opts_sync_modifiers[@]"
 	case $state in
 		sync_clean)
 			_arguments -s : \
 				"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 				"$_pacman_opts_sync_modifiers[@]" \
 				'*-c[Remove old packages from cache]' \
 				;;
 		sync_group)
 			_arguments -s : \
 				"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 				"$_pacman_opts_sync_modifiers[@]" \
 				'*:package group:_pacman_completions_all_groups'
 				;;
 		sync_search)
 			_arguments -s : \
 				"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 				"$_pacman_opts_sync_modifiers[@]" \
 				'*:search text: '
 				;;
 		*)
 			_arguments -s : \
 				"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 				"$_pacman_opts_sync_modifiers[@]" \
 				'*:package:_pacman_completions_all_packages'
 				;;
 		esac
 }
 # handles --upgrade subcommand
 _pacman_action_upgrade() {
 	_arguments -s : \
 		"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 		"$_pacman_opts_pkgfile[@]"
 }
 # handles --version subcommand
 _pacman_action_version() {
 	# no further arguments
 	return 0
 }
 # provides completions for package groups
 _pacman_completions_all_groups() {
 	local -a cmd groups
 	_pacman_get_command
 	groups=( $(_call_program groups $cmd[@] -Sg | grep -e \^$PREFIX) )
 	compadd "$@" -a groups
 }
 # provides completions for packages available from repositories
 _pacman_completions_all_packages() {
 	local -a cmd packages repositories
 	repositories=( $(_call_program repositories cat /etc/pacman.conf | grep "^\[" | sed "s,\(\[\|\]\),,g" | grep -v "^options" | sort -u) )
 	# these can be specified as either 'package' or 'repository/package'
 	if [[ "$PREFIX" == "" ]] ; then
 		packages=( $(_call_program packages ls /var/lib/pacman/${^repositories} | grep -v "^/" | sed "s,\-[^-]*\-[^-]*$,," | sort -u) )
 	else
 		packages=( $(_call_program packages ls /var/lib/pacman/${^repositories} | grep -v "^/" | grep -e \^$PREFIX | sed "s,\-[^-]*\-[^-]*$,," | sort -u) )
 	fi
 	compadd "$@" -a packages
 }
 # provides completions for package groups
 _pacman_completions_installed_groups() {
 	local -a cmd groups
 	_pacman_get_command
 	groups=( $(_call_program installed_groups $cmd[@] -Qg | cut -d' ' -f1 | grep -e \^$PREFIX | sort -u) )
 	compadd "$@" -a groups
 }
 # provides completions for installed packages
 _pacman_completions_installed_packages() {
 	local -a cmd packages
 	packages=( $(_call_program installed_packages ls /var/lib/pacman/local | grep "^$PREFIX" | sed "s,\-[^-]*\-[^-]*$,,") )
 	compadd "$@" -a packages
 }
 # provides completions for repository names
 _pacman_completions_repositories() {
 	local -a cmd repositories
 	repositories=( $(_call_program repositories cat /etc/pacman.conf | grep "^\[" | sed "s,\(\[\|\]\),,g" | grep -v "^options" | grep "^$PREFIX" | sort -u) )
 	compadd "$@" -a repositories
 }
 # builds command for invoking pacman in a _call_program command - extracts
 # relevant options already specified (config file, etc)
 # $cmd must be declared by calling function
 _pacman_get_command() {
 	# this is mostly nicked from _perforce
 	cmd=( "pacman" )
 	integer i
 	for (( i = 2; i < CURRENT - 1; i++ )); do
 		if [[ ${words[i]} = "--config" || ${words[i]} = "--root" ]]; then
 			cmd+=( ${words[i,i+1]} )
 		fi
 	done
 }
 # main dispatcher
 _pacman() {
 	case $words[2] in
 		-A*)  _pacman_action_add      ;;
 		-F*)  _pacman_action_freshen  ;;
 		-Qg) # ipkg groups
 			_arguments -s : \
 				"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 				"$_pacman_opts_query_modifiers[@]" \
 				'*:groups:_pacman_completions_installed_groups'
 				;;
 		-Qo) # file *.pkg.tar.gz
 			_arguments -s : \
 				"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 				"$_pacman_opts_query_modifiers[@]" \
 				'*:package file:_files'
 				;;
 		-Qp) # file *.pkg.tar.gz
 			_arguments -s : \
 				"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 				"$_pacman_opts_query_modifiers[@]" \
 				'*:package file:_files -g "*.pkg.tar.gz"'
 				;;
 		-Q*)  _pacman_action_query    ;;
 		-R*)  _pacman_action_remove   ;;
 		-Sl) # repos
 			_arguments -s : \
 				"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 				"$_pacman_opts_sync_modifiers[@]" \
 				'*:package repo:_pacman_completions_repositories' \
 				;;
 		-Sg) # pkg groups
 			_arguments -s : \
 				"$_pacman_opts_common[@]" \
 				"$_pacman_opts_sync_modifiers[@]" \
 				'*:package group:_pacman_completions_all_groups'
 				;;
 		-S*)  _pacman_action_sync     ;;
 		-U*)  _pacman_action_upgrade  ;;
 		-V*)  _pacman_action_version  ;;
 		-h*)  _pacman_action_help     ;;
 		-  )  _pacman_action_none     ;;
 		*  )  return 1                ;;
 	esac
 }
 # run the main dispatcher
 _pacman "$@"
--- a/584
+++ b/584
@ -0,0 +1,584 @@
 #! /bin/sh
 # depcomp - compile a program generating dependencies as side-effects
 scriptversion=2006-10-15.18
 # Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Free Software
 # Foundation, Inc.
 # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
 # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
 # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
 # any later version.
 # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
 # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
 # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
 # GNU General Public License for more details.
 # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
 # Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
 # 02110-1301, USA.
 # As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
 # distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
 # configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
 # the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program.
 # Originally written by Alexandre Oliva <oliva@dcc.unicamp.br>.
 case $1 in
  '')
     echo "$0: No command.  Try \`$0 --help' for more information." 1>&2
     exit 1;
     ;;
  -h | --h*)
    cat <<\EOF
 Usage: depcomp [--help] [--version] PROGRAM [ARGS]
 Run PROGRAMS ARGS to compile a file, generating dependencies
 as side-effects.
 Environment variables:
  depmode     Dependency tracking mode.
  source      Source file read by `PROGRAMS ARGS'.
  object      Object file output by `PROGRAMS ARGS'.
  DEPDIR      directory where to store dependencies.
  depfile     Dependency file to output.
  tmpdepfile  Temporary file to use when outputing dependencies.
  libtool     Whether libtool is used (yes/no).
 Report bugs to <bug-automake@gnu.org>.
 EOF
    exit $?
    ;;
  -v | --v*)
    echo "depcomp $scriptversion"
    exit $?
    ;;
 esac
 if test -z "$depmode" || test -z "$source" || test -z "$object"; then
  echo "depcomp: Variables source, object and depmode must be set" 1>&2
  exit 1
 fi
 # Dependencies for sub/bar.o or sub/bar.obj go into sub/.deps/bar.Po.
 depfile=${depfile-`echo "$object" |
  sed 's|[^\\/]*$|'${DEPDIR-.deps}'/&|;s|\.\([^.]*\)$|.P\1|;s|Pobj$|Po|'`}
 tmpdepfile=${tmpdepfile-`echo "$depfile" | sed 's/\.\([^.]*\)$/.T\1/'`}
 rm -f "$tmpdepfile"
 # Some modes work just like other modes, but use different flags.  We
 # parameterize here, but still list the modes in the big case below,
 # to make depend.m4 easier to write.  Note that we *cannot* use a case
 # here, because this file can only contain one case statement.
 if test "$depmode" = hp; then
  # HP compiler uses -M and no extra arg.
  gccflag=-M
  depmode=gcc
 fi
 if test "$depmode" = dashXmstdout; then
   # This is just like dashmstdout with a different argument.
   dashmflag=-xM
   depmode=dashmstdout
 fi
 case "$depmode" in
 gcc3)
 ## gcc 3 implements dependency tracking that does exactly what
 ## we want.  Yay!  Note: for some reason libtool 1.4 doesn't like
 ## it if -MD -MP comes after the -MF stuff.  Hmm.
 ## Unfortunately, FreeBSD c89 acceptance of flags depends upon
 ## the command line argument order; so add the flags where they
 ## appear in depend2.am.  Note that the slowdown incurred here
 ## affects only configure: in makefiles, %FASTDEP% shortcuts this.
  for arg
  do
    case $arg in
    -c) set fnord "$@" -MT "$object" -MD -MP -MF "$tmpdepfile" "$arg" ;;
    *)  set fnord "$@" "$arg" ;;
    esac
    shift # fnord
    shift # $arg
  done
  "$@"
  stat=$?
  if test $stat -eq 0; then :
  else
    rm -f "$tmpdepfile"
    exit $stat
  fi
  mv "$tmpdepfile" "$depfile"
  ;;
 gcc)
 ## There are various ways to get dependency output from gcc.  Here's
 ## why we pick this rather obscure method:
 ## - Don't want to use -MD because we'd like the dependencies to end
 ##   up in a subdir.  Having to rename by hand is ugly.
 ##   (We might end up doing this anyway to support other compilers.)
 ## - The DEPENDENCIES_OUTPUT environment variable makes gcc act like
 ##   -MM, not -M (despite what the docs say).
 ## - Using -M directly means running the compiler twice (even worse
 ##   than renaming).
  if test -z "$gccflag"; then
    gccflag=-MD,
  fi
  "$@" -Wp,"$gccflag$tmpdepfile"
  stat=$?
  if test $stat -eq 0; then :
  else
    rm -f "$tmpdepfile"
    exit $stat
  fi
  rm -f "$depfile"
  echo "$object : \\" > "$depfile"
  alpha=ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
 ## The second -e expression handles DOS-style file names with drive letters.
  sed -e 's/^[^:]*: / /' \
      -e 's/^['$alpha']:\/[^:]*: / /' < "$tmpdepfile" >> "$depfile"
 ## This next piece of magic avoids the `deleted header file' problem.
 ## The problem is that when a header file which appears in a .P file
 ## is deleted, the dependency causes make to die (because there is
 ## typically no way to rebuild the header).  We avoid this by adding
 ## dummy dependencies for each header file.  Too bad gcc doesn't do
 ## this for us directly.
  tr ' ' '
 ' < "$tmpdepfile" |
 ## Some versions of gcc put a space before the `:'.  On the theory
 ## that the space means something, we add a space to the output as
 ## well.
 ## Some versions of the HPUX 10.20 sed can't process this invocation
 ## correctly.  Breaking it into two sed invocations is a workaround.
    sed -e 's/^\\$//' -e '/^$/d' -e '/:$/d' | sed -e 's/$/ :/' >> "$depfile"
  rm -f "$tmpdepfile"
  ;;
 hp)
  # This case exists only to let depend.m4 do its work.  It works by
  # looking at the text of this script.  This case will never be run,
  # since it is checked for above.
  exit 1
  ;;
 sgi)
  if test "$libtool" = yes; then
    "$@" "-Wp,-MDupdate,$tmpdepfile"
  else
    "$@" -MDupdate "$tmpdepfile"
  fi
  stat=$?
  if test $stat -eq 0; then :
  else
    rm -f "$tmpdepfile"
    exit $stat
  fi
  rm -f "$depfile"
  if test -f "$tmpdepfile"; then  # yes, the sourcefile depend on other files
    echo "$object : \\" > "$depfile"
    # Clip off the initial element (the dependent).  Don't try to be
    # clever and replace this with sed code, as IRIX sed won't handle
    # lines with more than a fixed number of characters (4096 in
    # IRIX 6.2 sed, 8192 in IRIX 6.5).  We also remove comment lines;
    # the IRIX cc adds comments like `#:fec' to the end of the
    # dependency line.
    tr ' ' '
 ' < "$tmpdepfile" \
    | sed -e 's/^.*\.o://' -e 's/#.*$//' -e '/^$/ d' | \
    tr '
 ' ' ' >> $depfile
    echo >> $depfile
    # The second pass generates a dummy entry for each header file.
    tr ' ' '
 ' < "$tmpdepfile" \
   | sed -e 's/^.*\.o://' -e 's/#.*$//' -e '/^$/ d' -e 's/$/:/' \
   >> $depfile
  else
    # The sourcefile does not contain any dependencies, so just
    # store a dummy comment line, to avoid errors with the Makefile
    # "include basename.Plo" scheme.
    echo "#dummy" > "$depfile"
  fi
  rm -f "$tmpdepfile"
  ;;
 aix)
  # The C for AIX Compiler uses -M and outputs the dependencies
  # in a .u file.  In older versions, this file always lives in the
  # current directory.  Also, the AIX compiler puts `$object:' at the
  # start of each line; $object doesn't have directory information.
  # Version 6 uses the directory in both cases.
  stripped=`echo "$object" | sed 's/\(.*\)\..*$/\1/'`
  tmpdepfile="$stripped.u"
  if test "$libtool" = yes; then
    "$@" -Wc,-M
  else
    "$@" -M
  fi
  stat=$?
  if test -f "$tmpdepfile"; then :
  else
    stripped=`echo "$stripped" | sed 's,^.*/,,'`
    tmpdepfile="$stripped.u"
  fi
  if test $stat -eq 0; then :
  else
    rm -f "$tmpdepfile"
    exit $stat
  fi
  if test -f "$tmpdepfile"; then
    outname="$stripped.o"
    # Each line is of the form `foo.o: dependent.h'.
    # Do two passes, one to just change these to
    # `$object: dependent.h' and one to simply `dependent.h:'.
    sed -e "s,^$outname:,$object :," < "$tmpdepfile" > "$depfile"
    sed -e "s,^$outname: \(.*\)$,\1:," < "$tmpdepfile" >> "$depfile"
  else
    # The sourcefile does not contain any dependencies, so just
    # store a dummy comment line, to avoid errors with the Makefile
    # "include basename.Plo" scheme.
    echo "#dummy" > "$depfile"
  fi
  rm -f "$tmpdepfile"
  ;;
 icc)
  # Intel's C compiler understands `-MD -MF file'.  However on
  #    icc -MD -MF foo.d -c -o sub/foo.o sub/foo.c
  # ICC 7.0 will fill foo.d with something like
  #    foo.o: sub/foo.c
  #    foo.o: sub/foo.h
  # which is wrong.  We want:
  #    sub/foo.o: sub/foo.c
  #    sub/foo.o: sub/foo.h
  #    sub/foo.c:
  #    sub/foo.h:
  # ICC 7.1 will output
  #    foo.o: sub/foo.c sub/foo.h
  # and will wrap long lines using \ :
  #    foo.o: sub/foo.c ... \
  #     sub/foo.h ... \
  #     ...
  "$@" -MD -MF "$tmpdepfile"
  stat=$?
  if test $stat -eq 0; then :
  else
    rm -f "$tmpdepfile"
    exit $stat
  fi
  rm -f "$depfile"
  # Each line is of the form `foo.o: dependent.h',
  # or `foo.o: dep1.h dep2.h \', or ` dep3.h dep4.h \'.
  # Do two passes, one to just change these to
  # `$object: dependent.h' and one to simply `dependent.h:'.
  sed "s,^[^:]*:,$object :," < "$tmpdepfile" > "$depfile"
  # Some versions of the HPUX 10.20 sed can't process this invocation
  # correctly.  Breaking it into two sed invocations is a workaround.
  sed 's,^[^:]*: \(.*\)$,\1,;s/^\\$//;/^$/d;/:$/d' < "$tmpdepfile" |
    sed -e 's/$/ :/' >> "$depfile"
  rm -f "$tmpdepfile"
  ;;
 hp2)
  # The "hp" stanza above does not work with aCC (C++) and HP's ia64
  # compilers, which have integrated preprocessors.  The correct option
  # to use with these is +Maked; it writes dependencies to a file named
  # 'foo.d', which lands next to the object file, wherever that
  # happens to be.
  # Much of this is similar to the tru64 case; see comments there.
  dir=`echo "$object" | sed -e 's|/[^/]*$|/|'`
  test "x$dir" = "x$object" && dir=
  base=`echo "$object" | sed -e 's|^.*/||' -e 's/\.o$//' -e 's/\.lo$//'`
  if test "$libtool" = yes; then
    tmpdepfile1=$dir$base.d
    tmpdepfile2=$dir.libs/$base.d
    "$@" -Wc,+Maked
  else
    tmpdepfile1=$dir$base.d
    tmpdepfile2=$dir$base.d
    "$@" +Maked
  fi
  stat=$?
  if test $stat -eq 0; then :
  else
     rm -f "$tmpdepfile1" "$tmpdepfile2"
     exit $stat
  fi
  for tmpdepfile in "$tmpdepfile1" "$tmpdepfile2"
  do
    test -f "$tmpdepfile" && break
  done
  if test -f "$tmpdepfile"; then
    sed -e "s,^.*\.[a-z]*:,$object:," "$tmpdepfile" > "$depfile"
    # Add `dependent.h:' lines.
    sed -ne '2,${; s/^ *//; s/ \\*$//; s/$/:/; p;}' "$tmpdepfile" >> "$depfile"
  else
    echo "#dummy" > "$depfile"
  fi
  rm -f "$tmpdepfile" "$tmpdepfile2"
  ;;
 tru64)
   # The Tru64 compiler uses -MD to generate dependencies as a side
   # effect.  `cc -MD -o foo.o ...' puts the dependencies into `foo.o.d'.
   # At least on Alpha/Redhat 6.1, Compaq CCC V6.2-504 seems to put
   # dependencies in `foo.d' instead, so we check for that too.
   # Subdirectories are respected.
   dir=`echo "$object" | sed -e 's|/[^/]*$|/|'`
   test "x$dir" = "x$object" && dir=
   base=`echo "$object" | sed -e 's|^.*/||' -e 's/\.o$//' -e 's/\.lo$//'`
   if test "$libtool" = yes; then
      # With Tru64 cc, shared objects can also be used to make a
      # static library.  This mechanism is used in libtool 1.4 series to
      # handle both shared and static libraries in a single compilation.
      # With libtool 1.4, dependencies were output in $dir.libs/$base.lo.d.
      #
      # With libtool 1.5 this exception was removed, and libtool now
      # generates 2 separate objects for the 2 libraries.  These two
      # compilations output dependencies in $dir.libs/$base.o.d and
      # in $dir$base.o.d.  We have to check for both files, because
      # one of the two compilations can be disabled.  We should prefer
      # $dir$base.o.d over $dir.libs/$base.o.d because the latter is
      # automatically cleaned when .libs/ is deleted, while ignoring
      # the former would cause a distcleancheck panic.
      tmpdepfile1=$dir.libs/$base.lo.d   # libtool 1.4
      tmpdepfile2=$dir$base.o.d          # libtool 1.5
      tmpdepfile3=$dir.libs/$base.o.d    # libtool 1.5
      tmpdepfile4=$dir.libs/$base.d      # Compaq CCC V6.2-504
      "$@" -Wc,-MD
   else
      tmpdepfile1=$dir$base.o.d
      tmpdepfile2=$dir$base.d
      tmpdepfile3=$dir$base.d
      tmpdepfile4=$dir$base.d
      "$@" -MD
   fi
   stat=$?
   if test $stat -eq 0; then :
   else
      rm -f "$tmpdepfile1" "$tmpdepfile2" "$tmpdepfile3" "$tmpdepfile4"
      exit $stat
   fi
   for tmpdepfile in "$tmpdepfile1" "$tmpdepfile2" "$tmpdepfile3" "$tmpdepfile4"
   do
     test -f "$tmpdepfile" && break
   done
   if test -f "$tmpdepfile"; then
      sed -e "s,^.*\.[a-z]*:,$object:," < "$tmpdepfile" > "$depfile"
      # That's a tab and a space in the [].
      sed -e 's,^.*\.[a-z]*:[	 ]*,,' -e 's,$,:,' < "$tmpdepfile" >> "$depfile"
   else
      echo "#dummy" > "$depfile"
   fi
   rm -f "$tmpdepfile"
   ;;
 #nosideeffect)
  # This comment above is used by automake to tell side-effect
  # dependency tracking mechanisms from slower ones.
 dashmstdout)
  # Important note: in order to support this mode, a compiler *must*
  # always write the preprocessed file to stdout, regardless of -o.
  "$@" || exit $?
  # Remove the call to Libtool.
  if test "$libtool" = yes; then
    while test $1 != '--mode=compile'; do
      shift
    done
    shift
  fi
  # Remove `-o $object'.
  IFS=" "
  for arg
  do
    case $arg in
    -o)
      shift
      ;;
    $object)
      shift
      ;;
    *)
      set fnord "$@" "$arg"
      shift # fnord
      shift # $arg
      ;;
    esac
  done
  test -z "$dashmflag" && dashmflag=-M
  # Require at least two characters before searching for `:'
  # in the target name.  This is to cope with DOS-style filenames:
  # a dependency such as `c:/foo/bar' could be seen as target `c' otherwise.
  "$@" $dashmflag |
    sed 's:^[  ]*[^: ][^:][^:]*\:[    ]*:'"$object"'\: :' > "$tmpdepfile"
  rm -f "$depfile"
  cat < "$tmpdepfile" > "$depfile"
  tr ' ' '
 ' < "$tmpdepfile" | \
 ## Some versions of the HPUX 10.20 sed can't process this invocation
 ## correctly.  Breaking it into two sed invocations is a workaround.
    sed -e 's/^\\$//' -e '/^$/d' -e '/:$/d' | sed -e 's/$/ :/' >> "$depfile"
  rm -f "$tmpdepfile"
  ;;
 dashXmstdout)
  # This case only exists to satisfy depend.m4.  It is never actually
  # run, as this mode is specially recognized in the preamble.
  exit 1
  ;;
 makedepend)
  "$@" || exit $?
  # Remove any Libtool call
  if test "$libtool" = yes; then
    while test $1 != '--mode=compile'; do
      shift
    done
    shift
  fi
  # X makedepend
  shift
  cleared=no
  for arg in "$@"; do
    case $cleared in
    no)
      set ""; shift
      cleared=yes ;;
    esac
    case "$arg" in
    -D*|-I*)
      set fnord "$@" "$arg"; shift ;;
    # Strip any option that makedepend may not understand.  Remove
    # the object too, otherwise makedepend will parse it as a source file.
    -*|$object)
      ;;
    *)
      set fnord "$@" "$arg"; shift ;;
    esac
  done
  obj_suffix="`echo $object | sed 's/^.*\././'`"
  touch "$tmpdepfile"
  ${MAKEDEPEND-makedepend} -o"$obj_suffix" -f"$tmpdepfile" "$@"
  rm -f "$depfile"
  cat < "$tmpdepfile" > "$depfile"
  sed '1,2d' "$tmpdepfile" | tr ' ' '
 ' | \
 ## Some versions of the HPUX 10.20 sed can't process this invocation
 ## correctly.  Breaking it into two sed invocations is a workaround.
    sed -e 's/^\\$//' -e '/^$/d' -e '/:$/d' | sed -e 's/$/ :/' >> "$depfile"
  rm -f "$tmpdepfile" "$tmpdepfile".bak
  ;;
 cpp)
  # Important note: in order to support this mode, a compiler *must*
  # always write the preprocessed file to stdout.
  "$@" || exit $?
  # Remove the call to Libtool.
  if test "$libtool" = yes; then
    while test $1 != '--mode=compile'; do
      shift
    done
    shift
  fi
  # Remove `-o $object'.
  IFS=" "
  for arg
  do
    case $arg in
    -o)
      shift
      ;;
    $object)
      shift
      ;;
    *)
      set fnord "$@" "$arg"
      shift # fnord
      shift # $arg
      ;;
    esac
  done
  "$@" -E |
    sed -n -e '/^# [0-9][0-9]* "\([^"]*\)".*/ s:: \1 \\:p' \
       -e '/^#line [0-9][0-9]* "\([^"]*\)".*/ s:: \1 \\:p' |
    sed '$ s: \\$::' > "$tmpdepfile"
  rm -f "$depfile"
  echo "$object : \\" > "$depfile"
  cat < "$tmpdepfile" >> "$depfile"
  sed < "$tmpdepfile" '/^$/d;s/^ //;s/ \\$//;s/$/ :/' >> "$depfile"
  rm -f "$tmpdepfile"
  ;;
 msvisualcpp)
  # Important note: in order to support this mode, a compiler *must*
  # always write the preprocessed file to stdout, regardless of -o,
  # because we must use -o when running libtool.
  "$@" || exit $?
  IFS=" "
  for arg
  do
    case "$arg" in
    "-Gm"|"/Gm"|"-Gi"|"/Gi"|"-ZI"|"/ZI")
 	set fnord "$@"
 	shift
 	shift
 	;;
    *)
 	set fnord "$@" "$arg"
 	shift
 	shift
 	;;
    esac
  done
  "$@" -E |
  sed -n '/^#line [0-9][0-9]* "\([^"]*\)"/ s::echo "`cygpath -u \\"\1\\"`":p' | sort | uniq > "$tmpdepfile"
  rm -f "$depfile"
  echo "$object : \\" > "$depfile"
  . "$tmpdepfile" | sed 's% %\\ %g' | sed -n '/^\(.*\)$/ s::	\1 \\:p' >> "$depfile"
  echo "	" >> "$depfile"
  . "$tmpdepfile" | sed 's% %\\ %g' | sed -n '/^\(.*\)$/ s::\1\::p' >> "$depfile"
  rm -f "$tmpdepfile"
  ;;
 none)
  exec "$@"
  ;;
 *)
  echo "Unknown depmode $depmode" 1>&2
  exit 1
  ;;
 esac
 exit 0
 # Local Variables:
 # mode: shell-script
 # sh-indentation: 2
 # eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
 # time-stamp-start: "scriptversion="
 # time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
 # time-stamp-end: "$"
 # End:
--- a/doc/.cvsignore
+++ b/doc/.cvsignore
@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
 Makefile
 Makefile.in
 *.html
 man3
--- a/doc/.gitignore
+++ b/doc/.gitignore
@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
 *.[1-8]
 asciidoc-manpage.css
 asciidoc.css
 asciidoc.js
 *.html
 *.xml
 man3
 website.tar.gz
 Doxyfile
--- a/doc/BUILDINFO.5.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/BUILDINFO.5.asciidoc
@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
 BUILDINFO(5)
 ============
 Name
 ----
 BUILDINFO - Makepkg package build information file
 Synopsis
 --------
 This manual page describes the format of a BUILDINFO file found in the root of
 a package created by makepkg. The file contains a description of the package's
 build environment. The information is formatted in key-value pairs separated by
 a '=', one value per line. Arrays are represented as multiple key-value pairs
 having the same key.
 Description
 -----------
 This is a description of the contents of version '2' of the
 BUILDINFO file format.
 *format*::
 	Denotes the file format version, represented by a plain positive integer.
 *pkgname*::
 	The name of the package.
 *pkgbase*::
 	The base name of a package, usually the same as the pkgname except for
 	split packages.
 *pkgver*::
 	The version of the package including pkgrel and epoch.
 *pkgarch*::
 	The architecture of the package.
 *pkgbuild_sha256sum*::
 	The sha256sum in hex format of the PKGBUILD used to build the package.
 *packager*::
 	The details of the packager that built the package.
 *builddate*::
 	The build date of the package in epoch.
 *builddir*::
 	The directory where the package was built.
 *startdir*::
 	The directory from which makepkg was executed.
 *buildtool*::
 	The name of the tool ecosystem used to set up the build environment. Used
 	for defining a spec for reproducible builds, e.g. the source of the
 	linkman:makepkg.conf[5] used.
 *buildtoolver*::
 	The full version of the 'buildtool', for example:
 	"$pkgver-$pkgrel-$pkgarch".
 *buildenv (array)*::
 	The build environment specified in makepkg.conf.
 *options (array)*::
 	The options set specified when building the package.
 *installed (array)*::
 	The installed packages at build time including the version information of
 	the package. Formatted as "$pkgname-$pkgver-$pkgrel-$pkgarch".
 See Also
 --------
 linkman:makepkg[8], linkman:pacman[8], linkman:makepkg.conf[5]
 include::footer.asciidoc[]
--- a/doc/Doxyfile.in
+++ b/doc/Doxyfile.in
@ -1,342 +0,0 @@
 # Doxyfile 1.9.3
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Project related configuration options
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
 PROJECT_NAME           = libalpm
 PROJECT_NUMBER         =
 PROJECT_BRIEF          = "Arch Linux Package Manager Library"
 PROJECT_LOGO           =
 OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = @OUTPUT_DIRECTORY@
 CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
 ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
 OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
 BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
 REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
 ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
                         "The $name widget" \
                         "The $name file" \
                         is \
                         provides \
                         specifies \
                         contains \
                         represents \
                         a \
                         an \
                         the
 ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = YES
 INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
 FULL_PATH_NAMES        = NO
 STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
 STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
 SHORT_NAMES            = NO
 JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = YES
 JAVADOC_BANNER         = NO
 QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
 MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
 PYTHON_DOCSTRING       = YES
 INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
 SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
 TAB_SIZE               = 4
 ALIASES                =
 OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
 OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
 OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
 OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
 OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_SLICE  = NO
 EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
 MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = YES
 TOC_INCLUDE_HEADINGS   = 5
 AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
 BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
 CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
 SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
 IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
 DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
 GROUP_NESTED_COMPOUNDS = NO
 SUBGROUPING            = YES
 INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
 INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = YES
 TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = YES
 LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
 NUM_PROC_THREADS       = 1
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Build related configuration options
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 EXTRACT_ALL            = NO
 EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = NO
 EXTRACT_PRIV_VIRTUAL   = NO
 EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
 EXTRACT_STATIC         = NO
 EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
 EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
 EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
 RESOLVE_UNNAMED_PARAMS = YES
 HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
 HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
 HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
 HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = YES
 INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
 CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = YES
 HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
 HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO
 SHOW_HEADERFILE        = YES
 SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
 SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
 FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
 INLINE_INFO            = YES
 SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
 SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
 SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
 SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
 SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
 STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
 GENERATE_TODOLIST      = YES
 GENERATE_TESTLIST      = YES
 GENERATE_BUGLIST       = YES
 GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
 ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
 MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
 SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
 SHOW_FILES             = YES
 SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
 FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
 LAYOUT_FILE            =
 CITE_BIB_FILES         =
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 QUIET                  = NO
 WARNINGS               = YES
 WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
 WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
 WARN_IF_INCOMPLETE_DOC = YES
 WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = NO
 WARN_AS_ERROR          = NO
 WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
 WARN_LOGFILE           =
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Configuration options related to the input files
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 INPUT                  = @INPUT_DIRECTORY@/../lib/libalpm/alpm.h \
                         @INPUT_DIRECTORY@/../lib/libalpm/alpm_list.h
 INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
 FILE_PATTERNS          =
 RECURSIVE              = NO
 EXCLUDE                =
 EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
 EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
 EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = _alpm_* \
                         __alpm_*
 EXAMPLE_PATH           =
 EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
 EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
 IMAGE_PATH             =
 INPUT_FILTER           =
 FILTER_PATTERNS        =
 FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
 FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
 USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Configuration options related to source browsing
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
 INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
 STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = NO
 REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = YES
 REFERENCES_RELATION    = YES
 REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = YES
 SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
 USE_HTAGS              = NO
 VERBATIM_HEADERS       = YES
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = NO
 IGNORE_PREFIX          =
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Configuration options related to the HTML output
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 GENERATE_HTML          = NO
 HTML_OUTPUT            = html
 HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
 HTML_HEADER            =
 HTML_FOOTER            =
 HTML_STYLESHEET        =
 HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
 HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
 HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
 HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
 HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
 HTML_DYNAMIC_MENUS     = YES
 HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = NO
 HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
 GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
 DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
 DOCSET_FEEDURL         =
 DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
 DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
 DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
 GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
 CHM_FILE               =
 HHC_LOCATION           =
 GENERATE_CHI           = NO
 CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
 BINARY_TOC             = NO
 TOC_EXPAND             = NO
 GENERATE_QHP           = NO
 QCH_FILE               =
 QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
 QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
 QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
 QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
 QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
 QHG_LOCATION           =
 GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
 ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
 DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
 GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = NO
 FULL_SIDEBAR           = NO
 ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 4
 TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
 EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
 OBFUSCATE_EMAILS       = YES
 HTML_FORMULA_FORMAT    = png
 FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
 FORMULA_MACROFILE      =
 USE_MATHJAX            = NO
 MATHJAX_VERSION        = MathJax_2
 MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
 MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://www.mathjax.org/mathjax
 MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
 MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
 SEARCHENGINE           = NO
 SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
 EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
 SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
 SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
 EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
 EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
 LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
 LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
 MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
 LATEX_MAKEINDEX_CMD    = makeindex
 COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
 PAPER_TYPE             = letter
 EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
 LATEX_HEADER           =
 LATEX_FOOTER           =
 LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET =
 LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
 PDF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
 USE_PDFLATEX           = NO
 LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
 LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
 LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
 LATEX_EMOJI_DIRECTORY  =
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Configuration options related to the RTF output
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 GENERATE_RTF           = NO
 RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
 COMPACT_RTF            = NO
 RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
 RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
 RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Configuration options related to the man page output
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 GENERATE_MAN           = YES
 MAN_OUTPUT             = .
 MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
 MAN_SUBDIR             =
 MAN_LINKS              = NO
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Configuration options related to the XML output
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 GENERATE_XML           = NO
 XML_OUTPUT             = xml
 XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
 XML_NS_MEMB_FILE_SCOPE = NO
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
 DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Configuration options related to the Perl module output
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
 PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
 PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
 PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Configuration options related to the preprocessor
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
 MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
 EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
 SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
 INCLUDE_PATH           = ../..
 INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  = *.h
 PREDEFINED             = HAVE_CONFIG_H= \
                         SYMEXPORT= \
                         HAVE_LIBARCHIVE \
                         HAVE_LIBCURL \
                         HAVE_LIBGPGME
 EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
 SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Configuration options related to external references
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 TAGFILES               =
 GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
 ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
 EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
 EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Configuration options related to the dot tool
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 DIA_PATH               =
 HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
 HAVE_DOT               = YES
 DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
 DOT_FONTPATH           =
 CLASS_GRAPH            = YES
 COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = YES
 GROUP_GRAPHS           = YES
 UML_LOOK               = NO
 UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
 DOT_UML_DETAILS        = NO
 DOT_WRAP_THRESHOLD     = 17
 TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
 INCLUDE_GRAPH          = YES
 INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = YES
 CALL_GRAPH             = NO
 CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
 GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = YES
 DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = YES
 DIR_GRAPH_MAX_DEPTH    = 1
 DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
 INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
 DOT_PATH               =
 DOTFILE_DIRS           =
 MSCFILE_DIRS           =
 DIAFILE_DIRS           =
 PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
 PLANTUML_CFG_FILE      =
 PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH  =
 DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 50
 MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 3
 DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
 GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
 DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
--- a/doc/Makefile.am
+++ b/doc/Makefile.am
@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
 man_MANS = \
 	pacman.8 \
 	makepkg.8 \
 	PKGBUILD.5 \
 	makepkg.conf.5 \
 	pacman.conf.5 \
 	libalpm.3
 if HAS_DOXYGEN
 man_MANS += $(wildcard man3/*.3)
 endif
 EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)
 clean-local:
 	$(RM) man3/*.3
--- a/doc/PKGBUILD-example.txt
+++ b/doc/PKGBUILD-example.txt
@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
 # Maintainer: Joe User <joe.user@example.com>
 pkgname=patch
 pkgver=2.7.1
 pkgrel=1
 pkgdesc="A utility to apply patch files to original sources"
 arch=('i686' 'x86_64')
 url="https://www.gnu.org/software/patch/patch.html"
 license=('GPL')
 groups=('base-devel')
 depends=('glibc')
 makedepends=('ed')
 optdepends=('ed: for "patch -e" functionality')
 source=("ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/$pkgname/$pkgname-$pkgver.tar.xz"{,.sig})
 sha256sums=('9124ba46db0abd873d0995c2ca880e81252676bb6c03e0a37dfc5f608a9b0ceb'
            'SKIP')
 build() {
 	cd "$srcdir/$pkgname-$pkgver"
 	./configure --prefix=/usr
 	make
 }
 package() {
 	cd "$srcdir/$pkgname-$pkgver"
 	make DESTDIR="$pkgdir/" install
 }
--- a/doc/PKGBUILD.5
+++ b/doc/PKGBUILD.5
@ -0,0 +1,288 @@
 ." the string declarations are a start to try and make distro independent
 .ds DS Arch Linux
 .ds PB PKGBUILD
 .ds VR 3.0.0
 .TH \*(PB 5 "Feb 07, 2007" "\*(PB version \*(VR" "\*(DS Files"
 .SH NAME
 \*(PB \- \*(DS package build description file
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 This manual page is meant to describe general rules about \fB\*(PB\fPs. Once
 a \fB\*(PB\fP is written, the actual package is built using \fBmakepkg\fP and 
 installed with \fBpacman\fP.
 \fBNOTE:\fP If you have a local copy of the Arch Build System (ABS) tree
 on your computer, you can copy the \*(PB.proto file to your new package
 build directory and edit it from there.  To acquire/sync the ABS tree, use
 the \fBabs\fP script included with \fBpacman\fP.
 .SH OPTIONS AND DIRECTIVES
 .TP
 .B pkgname
 The name of the package. This has be a unix-friendly name as it will be
 used in the package filename.
 .TP
 .B pkgver
 The version of the software as released from the author (e.g. 2.7.1).
 .TP
 .B pkgrel
 This is the release number specific to the \*(DSs release. This allows package
 maintainers to make updates to the package's configure flags, for example.
 .TP
 .B pkgdesc
 This should be a brief description of the package and its functionality. Try to
 keep the description to one line of text.
 .TP
 .B url
 This field contains a URL that is associated with the software being packaged.
 This is typically the project's website.
 .TP
 .B license (array)
 This field specifies the license(s) that apply to the package. Commonly-used
 licenses are found in \fI/usr/share/licenses/common\fP. If you see the
 package's license there, simply reference it in the license field (e.g.
 \fBlicense=("GPL")\fP). If the package provides a license not found in
 \fI/usr/share/licenses/common\fP, then you should include the license in the
 package itself and set \fBlicense=("custom")\fP or
 \fBlicense=("custom:LicenseName")\fP. The license should be placed in
 \fI$startdir/pkg/usr/share/licenses/$pkgname\fP when building the package. If
 multiple licenses are applicable for a package, list all of them:
 \fBlicenses=('GPL' 'FDL')\fP.
 .TP
 .B install
 Specifies a special install script that is to be included in the package. This
 file should reside in the same directory as the \fB\*(PB\fP, and will be copied
 into the package by \fBmakepkg\fP. It does not need to be included in the
 \fIsource\fP array (e.g. \fBinstall=pkgname.install\fP).
 .TP
 .B source \fI(array)\fP
 An array of source files required to build the package. Source files must
 either reside in the same directory as the \fB\*(PB file\fP, or be a
 fully-qualified URL that makepkg will use to download the file.  In order to
 make the PKGBUILD as useful as possible, use the \fB$pkgname\fP and
 \fB$pkgver\fP variables if possible when specifying the download location.
 .TP
 .B noextract \fI(array)\fP
 An array of filenames corresponding to those from the \fBsource\fP array. Files
 listed here will not be extracted with the rest of the source files. This is
 useful for packages which use compressed data which is downloaded but not
 necessary to uncompress.
 .TP
 .B md5sums \fI(array)\fP
 This array contains an MD5 hash for every source file specified in the
 \fBsource\fP array (in the same order). \fBmakepkg\fP will use this to verify
 source file integrity during subsequent builds. To easily generate md5sums, run
 "makepkg -g >> \*(PB".  If desired, move the \fBmd5sums\fP line to an
 appropriate location.  NOTE: \fBmakepkg\fP supports multiple integrity
 algorithms and their corresponding arrays (i.e. sha1sums for the SHA1
 algorithm); however, official packages use only md5sums for the time being.
 .TP
 .B sha1sums, etc.
 Alternative integrity checks that \fBmakepkg\fP supports, as noted in
 \fBmd5sums\fP above.
 .TP
 .B groups \fI(array)\fP
 An array of symbolic names that represent groups of packages, allowing
 you to install multiple packages by requesting a single target. For example,
 one could install all KDE packages by installing the 'kde' group.
 .TP
 .B arch \fI(array)\fP
 Defines on which architectures the given package is available (e.g.
 \fBarch=('i686' 'x86_64')\fP). 
 .TP
 .B backup \fI(array)\fP 
 A space-delimited array of filenames, \fIwithout\fP preceding slashes, that
 should be backed up if the package is removed or upgraded. This is commonly
 used for packages placing configuration files in /etc. See \fBHANDLING CONFIG
 FILES\fP in the \fBpacman\fP manpage for more information.
 .TP
 .B depends \fI(array)\fP 
 An array of packages that this package depends on to run. Packages in this list
 should be surrounded with single quotes and contain at least the package name.
 Entries can also include a version requirement of the form
 \fB'name<>version'\fP, where <> is one of three comparisons: \fI>=\fP (greater
 than or equal to), \fI<=\fP (less than or equal to), or \fI=\fP (equal to).
 .TP
 .B makedepends \fI(array)\fP
 An array of packages that this package depends on to build, but are not needed
 at runtime.  Packages in this list follow the same format as \fBdepends\fP.
 .TP
 .B conflicts \fI(array)\fP
 An array of packages that will conflict with this package (i.e. they cannot
 both be installed at the same time). This directive follows the same format as
 \fIdepends\fP, except you cannot specify versions.
 .TP
 .B provides \fI(array)\fP
 An array of "virtual provisions" that this package provides. This allows a
 package to provide dependencies other than its own package name. For example,
 the dcron package can provide 'cron', which allows packages to depend on 'cron'
 rather than 'dcron OR fcron'.
 .TP
 .B replaces \fI(array)\fP
 An array of packages that this package should replace, and can be used to
 handle renamed/combined packages. For example, if the 'j2re' package is renamed
 to 'jre', this directive allows future upgrades to continue as expected even
 though the package has moved.
 .TP
 .B options \fI(array)\fP
 This array allows you to override some of \fBmakepkg\fP's default behavior when
 building packages. To set an option, just include the option name in the
 \fBoptions\fP array. To reverse the default behavior, place an "!" at the front
 of the option. Only specify the options you specifically want to override, the
 rest will be taken from \fBmakepkg.conf\fP. NOTE: 'force' is a special option
 only used in \fB\*(PB\fPs, do not use it unless you know what you are doing.
 .RS
 .TP
 .B strip
 Strip symbols from binaries and libraries. If you frequently use a debugger on
 programs or libraries, it may be helpful to disable this option.
 .TP
 .B docs
 Save doc and info directories. If you wish to delete doc and info directories,
 specify "!docs" in the array.
 .TP
 .B libtool
 Leave libtool (.la) files in packages. Specify "!libtool" to remove them.
 .TP
 .B emptydirs
 Leave empty directories in packages.
 .TP
 .B ccache
 Allow the use of \fBccache\fP during build. More useful in its negative form
 "!ccache" with select packages that have problems building with \fBccache\fP.
 .TP
 .B distcc
 Allow the use of \fBdistcc\fP during build. More useful in its negative form
 "!distcc" with select packages that have problems building with \fBdistcc\fP.
 .TP
 .B makeflags
 Allow the use of user-specific makeflags during build as specified in
 \fBmakepkg.conf\fP. More useful in its negative form "!makeflags" with select
 packages that have problems building with custom makeflags such as "-j2" (or
 higher).
 .TP
 .B force
 Force the package to be upgraded by a \fBpacman\fP system upgrade operation,
 even if the version number would normally not trigger such an upgrade. This is
 useful when the version numbering scheme of a package changes (or is
 alphanumeric).
 .RE
 .SH INSTALL/UPGRADE/REMOVE SCRIPTING
 \fBPacman\fP has the ability to store and execute a package-specific script
 when it installs, removes, or upgrades a package.  This allows a package to
 configure itself after installation and do the opposite right before it is
 removed.
 The exact time the script is run varies with each operation:
 .TP
 .B pre_install
 script is run right before files are extracted.
 .TP
 .B post_install
 script is run right after files are extracted.
 .TP
 .B pre_upgrade
 script is run right before files are extracted.
 .TP
 .B post_upgrade
 script is run after files are extracted.
 .TP
 .B pre_remove
 script is run right before files are removed.
 .TP
 .B post_remove
 script is run right after files are removed.
 .P
 To use this feature, create a file such as 'pkgname.install' and put it in
 the same directory as the \fB\*(PB\fP script.  Then use the \fBinstall\fP
 directive:
 .RS
 .nf
 install=pkgname.install
 .fi
 .RE
 The install script does not need to be specified in the \fBsource\fP array.
 A template install file is available in the ABS tree (/var/abs/install.proto).
 .SH EXAMPLE
 The following is an example \fB\*(PB\fP for the 'modutils' package. For more
 examples, look through the ABS tree.
 .nf
 # Maintainer: John Doe <johndoe@archlinux.org>
 # Contributor: Bill Smith <billsmith@archlinux.org>
 pkgname=modutils
 pkgver=2.4.25
 pkgrel=1
 pkgdesc="Utilities for inserting modules in the linux kernel"
 url="http://www.kernel.org"
 makedepends=('bash' 'mawk')
 depends=('glibc' 'zlib')
 backup=(etc/modules.conf)
 source=(ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/$pkgname/v2.4/$pkgname-$pkgver.tar.bz2
        modules.conf)
 arch=('i686')
 license=('GPL' 'custom') # dual licensed
 md5sums=('2c0cca3ef6330a187c6ef4fe41ecaa4d'
         '35175bee593a7cc7d6205584a94d8625')
 options=(!libtool)
 build() {
  cd $startdir/src/$pkgname-$pkgver
  ./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-insmod-static
  make || return 1
  make prefix=$startdir/pkg/usr install
  mv $startdir/pkg/usr/sbin $startdir/pkg
  mkdir -p $startdir/pkg/etc
  cp ../modules.conf $startdir/pkg/etc
 }
 .fi
 .SH SEE ALSO
 .BR makepkg (8),
 .BR pacman (8),
 .BR makepkg.conf (5)
 See the Arch Linux website at <http://www.archlinux.org> for more current
 information on the distribution and the \fBpacman\fP family of tools, and
 <http://wiki.archlinux.org/index.php/Arch_Packaging_Standards> for
 recommendations on packaging standards.
 .SH AUTHORS
 .nf
 Judd Vinet <jvinet@zeroflux.org>
 Aurelien Foret <aurelien@archlinux.org>
 Aaron Griffin <aaron@archlinux.org>
 Dan McGee <dan@archlinux.org>
 .fi
 See the 'AUTHORS' file for additional contributors.
--- a/doc/PKGBUILD.5.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/PKGBUILD.5.asciidoc
@ -1,544 +0,0 @@
 PKGBUILD(5)
 ===========
 Name
 ----
 PKGBUILD - Package build description file
 Synopsis
 --------
 PKGBUILD
 Description
 -----------
 This manual page describes general rules about PKGBUILDs. Once a
 PKGBUILD is written, the actual package is built using makepkg and installed
 with pacman.
 NOTE: An example PKGBUILD, useful for reference, is located in '{pkgdatadir}'
 along with other example files such as an install script. You can copy the
 provided PKGBUILD.proto file to a new package build directory and make
 customizations to suit your needs.
 Options and Directives
 ----------------------
 The following is a list of standard options and directives available for use
 in a PKGBUILD. These are all understood and interpreted by makepkg, and most
 of them will be directly transferred to the built package. The mandatory
 fields for a minimally functional PKGBUILD are *pkgname*, *pkgver*, *pkgrel*
 and *arch*.
 If you need to create any custom variables for use in your build process, it is
 recommended to prefix their name with an '_' (underscore).
 This will prevent any possible name clashes with internal makepkg variables.
 For example, to store the base kernel version in a variable, use something
 similar to `$_basekernver`.
 *pkgname (array)*::
 	Either the name of the package or an array of names for split packages.
 	Valid characters for members of this array are alphanumerics, and any of
 	the following characters: ```@ . _ + -`''. Additionally, names are not
 	allowed to start with hyphens or dots.
 *pkgver*::
 	The version of the software as released from the author (e.g., '2.7.1').
 	The variable is not allowed to contain colons, forward slashes, hyphens
 	or whitespace.
 +
 The `pkgver` variable can be automatically updated by providing a `pkgver()`
 function in the PKGBUILD that outputs the new package version.
 This is run after downloading and extracting the sources and running the
 `prepare()` function (if present), so it can use those files in determining the
 new `pkgver`.  This is most useful when used with sources from version control
 systems (see below).
 *pkgrel*::
 	This is the release number specific to the distribution. This
 	allows package maintainers to make updates to the package's configure
 	flags, for example. This is typically set to '1' for each new upstream
 	software release and incremented for intermediate PKGBUILD updates. The
 	variable is a positive integer, with an optional subrelease level
 	specified by adding another positive integer separated by a period
 	(i.e. in the form x.y).
 *epoch*::
 	Used to force the package to be seen as newer than any previous versions
 	with a lower epoch, even if the version number would normally not trigger
 	such an upgrade. This value is required to be a positive integer; the
 	default value if left unspecified is '0'. This is useful when the version
 	numbering scheme of a package changes (or is alphanumeric), breaking normal
 	version comparison logic. See linkman:pacman[8] for more information on
 	version comparisons.
 *pkgdesc*::
 	This should be a brief description of the package and its functionality.
 	Try to keep the description to one line of text and to not use the package's
 	name.
 *url*::
 	This field contains a URL that is associated with the software being
 	packaged. This is typically the project's web site.
 *license (array)*::
 	This field specifies the license(s) that apply to the package.
 	If multiple licenses are applicable, list all of them:
 	`license=('GPL' 'FDL')`.
 *install*::
 	Specifies a special install script that is to be included in the package.
 	This file should reside in the same directory as the PKGBUILD and will
 	be copied into the package by makepkg. It does not need to be included
 	in the source array (e.g., `install=$pkgname.install`).
 *changelog*::
 	Specifies a changelog file that is to be included in the package.
 	The changelog file should end in a single newline.
 	This file should reside in the same directory as the PKGBUILD and will
 	be copied into the package by makepkg. It does not need to be included
 	in the source array (e.g., `changelog=$pkgname.changelog`).
 *source (array)*::
 	An array of source files required to build the package. Source files
 	must either reside in the same directory as the PKGBUILD, or be a
 	fully-qualified URL that makepkg can use to download the file.
 	To simplify the maintenance of PKGBUILDs, use the `$pkgname` and `$pkgver`
 	variables when specifying the download location, if possible.
 	Compressed files will be extracted automatically unless found in the
 	noextract array described below.
 +
 Additional architecture-specific sources can be added by appending an
 underscore and the architecture name e.g., 'source_x86_64=()'. There must be a
 corresponding integrity array with checksums, e.g. 'cksums_x86_64=()'.
 +
 It is also possible to change the name of the downloaded file, which is helpful
 with weird URLs and for handling multiple source files with the same
 name. The syntax is: `source=('filename::url')`.
 +
 makepkg also supports building developmental versions of packages using sources
 downloaded from version control systems (VCS). For more information, see
 <<VCS,Using VCS Sources>> below.
 +
 Files in the source array with extensions `.sig`, `.sign` or, `.asc` are
 recognized by makepkg as PGP signatures and will be automatically used to verify
 the integrity of the corresponding source file.
 *validpgpkeys (array)*::
 	An array of PGP fingerprints. If this array is non-empty, makepkg will
 	only accept signatures from the keys listed here and will ignore the
 	trust values from the keyring. If the source file was signed with a
 	subkey, makepkg will still use the primary key for comparison.
 +
 Only full fingerprints are accepted. They must be uppercase and must not
 contain whitespace characters.
 *noextract (array)*::
 	An array of file names corresponding to those from the source array. Files
 	listed here will not be extracted with the rest of the source files. This
 	is useful for packages that use compressed data directly.
 *cksums (array)*::
 	This array contains CRC checksums for every source file specified in the
 	source array (in the same order). makepkg will use this to verify source
 	file integrity during subsequent builds. If 'SKIP' is put in the array
 	in place of a normal hash, the integrity check for that source file will
 	be skipped. To easily generate cksums, run ``makepkg -g >> PKGBUILD''.
 	If desired, move the cksums line to an appropriate location.  Note that
 	checksums generated by "makepkg -g" should be verified using checksum
 	values provided by the software developer.
 *md5sums, sha1sums, sha224sums, sha256sums, sha384sums, sha512sums, b2sums (arrays)*::
 	Alternative integrity checks that makepkg supports; these all behave
 	similar to the cksums option described above. To enable use and generation
 	of these checksums, be sure to set up the `INTEGRITY_CHECK` option in
 	linkman:makepkg.conf[5].
 *groups (array)*::
 	An array of symbolic names that represent groups of packages, allowing
 	you to install multiple packages by requesting a single target. For
 	example, one could install all KDE packages by installing the 'kde' group.
 *arch (array)*::
 	Defines on which architectures the given package is available (e.g.,
 	`arch=('i686' 'x86_64')`). Packages that contain no architecture specific
 	files should use `arch=('any')`. Valid characters for members of this array
 	are alphanumerics and ```_`''.
 *backup (array)*::
 	An array of file names, without preceding slashes, that
 	should be backed up if the package is removed or upgraded. This is
 	commonly used for packages placing configuration files in '/etc'. See
 	`"Handling Config Files"` in linkman:pacman[8] for more information.
 *depends (array)*::
 	An array of packages this package depends on to run. Entries in
 	this list should be surrounded with single quotes and contain at least
 	the package name. Entries can also include a version requirement of the
 	form 'name<>version', where `<>` is one of five comparisons: `>=` (greater
 	than or equal to), `<=` (less than or equal to), `=` (equal to), `>`
 	(greater than), or `<` (less than).
 +
 Additional architecture-specific depends can be added by appending an
 underscore and the architecture name e.g., 'depends_x86_64=()'.
 *makedepends (array)*::
 	An array of packages this package depends on to build but are not
 	needed at runtime. Packages in this list follow the same format as
 	depends.
 +
 Additional architecture-specific makedepends can be added by appending an
 underscore and the architecture name e.g., 'makedepends_x86_64=()'.
 *checkdepends (array)*::
 	An array of packages this package depends on to run its test suite
 	but are not needed at runtime. Packages in this list follow the same
 	format as depends. These dependencies are only considered when the
 	check() function is present and is to be run by makepkg.
 +
 Additional architecture-specific checkdepends can be added by appending an
 underscore and the architecture name e.g., 'checkdepends_x86_64=()'.
 *optdepends (array)*::
 	An array of packages (and accompanying reasons) that are not essential for
 	base functionality, but may be necessary to make full use of the contents
 	of this package. optdepends are currently for informational purposes only
 	and are not utilized by pacman during dependency resolution. Packages in
 	this list follow the same format as depends, with an optional description
 	appended. The format for specifying optdepends descriptions is:
 	optdepends=('python: for library bindings')
 +
 Additional architecture-specific optdepends can be added by appending an
 underscore and the architecture name e.g., 'optdepends_x86_64=()'.
 *conflicts (array)*::
 	An array of packages that will conflict with this package (i.e. they
 	cannot both be installed at the same time). This directive follows the
 	same format as depends. Versioned conflicts are supported using the
 	operators as described in `depends`.
 +
 Additional architecture-specific conflicts can be added by appending an
 underscore and the architecture name e.g., 'conflicts_x86_64=()'.
 *provides (array)*::
 	An array of ``virtual provisions'' this package provides. This allows
 	a package to provide dependencies other than its own package name. For
 	example, the dcron package can provide 'cron', which allows packages to
 	depend on 'cron' rather than 'dcron OR fcron'.
 +
 Versioned provisions are also possible, in the 'name=version' format. For
 example, dcron can provide 'cron=2.0' to satisfy the 'cron>=2.0' dependency of
 other packages. Provisions involving the `>` and `<` operators are invalid as
 only specific versions of a package may be provided.
 +
 Additional architecture-specific provides can be added by appending an
 underscore and the architecture name e.g., 'provides_x86_64=()'.
 *replaces (array)*::
 	An array of packages this package should replace. This can be used
 	to handle renamed/combined packages. For example, if the 'j2re' package
 	is renamed to 'jre', this directive allows future upgrades to continue
 	as expected even though the package has moved. Versioned replaces are
 	supported using the operators as described in `depends`.
 +
 Sysupgrade is currently the only pacman operation that utilizes this field.
 A normal sync or upgrade will not use its value.
 +
 Additional architecture-specific replaces can be added by appending an
 underscore and the architecture name e.g., 'replaces_x86_64=()'.
 *options (array)*::
 	This array allows you to override some of makepkg's default behavior
 	when building packages. To set an option, just include the option name
 	in the options array. To reverse the default behavior, place an ``!'' at
 	the front of the option. Only specify the options you specifically want
 	to override, the rest will be taken from linkman:makepkg.conf[5].
 	*NOTE:* 'force' is a now-removed option in favor of the top level 'epoch'
 	variable.
 	*strip*;;
 		Strip symbols from binaries and libraries. If you frequently
 		use a debugger on programs or libraries, it may be helpful to
 		disable this option.
 	*docs*;;
 		Save doc directories. If you wish to delete doc directories,
 		specify `!docs` in the array.
 	*libtool*;;
 		Leave libtool (.la) files in packages. Specify `!libtool` to
 		remove them.
 	*staticlibs*;;
 		Leave static library (.a) files in packages. Specify `!staticlibs` to
 		remove them (if they have a shared counterpart).
 	*emptydirs*;;
 		Leave empty directories in packages.
 	*zipman*;;
 		Compress man and info pages with gzip.
 	*ccache*;;
 		Allow the use of ccache during `build()`. More useful in its negative
 		form `!ccache` with select packages that have problems building
 		with ccache.
 	*distcc*;;
 		Allow the use of distcc during `build()`. More useful in its negative
 		form `!distcc` with select packages that have problems building
 		with distcc.
 	*buildflags*;;
 		Allow the use of user-specific buildflags (CPPFLAGS, CFLAGS, CXXFLAGS,
 		LDFLAGS) during `build()` as specified in linkman:makepkg.conf[5]. More
 		useful in its negative form `!buildflags` with select packages that
 		have problems building with custom buildflags.
 	*makeflags*;;
 		Allow the use of user-specific makeflags during `build()` as specified
 		in linkman:makepkg.conf[5]. More useful in its negative form
 		`!makeflags` with select packages that have problems building with
 		custom makeflags such as `-j2` (or higher).
 	*debug*;;
 		Add the user-specified debug flags (DEBUG_CFLAGS, DEBUG_CXXFLAGS) to
 		their counterpart buildflags as specified in linkman:makepkg.conf[5].
 		When used in combination with the `strip' option, a separate package
 		containing the debug symbols is created.
 	*lto*;;
 		Enable building packages using link time optimization. Adds '-flto'
 		to both CFLAGS and CXXFLAGS.
 *xdata (array)*::
 	This array allows you to add additional metadata to the package.
 	This data is neither used by pacman nor by makepkg;
 	It has purely informational purpose, or may be interpreted by third-party tools.
 +
 All entries in that array must have the form 'key=value', where
 'key' is an arbitrary non-empty string and 'value' must not contain an equal sign.
 Furthermore, the key ``pkgtype'' is reserved for the makepkg program.
 Packaging Functions
 -------------------
 In addition to the above directives, PKGBUILDs require a set of functions that
 provide instructions to build and install the package. As a minimum, the
 PKGBUILD must contain a `package()` function which installs all the package's
 files into the packaging directory, with optional `prepare()`, `build()`, and
 `check()` functions being used to create those files from source.
 This is directly sourced and executed by makepkg, so anything that Bash or the
 system has available is available for use here. Be sure any exotic commands
 used are covered by the `makedepends` array.
 If you create any variables of your own in any of these functions, it is
 recommended to use the Bash `local` keyword to scope the variable to inside the
 function.
 *package() Function*::
 	The `package()` function is used to install files into the directory that
 	will become the root directory of the built package and is run after all
 	the optional functions listed below. The packaging stage is run using
 	fakeroot to ensure correct file permissions in the resulting package.
 	All other functions will be run as the user calling makepkg.
 	This function is run inside `$srcdir`.
 *verify() Function*::
 	An optional `verify()` function can be specified to implement arbitrary
 	source authentication. The function should return a non-zero exit code when
 	verification fails. This function is run before sources are extracted.
 	This function is run inside `$startdir`.
 *prepare() Function*::
 	An optional `prepare()` function can be specified in which operations to
 	prepare the sources for building, such as patching, are performed. This
 	function is run after the source extraction and before the `build()`
 	function. The `prepare()` function is skipped when source extraction
 	is skipped.
 	This function is run inside `$srcdir`.
 *build() Function*::
 	The optional `build()` function is used to compile and/or adjust the source
 	files in preparation to be installed by the `package()` function.
 	This function is run inside `$srcdir`.
 *check() Function*::
 	An optional `check()` function can be specified in which a package's
 	test-suite may be run. This function is run between the `build()` and
 	`package()` functions. Be sure any exotic commands used are covered by the
 	`checkdepends` array.
 	This function is run inside `$srcdir`.
 All of the above variables such as `$pkgname` and `$pkgver` are available for
 use in the packaging functions. In addition, makepkg defines the following
 variables:
 *srcdir*::
 	This contains the directory where makepkg extracts, or copies, all source
 	files.
 +
 *pkgdir*::
 	This contains the directory where makepkg bundles the installed package.
 	This directory will become the root directory of your built package. This
 	variable should only be used in the `package()` function.
 *startdir*::
 	This contains the absolute path to the directory where the PKGBUILD is
 	located, which is usually the output of `$(pwd)` when makepkg is started.
 	Use of this variable is deprecated and strongly discouraged.
 Package Splitting
 -----------------
 makepkg supports building multiple packages from a single PKGBUILD. This is
 achieved by assigning an array of package names to the `pkgname` directive.
 Each split package uses a corresponding packaging function with name
 `package_foo()`, where `foo` is the name of the split package.
 All options and directives for the split packages default to the global values
 given in the PKGBUILD. Nevertheless, the following ones can be overridden within
 each split package's packaging function:
 `pkgdesc`, `arch`, `url`, `license`, `groups`, `depends`, `optdepends`,
 `provides`, `conflicts`, `replaces`, `backup`, `options`, `install`, and
 `changelog`.
 Note that makepkg does not consider split package `depends` when checking
 if dependencies are installed before package building and with `--syncdeps`.
 All packages required to make the package are required to be specified in
 the global `depends` and `makedepends` arrays.
 An optional global directive is available when building a split package:
 *pkgbase*::
 	The name used to refer to the group of packages in the output of makepkg
 	and in the naming of source-only tarballs. If not specified, the first
 	element in the `pkgname` array is used. Valid characters for this
 	variable are alphanumerics, and any of the following characters:
 	```@ . _ + -`''. Additionally, the variable is not allowed to start with
 	hyphens or dots.
 Install/Upgrade/Remove Scripting
 --------------------------------
 Pacman has the ability to store and execute a package-specific script when it
 installs, removes, or upgrades a package. This allows a package to configure
 itself after installation and perform an opposite action upon removal.
 The exact time the script is run varies with each operation, and should be
 self-explanatory. Note that during an upgrade operation, none of the install
 or remove functions will be called.
 Scripts are passed either one or two ``full version strings'', where a full
 version string is either 'pkgver-pkgrel' or 'epoch:pkgver-pkgrel', if epoch is
 non-zero.
 *pre_install*::
 	Run right before files are extracted. One argument is passed:
 	new package full version string.
 *post_install*::
 	Run right after files are extracted. One argument is passed:
 	new package full version string.
 *pre_upgrade*::
 	Run right before files are extracted. Two arguments are passed in this
 	order: new package full version string, old package full version string.
 *post_upgrade*::
 	Run after files are extracted. Two arguments are passed in this order:
 	new package full version string, old package full version string.
 *pre_remove*::
 	Run right before files are removed. One argument is passed:
 	old package full version string.
 *post_remove*::
 	Run right after files are removed. One argument is passed:
 	old package full version string.
 To use this feature, create a file such as 'pkgname.install' and put it in the
 same directory as the PKGBUILD script. Then use the install directive:
 	install=pkgname.install
 The install script does not need to be specified in the source array. A
 template install file is available in '{pkgdatadir}' as 'proto.install' for
 reference with all of the available functions defined.
 Using VCS Sources[[VCS]]
 ------------------------
 Building a developmental version of a package using sources from a version
 control system (VCS) is enabled by specifying the source in the form:
 	source=('directory::url#fragment?query')
 Currently makepkg supports the Bazaar, Git, Subversion, Fossil and Mercurial
 version control systems. For other version control systems, manual cloning of
 upstream repositories must be done in the `prepare()` function.
 Some <<VCS,VCS Sources>> like Git support pinning the checkout by a checksum of
 its content using deterministic export functionality like ``git archive''.
 The source URL is divided into four components:
 *directory*::
 	(optional) Specifies an alternate directory name for makepkg to download
 	the VCS source into.
 *url*::
 	The URL to the VCS repository. This must include the VCS in the URL protocol
 	for makepkg to recognize this as a VCS source. If the protocol does not
 	include the VCS name, it can be added by prefixing the URL with `vcs+`. For
 	example, using a Git repository over HTTPS would have a source URL in the
 	form:
 	`git+https://...`.
 *fragment*::
 	(optional) Allows specifying a revision number or branch for makepkg to checkout
 	from the VCS. A fragment has the form `type=value`, for example to checkout a
 	given revision the source line would be `source=(url#revision=123)`. The
 	available types depends on the VCS being used:
 	*bzr*;;
 		revision (see `'bzr help revisionspec'` for details)
 	*fossil*;;
 		branch, commit, tag
 	*git*;;
 		branch, commit, tag
 	*hg*;;
 		branch, revision, tag
 	*svn*;;
 		revision
 *query*::
 	(optional) Allows specifying whether a VCS checkout should be checked for
 	PGP-signed revisions. The source line should have the format
 	`source=(url#fragment?signed)` or `source=(url?signed#fragment)`. Currently
 	only supported by Git.
 Example
 -------
 The following is an example PKGBUILD for the 'patch' package. For more
 examples, look through the build files of your distribution's packages.
 [source,sh]
 -------------------------------
 include::PKGBUILD-example.txt[]
 -------------------------------
 See Also
 --------
 linkman:makepkg[8], linkman:pacman[8], linkman:makepkg.conf[5]
 include::footer.asciidoc[]
--- a/doc/alpm-hooks.5.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/alpm-hooks.5.asciidoc
@ -1,133 +0,0 @@
 alpm-hooks(5)
 =============
 NAME
 ----
 alpm-hooks - alpm hook file format
 SYNOPSIS
 --------
 --------
 [Trigger] (Required, Repeatable)
 Operation = Install|Upgrade|Remove (Required, Repeatable)
 Type = Path|Package (Required)
 Target = <Path|PkgName> (Required, Repeatable)
 [Action] (Required)
 Description = ... (Optional)
 When = PreTransaction|PostTransaction (Required)
 Exec = <Command> (Required)
 Depends = <PkgName> (Optional)
 AbortOnFail (Optional, PreTransaction only)
 NeedsTargets (Optional)
 --------
 DESCRIPTION
 -----------
 libalpm provides the ability to specify hooks to run before or after
 transactions based on the packages and/or files being modified.  Hooks consist
 of a single '[Action]' section describing the action to be run and one or more
 '[Trigger]' section describing which transactions it should be run for.
 Hooks are read from files located in the system hook directory
 +{datarootdir}/libalpm/hooks+, and additional custom directories specified in
 linkman:pacman.conf[5] (the default is +{sysconfdir}/pacman.d/hooks+).  The
 file names are required to have the suffix ".hook".  Hooks are run in
 alphabetical order of their file name, where the ordering ignores the suffix.
 TRIGGERS
 --------
 Hooks must contain at least one '[Trigger]' section that determines which
 transactions will cause the hook to run.  If multiple trigger sections are
 defined the hook will run if the transaction matches *any* of the triggers.
 *Operation =* Install|Upgrade|Remove::
 	Select the type of operation to match targets against.  May be specified
 	multiple times.  Installations are considered an upgrade if the package or
 	file is already present on the system regardless of whether the new package
 	version is actually greater than the currently installed version.  For Path
 	triggers, this is true even if the file changes ownership from one package
 	to another.  Required.
 *Type =* Path|Package::
 	Select whether targets are matched against transaction packages or files.
 	See CAVEATS for special notes regarding Path triggers. 'File' is a deprecated
 	alias for 'Path' and will be removed in a future release.  Required.
 *Target =* <path|package>::
 	The path or package name to match against the active transaction.
 	Paths refer to the files in the package archive; the installation root
 	should *not* be included in the path.  Shell-style glob patterns are
 	allowed. It is possible to invert matches by prepending a target with an
 	exclamation mark. May be specified multiple times. Required.
 ACTIONS
 -------
 *Description =* ...::
 	An optional description that describes the action being taken by the
 	hook for use in front-end output.
 *Exec =* <command>::
 	Command to run.  Command arguments are split on whitespace.  Values
 	containing whitespace should be enclosed in quotes.  Required.
 *When =* PreTransaction|PostTransaction::
 	When to run the hook.  Required.
 *Depends =* <package>::
 	Packages that must be installed for the hook to run. May be specified
 	multiple times.
 *AbortOnFail*::
 	Causes the transaction to be aborted if the hook exits non-zero.  Only
 	applies to PreTransaction hooks.
 *NeedsTargets*::
 	Causes the list of matched trigger targets to be passed to the running hook
 	on 'stdin'.
 OVERRIDING HOOKS
 ----------------
 Hooks may be overridden by placing a file with the same name in a higher
 priority hook directory.  Hooks may be disabled by overriding them with
 a symlink to '/dev/null'.
 EXAMPLES
 --------
 --------
 # Force disks to sync to reduce the risk of data corruption
 [Trigger]
 Operation = Install
 Operation = Upgrade
 Operation = Remove
 Type = Package
 Target = *
 [Action]
 Depends = coreutils
 When = PostTransaction
 Exec = /usr/bin/sync
 --------
 CAVEATS
 -------
 There are situations when path triggers may act in unexpected ways.  Hooks are
 triggered using the file list of the installed, upgraded, or removed package.
 When installing or upgrading a file that is extracted with a '.pacnew'
 extension, the original file name is used in triggering the hook.  When
 removing a package, all files owned by that package can trigger a hook whether
 or not they were actually present on the file system before package removal.
 PostTransaction hooks will *not* run if the transaction fails to complete for
 any reason.
 include::footer.asciidoc[]
--- a/doc/asciidoc-override.css
+++ b/doc/asciidoc-override.css
@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
 table th, table td {
 	padding: 0.2em 1em;
 }
 table td p.table {
 	margin: 0;
 }
--- a/doc/asciidoc.conf
+++ b/doc/asciidoc.conf
@ -1,72 +0,0 @@
 ## linkman: macro
 # Inspired by/borrowed from the Git source tree at Documentation/asciidoc.conf
 #
 # Usage: linkman:command[manpage-section]
 #
 # Note, {0} is the manpage section, while {target} is the command.
 #
 # Show man link as: <command>(<section>); if section is defined, else just show
 # the command.
 [macros]
 (?su)[\\]?(?P<name>linkman):(?P<target>\S*?)\[(?P<attrlist>.*?)\]=
 [attributes]
 asterisk=&#42;
 plus=&#43;
 caret=&#94;
 startsb=&#91;
 endsb=&#93;
 backslash=&#92;
 tilde=&#126;
 apostrophe=&#39;
 backtick=&#96;
 litdd=&#45;&#45;
 ifdef::backend-docbook[]
 [linkman-inlinemacro]
 {0%{target}}
 {0#<citerefentry>}
 {0#<refentrytitle>{target}</refentrytitle><manvolnum>{0}</manvolnum>}
 {0#</citerefentry>}
 endif::backend-docbook[]
 ifdef::backend-docbook[]
 ifndef::docbook-xsl-172[]
 # "unbreak" docbook-xsl v1.68 for manpages. v1.69 works with or without this.
 # v1.72 breaks with this because it replaces dots not in roff requests.
 [listingblock]
 <example><title>{title}</title>
 <literallayout>
 |
 </literallayout>
 {title#}</example>
 endif::docbook-xsl-172[]
 endif::backend-docbook[]
 ifdef::doctype-manpage[]
 ifdef::backend-docbook[]
 [header]
 template::[header-declarations]
 <refentry>
 <refentryinfo>
 <date>{localdate}</date>
 </refentryinfo>
 <refmeta>
 <refentrytitle>{mantitle}</refentrytitle>
 <manvolnum>{manvolnum}</manvolnum>
 <refmiscinfo class="source">Pacman</refmiscinfo>
 <refmiscinfo class="version">{pacman_version}</refmiscinfo>
 <refmiscinfo class="manual">Pacman Manual</refmiscinfo>
 </refmeta>
 <refnamediv>
  <refname>{manname}</refname>
  <refpurpose>{manpurpose}</refpurpose>
 </refnamediv>
 endif::backend-docbook[]
 endif::doctype-manpage[]
 ifdef::backend-xhtml11[]
 [linkman-inlinemacro]
 <a href="{target}.{0}.html">{target}{0?({0})}</a>
 endif::backend-xhtml11[]
--- a/doc/footer.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/footer.asciidoc
@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
 See the pacman website at https://archlinux.org/pacman/[] for current
 information on pacman and its related tools.
 Bugs
 ----
 Bugs? You must be kidding; there are no bugs in this software. But if we
 happen to be wrong, please report them to the issue tracker at
 link:https://gitlab.archlinux.org/pacman/pacman/-/issues[] with specific
 information such as your command-line, the nature of the bug, and even
 the package database if it helps.
 Authors
 -------
 Current maintainers:
 * Allan McRae <allan@archlinux.org>
 * Andrew Gregory <andrew.gregory.8@gmail.com>
 * Morgan Adamiec <morganamilo@archlinux.org>
 Past major contributors:
 * Judd Vinet <jvinet@zeroflux.org>
 * Aurelien Foret <aurelien@archlinux.org>
 * Aaron Griffin <aaron@archlinux.org>
 * Dan McGee <dan@archlinux.org>
 * Xavier Chantry <shiningxc@gmail.com>
 * Nagy Gabor <ngaba@bibl.u-szeged.hu>
 * Dave Reisner <dreisner@archlinux.org>
 * Eli Schwartz <eschwartz@archlinux.org>
 For additional contributors, use `git shortlog -s` on the pacman.git
 repository.
--- a/doc/index.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/index.asciidoc
@ -1,258 +0,0 @@
 Pacman Home Page
 ================
 A simple library-based package manager.
 Introduction
 ------------
 pacman is a utility which manages software packages in Linux. It uses simple
 compressed files as a package format, and maintains a text-based package
 database (more of a hierarchy), just in case some hand tweaking is necessary.
 pacman does not strive to "do everything." It will add, remove and upgrade
 packages in the system, and it will allow you to query the package database for
 installed packages, files and owners. It also attempts to handle dependencies
 automatically and can download packages from a remote server.
 History
 ~~~~~~~
 Version 2.0 of pacman introduced the ability to sync packages (the '\--sync'
 option) with a master server through the use of package databases. Prior to
 this, packages would have to be installed manually using the '\--add' and
 '\--upgrade' operations.
 Version 3.0 was the switch to a two-part pacman -- a back-end named libalpm
 (library for Arch Linux Package Management) and the familiar pacman front-end.
 Speed in many cases was improved, along with dependency and conflict resolution
 being able to handle a much wider variety of cases. The switch to a
 library-based program should also make it easier in the future to develop
 alternative front ends.
 Version 4.0 added package signing and verification capabilities to the entire
 makepkg/repo-add/pacman toolchain via GnuPG and GPGME.
 Version 5.0 added support for pre/post-transaction hooks and sync database file
 list operations.
 Version 6.0 added support for parallel downloads.
 Documentation
 -------------
 Man Pages
 ~~~~~~~~~
 There are several man pages available for the programs, utilities, and
 configuration files dealing with pacman.
 * linkman:alpm-hooks[5]
 * linkman:BUILDINFO[5]
 * linkman:PKGBUILD[5]
 * linkman:libalpm[3]
 * linkman:makepkg[8]
 * linkman:makepkg-template[1]
 * linkman:makepkg.conf[5]
 * linkman:pacman[8]
 * linkman:pacman-key[8]
 * linkman:pacman-conf[8]
 * linkman:pacman.conf[5]
 * linkman:repo-add[8]
 * linkman:vercmp[8]
 Changelog
 ~~~~~~~~~
 For a good idea of what is going on in pacman development, take a look at the
 link:https://gitlab.archlinux.org/pacman/pacman[Git summary page] for the
 project.
 See the most recent
 link:https://gitlab.archlinux.org/pacman/pacman/-/blob/master/NEWS[NEWS]
 file for a not-as-frequently-updated list of changes. However, this should
 contain the biggest changes in a format more concise than the commit log.
 Releases
 --------
 [frame="none",grid="none",options="autowidth",cols="3*a"]
 |======
 |
 [frame="topbot",grid="none",options="header,autowidth"]
 !======
 !Version !Date
 !7.0.0  !2024-07-14
 !6.1.0  !2024-03-04
 !6.0.1  !2021-09-04
 !6.0.0  !2021-05-20
 !6.0.0alpha1 !2020-12-04
 !5.2.1  !2019-11-01
 !5.2.0  !2019-10-21
 !5.1.3  !2019-03-01
 !5.1.2  !2018-12-25
 !5.1.1  !2018-07-27
 !5.1.0  !2018-05-28
 !5.0.2  !2017-06-03
 !5.0.1  !2016-02-23
 !5.0.0  !2016-01-30
 !4.2.1  !2015-02-20
 !4.2.0  !2014-12-19
 !4.1.2  !2013-06-18
 !4.1.1  !2013-05-07
 !4.1.0  !2013-04-01
 !4.1.0rc1 !2013-03-09
 !4.0.3 !2012-04-07
 !4.0.2 !2012-02-11
 !4.0.1 !2011-11-20
 !4.0.0 !2011-10-13
 !4.0.0rc2 !2011-09-22
 !4.0.0rc1 !2011-08-11
 !3.5.4 !2011-08-10
 !3.5.3 !2011-06-07
 !3.5.2 !2011-04-18
 !3.5.1 !2011-03-23
 !3.5.0 !2011-03-16
 !3.4.3 !2011-01-22
 !3.4.2 !2010-12-29
 !3.4.1 !2010-09-03
 !======
 |
 [frame="topbot",grid="none",options="header,autowidth"]
 !======
 !Version !Date
 !3.4.0 !2010-06-16
 !3.3.3 !2009-11-10
 !3.3.2 !2009-10-05
 !3.3.1 !2009-09-22
 !3.3.0 !2009-08-02
 !3.2.2 !2009-01-05
 !3.2.1 !2008-08-26
 !3.2.0 !2008-07-30
 !3.1.4 !2008-04-01
 !3.1.3 !2008-03-06
 !3.1.2 !2008-02-20
 !3.1.1 !2008-01-20
 !3.1.0 !2008-01-09
 !3.0.6 !2007-09-16
 !3.0.5 !2007-06-17
 !3.0.4 !2007-05-08
 !3.0.3 !2007-04-28
 !3.0.2 !2007-04-23
 !3.0.1 !2007-04-04
 !3.0.0 !2007-03-25
 !2.9.8 !2006-02-02
 !2.9.7 !2005-09-16
 !2.9.7-TEST3 !2005-09-11
 !2.9.7-TEST2 !2005-09-07
 !2.9.7-TEST !2005-08-19
 !2.9.6 !2005-06-10
 !2.9.5 !2005-01-11
 !2.9.4 !2004-12-20
 !2.9.3 !2004-12-19
 !2.9.2 !2004-09-25
 !2.9.1 !2004-09-25
 !2.9 !2004-09-18
 !2.8.4 !2004-08-23
 !2.8.3 !2004-08-04
 !======
 |
 [frame="topbot",grid="none",options="header,autowidth"]
 !======
 !Version !Date
 !2.8.2 !2004-07-22
 !2.8.1 !2004-07-17
 !2.8 !2004-07-03
 !2.7.9 !2004-04-30
 !2.7.8 !2004-04-29
 !2.7.7 !2004-04-15
 !2.7.6 !2004-04-04
 !2.7.5 !2004-03-02
 !2.7.4 !2004-02-18
 !2.7.3 !2004-02-07
 !2.7.2 !2004-01-04
 !2.7.1 !2003-12-21
 !2.7 !2003-11-25
 !2.6.4 !2003-10-17
 !2.6.3 !2003-10-01
 !2.6.2 !2003-09-29
 !2.6.1 !2003-09-15
 !2.6 !2003-09-03
 !2.5.1 !2003-07-12
 !2.5 !2003-05-30
 !2.4.1 !2003-04-19
 !2.4 !2003-04-11
 !2.3.2 !2003-03-17
 !2.3.1 !2003-03-14
 !2.3 !2003-02-27
 !2.2 !2002-12-11
 !2.1 !2002-09-16
 !2.0 !2002-08-09
 !1.23 !2002-04-30
 !1.22 !2002-04-12
 !1.21 !2002-04-03
 !1.2 !2002-03-18
 !1.1 !2002-03-10
 !1.0 !2002-02-25
 !======
 |======
 Source code for releases since moving to gitlab is available at
 link:https://gitlab.archlinux.org/pacman/pacman/-/releases[].
 Source code for historical releases is available at
 link:https://sources.archlinux.org/other/pacman/[]. To install, download the newest
 available source tarball, unpack it in a directory, and run the three magic
 commands:
 	$ meson build
 	$ ninja -C build
 	# ninja -C build install
 You may wish to read the options presented by `meson` in order to
 set appropriate paths and build options that are correct for your system.
 Development
 -----------
 Mailing List
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~
 There is a mailing list devoted to pacman development, hosted by Arch Linux.
 link:https://lists.archlinux.org/listinfo/pacman-dev/[Subscribe] or
 link:https://lists.archlinux.org/pipermail/pacman-dev/[view the archives].
 Source Code
 ~~~~~~~~~~~
 Development of pacman is currently done in Git. The central repository is
 hosted by Arch Linux, although some of the developers have their own trees (ask
 on the above mailing lists if you are interested in finding the locations of
 these trees).
 The current development tree can be fetched with the following command:
 	git clone https://gitlab.archlinux.org/pacman/pacman.git
 which will fetch the full development history into a directory named pacman.
 You can browse the source as well using
 link:https://gitlab.archlinux.org/pacman/pacman/[gitlab].
 If you are interested in hacking on pacman, it is highly recommended you join
 the mailing list mentioned above, as well as take a quick glance at our
 link:HACKING.html[HACKING] document.
 link:submitting-patches.html[submitting-patches] is also a recommended read.
 Not as familiar with code as you'd like to be, but still want to help out? If
 you speak a foreign language, you can help by either creating or updating a
 translation file for your native language. Instructions can be found in
 link:translation-help.html[translation-help].
 Bugs
 ----
 If you find bugs (which is quite likely), please report them to the issue
 tracker at link:https://gitlab.archlinux.org/pacman/pacman/-/issues[] with
 specific information such as your command-line, the nature of the bug, and even
 the package database if it helps.
 Copyright
 ---------
 pacman is Copyright (C) 2006-2025 Pacman Development Team
 <pacman-dev@lists.archlinux.org> and Copyright (C) 2002-2006 Judd Vinet
 <jvinet@zeroflux.org> and is licensed through the GNU General Public License,
 version 2 or later.
--- a/doc/libalpm.3
+++ b/doc/libalpm.3
@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
 ." the string declarations are a start to try and make distro independent
 .ds DS Arch Linux
 .ds PB PKGBUILD
 .ds VR 3.0.0
 .ds LV 1.0.0
 .TH libalpm 3 "Feb 08, 2007" "libalpm version \*(LV" "\*(DS Utilities"
 .SH NAME
 	libalpm \- Arch Linux Package Management (ALPM) library
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 For ease of access, the libalpm manual has been split up into several sections.
 (TODO) Yes, this man page needs a lot of work. Once we get around to doing good
 Doxygen documentation, it will improve. We promise.
 .nf
 alpm_databases      Database Functions
 alpm_interface      Interface Functions
 alpm_list           List Functions
 alpm_log            Logging Functions
 alpm_misc           Miscellaneous Functions
 alpm_packages       Package Functions
 alpm_sync           Sync Functions
 alpm_trans          Transaction Functions
 .fi
 .SH CONFIGURATION
 See
 .BR pacman.conf (5)
 for more details on configuring \fBlibalpm\fP using the \fBpacman.conf\fP file.
 .SH BUGS
 Bugs? You must be kidding, there are no bugs in this software. But if we happen
 to be wrong, send us an email with as much detail as possible to
 <pacman-dev@archlinux.org>.
 .SH SEE ALSO
 .BR pacman (8),
 .BR makepkg (8),
 .BR pacman.conf (5)
 See the Arch Linux website at <http://www.archlinux.org> for more current
 information on the distribution and the \fBpacman\fP family of tools.
 .SH AUTHORS
 .nf
 Judd Vinet <jvinet@zeroflux.org>
 Aurelien Foret <aurelien@archlinux.org>
 Aaron Griffin <aaron@archlinux.org>
 Dan McGee <dan@archlinux.org>
 .fi
 See the 'AUTHORS' file for additional contributors.
--- a/doc/makepkg-template.1.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/makepkg-template.1.asciidoc
@ -1,118 +0,0 @@
 makepkg-template(1)
 ===================
 Name
 ----
 makepkg-template - package build templating utility
 Synopsis
 --------
 'makepkg-template' [options]
 Description
 -----------
 'makepkg-template' is a script to ease the work of maintaining multiple similar
 PKGBUILDs.  It allows you to move most of the code from the PKGBUILD into a
 template file and uses markers to allow in-place updating of existing PKGBUILDs
 if the template has been changed.
 Template files can contain any code allowed in a PKGBUILD. You can think of
 them like external files included with "." or "source", but they will be
 inlined into the PKGBUILD by 'makepkg-template' so you do not depend on the
 template file when building the package.
 Markers are bash comments in the form of:
 	# template start; key=value; key2=value2; ...
 and
 	# template end;
 Currently used keys are: name (mandatory) and version. Template names are limited to
 alphanumerics, "@", "+", ".", "-", and "_". Versions are limited to numbers and ".".
 For initial creation there is a one line short cut which does not need an end marker:
 	# template input; key=value;
 Using this short-cut will result in 'makepkg-template' replacing it with start
 and end markers and the template code on the first run.
 Template files should be stored in one directory and filenames should be
 "$template_name-$version.template" with a symlink "$template_name.template"
 pointing to the most recent template. If the version is not set in the marker,
 'makepkg-template' will automatically use the target of "$template_name.template",
 otherwise the specified version will be used.  This allows for easier
 verification of untrusted PKGBUILDs if the template is trusted. You verify the
 non-template code and then use a command similar to this:
 	diff -u <(makepkg-template -o -) PKGBUILD
 Template files may also contain markers leading to nested templates in the
 resulting PKGBUILD. If you use markers in a template, please set the version
 you used/tested with in the start/input marker so other people can properly
 recreate from templates.
 Options
 -------
 *-p, \--input* <build script>::
 	Read the package script `build script` instead of the default.
 *-o, \--output* <build script>::
 	Write the updated file to `build script` instead of overwriting the input file.
 *-n, \--newest*::
 	Always use the newest available template file.
 *\--template-dir* <dir>::
 	Change the dir where we are looking for template files. This option may be
 	given multiple times in which case files found in directory given last will
 	take precedence.
 Example PKGBUILD
 ----------------
 	pkgname=perl-config-simple
 	pkgver=4.58
 	pkgrel=1
 	pkgdesc="simple configuration file class"
 	arch=('any')
 	license=('PerlArtistic' 'GPL')
 	depends=('perl')
 	source=("http://search.cpan.org/CPAN/authors/id/S/SH/SHERZODR/Config-Simple-${pkgver}.tar.gz")
 	sha256sums=('dd9995706f0f9384a15ccffe116c3b6e22f42ba2e58d8f24ed03c4a0e386edb4')
 	_distname="Config-Simple"
 	# template start; name=perl-module; version=1.0;
 	_distdir="${_distname}-${pkgver}"
 	url="https://metacpan.org/release/${_distname}"
 	options+=('!emptydirs')
 	build() {
 		cd "$srcdir/$_distdir"
 		perl Makefile.PL INSTALLDIRS=vendor
 		make
 	}
 	check() {
 		cd "$srcdir/$_distdir"
 		make test
 	}
 	package() {
 		cd "$srcdir/$_distdir"
 		make DESTDIR="$pkgdir" install
 	}
 	# template end;
 See Also
 --------
 linkman:makepkg[8], linkman:PKGBUILD[5]
 include::footer.asciidoc[]
--- a/doc/makepkg.8
+++ b/doc/makepkg.8
@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
 ." the string declarations are a start to try and make distro independent
 .ds DS Arch Linux
 .ds PB PKGBUILD
 .ds VR 3.0.0
 .TH makepkg 8 "Feb 07, 2007" "makepkg version \*(VR" "\*(DS Utilities"
 .SH NAME
 makepkg \- package build utility
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .B makepkg
 [\fIoptions\fR]
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 \fBmakepkg\fP is a script to automate the building of packages. All it needs is
 a build-capable Linux platform and a custom build script for each package you
 wish to build (known as a \fB\*(PB\fP). See
 .BR \*(PB (5)
 for details on creating your own build scripts.
 The advantage to a script-based build is that the work is only done once. Once
 you have the build script for a package, makepkg will do the rest: download and
 validate source files, check dependencies, configure the build-time settings,
 build the package, install the package into a temporary root, make
 customizations, generate meta-info, and package the whole thing up for
 \fBpacman\fP to use.
 \fBmakeworld\fP can be used to rebuild an entire package group or the entire
 build tree. See \fBmakeworld --help\fP for syntax.
 .SH OPTIONS
 .TP
 .B \-b, --builddeps
 Build missing dependencies from source. When \fBmakepkg\fP finds missing
 build-time or run-time dependencies, it will look for the dependencies'
 \fB\*(PB\fP files under \fIABSROOT\fP (set in \fBmakepkg.conf\fP). If it finds
 them it will call \fBmakepkg\fP to build and install the missing dependencies.
 The child calls will be made with the \fB-b\fP and \fB-i\fP options.
 .TP
 .B \-c, --clean
 Clean up leftover work files and directories after a successful build.
 .TP
 .B \-C, --cleancache
 Removes all cached source files from the directory specified in \fISRCDEST\fP
 in \fBmakepkg.conf\fP.
 .TP
 .B \-d, --nodeps
 Do not perform any dependency checks. This will let you override and ignore any
 dependencies required. There is a good chance this option will break the build
 process if all of the dependencies are not installed.
 .TP
 .B \-e, --noextract
 Do not extract source files; use whatever source already exists in the src/
 directory. This is handy if you want to go into src and manually patch or tweak
 code, then make a package out of the result. Keep in mind that creating a patch
 may be a better solution to allow others to use your \fB\*(PB\fP.
 .TP
 .B \-f, --force
 \fBmakepkg\fP will not build a package if a built package already exists in the
 \fIPKGDEST\fP (set in \fBmakepkg.conf\fP) directory, which may default to the
 current directory. This allows the built package to be overwritten.
 .TP
 .B \-g, --geninteg
 For each source file in the source array of \fB\*(PB\fP, download the file if
 required and generate integrity checks. The integrity checks generated are
 determined by the value of the \fIINTEGRITY_CHECK\fP array in makepkg.conf.
 This output can be redirected into your \fB\*(PB\fP for source validation
 (makepkg -g >> \*(PB).
 .TP
 .B \-h, --help
 Output syntax and command line options.
 .TP
 .B \-i, --install
 Install or upgrade the package after a successful build using \fBpacman\fP.
 .TP
 .B \-m, --nocolor
 Disable color in output messages.
 .TP
 .B \-o, --nobuild
 Download and extract files only, but do not build them. Useful with the
 \fB--noextract\fP option if you wish to tweak the files in src/ before
 building.
 .TP
 .B \-p \fIbuildscript\fP
 Read the package script \fIbuildscript\fP instead of the default, \fI\*(PB\fP.
 .TP
 .B \-r, --rmdeps
 Upon successful build, remove any dependencies installed by \fBmakepkg\fP
 during dependency auto-resolution (using \fB-b\fP or \fB-s\fP).
 .TP
 .B \-R, --repackage
 Repackage contents of pkg/ without rebuilding the package. This is useful if
 you forgot a depend or install file in your \fB\*(PB\fP and the build itself
 will not change.
 .TP
 .B \-s, --syncdeps
 Install missing dependencies using \fBpacman\fP. When missing build-time or
 run-time dependencies are found, \fBpacman\fP will try to resolve them. If
 successful, the missing packages will be downloaded and installed.
 .TP
 .B \-S, --usesudo
 Use \fBsudo\fP to perform all operations that require \fBpacman\fP. This is
 useful for \fB--install\fP, \fB--rmdeps\fP, and \fB--syncdeps\fP. If you are
 building packages as a non-root user as recommended, this option should be used
 if using any option that calls \fBpacman\fP.
 .TP
 .B \--noconfirm
 (Passed to \fBpacman\fP) Prevent \fBpacman\fP from waiting for user input
 before proceeding with operations.
 .TP
 .B \--noprogressbar
 (Passed to \fBpacman\fP) Prevent \fBpacman\fP from displaying a progress bar;
 useful if you are redirecting makepkg output to file.
 .SH CONFIGURATION
 See
 .BR makepkg.conf (5)
 for more details on configuring \fBmakepkg\fP using the \fBmakepkg.conf\fP file.
 .SH BUGS
 Bugs? You must be kidding, there are no bugs in this software. But if we happen
 to be wrong, send us an email with as much detail as possible to
 <pacman-dev@archlinux.org>.
 .SH SEE ALSO
 .BR makepkg.conf (5),
 .BR \*(PB (5),
 .BR pacman (8)
 See the Arch Linux website at <http://www.archlinux.org> for more current
 information on the distribution and the \fBpacman\fP family of tools, and
 <http://wiki.archlinux.org/index.php/Arch_Packaging_Standards> for
 recommendations on packaging standards.
 .SH AUTHORS
 .nf
 Judd Vinet <jvinet@zeroflux.org>
 Aurelien Foret <aurelien@archlinux.org>
 Aaron Griffin <aaron@archlinux.org>
 Dan McGee <dan@archlinux.org>
 .fi
 See the 'AUTHORS' file for additional contributors.
--- a/doc/makepkg.8.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/makepkg.8.asciidoc
@ -1,382 +0,0 @@
 makepkg(8)
 ==========
 Name
 ----
 makepkg - package build utility
 Synopsis
 --------
 'makepkg' [options] [ENVVAR=value] [ENVVAR+=value] ...
 Description
 -----------
 'makepkg' is a script to automate the building of packages. The requirements for
 using the script are a build-capable *nix platform and a custom build script
 for each package you wish to build (known as a PKGBUILD). See
 linkman:PKGBUILD[5] for details on creating your own build scripts.
 The advantage to a script-based build is that the work is only done once. Once
 you have the build script for a package, 'makepkg' will do the rest: download and
 validate source files, check dependencies, configure the build-time settings,
 build the package, install the package into a temporary root, make
 customizations, generate meta-info, and package the whole thing up for pacman
 to use.
 NOTE: 'makepkg' uses your current locale by default and does not unset it when
 building packages. If you wish to share your build output with others when
 seeking help or for other purposes, you may wish to run "`LC_ALL=C makepkg`" so
 your logs and output are not localized.
 Options
 -------
 *-A, \--ignorearch*::
 	Ignore a missing or incomplete arch field in the build script. This is
 	for rebuilding packages from source when the PKGBUILD may be slightly
 	outdated and not updated with an `arch=('yourarch')` field.
 *-c, \--clean*::
 	Clean up leftover work files and directories after a successful build.
 *\--config* <file>::
 	Use an alternate configuration file instead of the +{sysconfdir}/makepkg.conf+
 	default.
 *-d, \--nodeps*::
 	Do not perform any dependency checks. This will let you override and
 	ignore any dependencies required. There is a good chance this option
 	will break the build process if all of the dependencies are not
 	installed.
 *-e, \--noextract*::
 	Do not extract source files or run the prepare() function (if present);
 	use whatever source already exists in the $srcdir/ directory. This is
 	handy if you want to go into $srcdir/ and manually patch or tweak code,
 	then make a package out of the result. Keep in mind that creating a
 	patch may be a better solution to allow others to use your PKGBUILD.
 *\--verifysource*::
 	For each source file in the source array of PKGBUILD, download the file
 	if required and perform the integrity checks. No extraction or build is
 	performed. Dependencies specified in the PKGBUILD will not be handled
 	unless `--syncdeps` is used. Useful for performing subsequent offline
 	builds.
 *-f, \--force*::
 	makepkg will not build a package if a built package already exists in
 	the `PKGDEST` (set in linkman:makepkg.conf[5]) directory, which may
 	default to the current directory. This allows the built package to be
 	overwritten.
 *-g, \--geninteg*::
 	For each source file in the source array of PKGBUILD, download the file
 	if required and generate integrity checks. The integrity checks generated
 	are determined by the checks present in the PKGBUILD, falling back to the
 	value of the INTEGRITY_CHECK array in makepkg.conf(5) if these are absent.
 	This output can be redirected into your PKGBUILD for source validation
 	using "`makepkg -g >> PKGBUILD`".
 *--skipinteg*::
 	Do not perform any integrity checks (checksum and PGP) on source files.
 *\--skipchecksums*::
 	Do not verify checksums of source files.
 *\--skippgpcheck*::
 	Do not verify PGP signatures of source files.
 *-h, \--help*::
 	Output syntax and command line options.
 *--holdver*::
 	When using VCS sources (linkman:PKGBUILD[5]) any currently checked out source
 	will not be updated to the latest revision.
 *-i, \--install*::
 	Install or upgrade the package after a successful build using
 	linkman:pacman[8].
 *-L, \--log*::
 	Enable logging. This will use the *tee* program to send the output of each
 	of the PKGBUILD functions to both the console and to a text file in the
 	build directory named `pkgbase-pkgver-pkgrel-arch-<function>.log`.
 	As mentioned above, the logs will be localized so you may want to set your
 	locale accordingly if sharing the log output with others.
 *-m, \--nocolor*::
 	Disable color in output messages.
 *-o, \--nobuild*::
 	Download and extract files, run the prepare() function, but do not build
 	them. Useful with the '\--noextract' option if you wish to tweak the files
 	in $srcdir/ before building.
 *-p* <buildscript>::
 	Read the package script `buildscript` instead of the `PKGBUILD` default;
 	see linkman:PKGBUILD[5]. The `buildscript` must be located in the directory
 	makepkg is called from.
 *-r, \--rmdeps*::
 	Upon successful build, remove any dependencies installed by makepkg
 	during dependency auto-resolution and installation when using `-s`.
 *-R, \--repackage*::
 	Repackage contents of the package without rebuilding the package. This
 	is useful if you forgot, for example, a dependency or install file in your
 	PKGBUILD and the build itself will not change.
 *-s, \--syncdeps*::
 	Install missing dependencies using pacman. When build-time or run-time
 	dependencies are not found, pacman will try to resolve them. If
 	successful, the missing packages will be downloaded and installed.
 *-S, \--source*::
 	Do not actually build the package, but build a source-only tarball that
 	does not include sources that can be fetched via a download URL. This is
 	useful for passing a single tarball to another program such as a chroot,
 	remote builder, or a tarball upload. Because integrity checks are verified,
 	all source files of the package need to be present or downloadable.
 *-V, \--version*::
 	Display version information.
 *-C, \--cleanbuild*::
 	Clean build artifacts from previous runs of makepkg in the current
 	directory by removing $srcdir before building the package.
 *-D* <dir>, *\--dir* <dir> ::
 	Change to directory <dir> before reading the PKGBUILD or doing anything else.
 *\--allsource*::
 	Do not actually build the package, but build a source-only tarball that
 	includes all sources, including those that are normally downloaded via
 	makepkg. This is useful for passing a single tarball to another program
 	such as a chroot or remote builder. It will also satisfy requirements of
 	the GPL when distributing binary packages.
 *\--check*::
 	Run the check() function in the PKGBUILD, overriding the setting in
 	linkman:makepkg.conf[5].
 *\--noarchive*::
 	Do not create the archive at the end of the build process. This can be
 	useful to test the package() function or if your target distribution does
 	not use pacman.
 *\--nocheck*::
 	Do not run the check() function in the PKGBUILD or handle the checkdepends.
 *\--noprepare*::
 	Do not run the prepare() function in the PKGBUILD.
 *\--noverify*::
 	Do not run the verify() function in the PKGBUILD.
 *\--sign*::
 	Sign the resulting package with gpg, overriding the setting in
 	linkman:makepkg.conf[5].
 *\--nosign*::
 	Do not create a signature for the built package.
 *\--key* <key>::
 	Specify a key to use when signing packages, overriding the GPGKEY setting
 	in linkman:makepkg.conf[5]. If not specified in either location, the
 	default key from the keyring will be used.
 *\--noconfirm*::
 	(Passed to pacman) Prevent pacman from waiting for user input before
 	proceeding with operations.
 *\--needed*::
 	(Passed to pacman) Tell pacman not to reinstall a target if it is already
 	up-to-date. (used with '-i' / '\--install').
 *\--asdeps*::
 	(Passed to pacman) Install packages as non-explicitly installed (used
 	with '-i' / '\--install').
 *\--noprogressbar*::
 	(Passed to pacman) Prevent pacman from displaying a progress bar;
 	useful if you are redirecting makepkg output to file.
 *\--packagelist*::
 	List the package filenames that would be produced without building. Listed
 	package filenames include PKGDEST and PKGEXT.
 *\--printsrcinfo*::
 	Generate and print the SRCINFO file to stdout.
 Additional Features
 -------------------
 makepkg supports building development versions of packages without having to
 manually update the pkgver in the PKGBUILD. This was formerly done using the
 separate utility 'versionpkg'. See linkman:PKGBUILD[5] for details on how to
 set up a development PKGBUILD.
 Reproducibility
 ---------------
 makepkg is designed to be compatible with
 link:https://reproducible-builds.org/docs/[Reproducible Builds]. If the
 **SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH** environment variable is set, it will be exported to
 subprocesses, and source and package file modification times and package
 metadata will be unified based on the timestamp specified.
 If the **SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH** environment variable is not set, makepkg will use
 its own start date for internal use, but will not unify source file timestamps
 before building.
 Environment Variables
 ---------------------
 **MAKEPKG_LIBRARY**="/path/to/directory"::
 	Use an alternative libmakepkg path instead of the {libmakepkgdir} default.
 **PACMAN**::
 	The command that will be used to check for missing dependencies and to
 	install and remove packages. Pacman's '-Qq', '-Rns', '-S', '-T', and '-U'
 	operations must be supported by this command. If the variable is not
 	set or empty, makepkg will fall back to `pacman'.
 **MAKEPKG_CONF=**"/path/to/file"::
 	Use an alternate config file instead of the +{sysconfdir}/makepkg.conf+
 	default.
 **MAKEPKG_GIT_CONFIG=**"/path/to/file"::
 	Use an alternate config file for Git instead of the
 	+{sysconfdir}/makepkg.d/gitconfig+ default. makepkg always prevents Git
 	from loading any other config files.
 **PKGDEST=**"/path/to/directory"::
 	Directory where the resulting packages will be stored. Overrides the
 	corresponding value defined in linkman:makepkg.conf[5].
 **SRCDEST=**"/path/to/directory"::
 	Directory where the downloaded sources will be stored. Overrides the
 	corresponding value defined in linkman:makepkg.conf[5].
 **SRCPKGDEST=**"/path/to/directory"::
 	Directory where source package files will be stored. Overrides the
 	corresponding value defined in linkman:makepkg.conf[5].
 **LOGDEST=**"/path/to/directory"::
 	Directory where generated log files will be stored. Overrides the
 	corresponding value defined in linkman:makepkg.conf[5].
 **PACKAGER=**"John Doe <john@doe.com>"::
 	String to identify the creator of the resulting package. Overrides
 	the corresponding value defined in linkman:makepkg.conf[5].
 **BUILDDIR=**"/path/to/directory"::
 	Directory where the package will be built. Overrides the corresponding
 	value defined in linkman:makepkg.conf[5].
 **CARCH=**"(i686|x86_64)"::
 	Force build for a specific architecture. Useful for cross-compiling.
 	Overrides the corresponding value defined in linkman:makepkg.conf[5].
 **PKGEXT=**".pkg.tar.gz", **SRCEXT=**".src.tar.gz"::
 	Sets the compression used when making compiled or source packages.
 	Overrides the corresponding value defined in linkman:makepkg.conf[5].
 **GNUPGHOME=**"/path/to/directory"::
 	Directory where the gpg keyring for signing the built package is stored.
 **GPGKEY=**"keyid"::
 	Specify a key to use when signing packages, overriding the GPGKEY setting
 	in linkman:makepkg.conf[5].
 **SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH=**"<date>"::
 	Used for link:https://reproducible-builds.org/docs/[Reproducible Builds].
 **BUILDTOOL=**"<name>"::
 	The name of a tool ecosystem used to set up the build environment. Used for
 	defining a spec for reproducible builds, e.g. the linkman:makepkg.conf[5]
 	used.
 **BUILDTOOLVER=**"<version>"::
 	The version of the '$BUILDTOOL' used.
 **MAKEPKG_LINT_PKGBUILD=**0::
 	Setting to 0 disables PKGBUILD linting within makepkg. Useful on systems
 	with slow bash subshell operations, or on PKGBUILDs with extreme amounts of
 	package splitting.
 Configuration
 -------------
 See linkman:makepkg.conf[5] for more details on configuring makepkg using the
 'makepkg.conf' file.
 Errors
 ------
 On exit, makepkg will return one of the following error codes.
 0::
 	Normal exit condition.
 1::
 	Unknown cause of failure.
 2::
 	Error in configuration file.
 3::
 	User specified an invalid option.
 4::
 	Error in user-supplied function in PKGBUILD.
 5::
 	Failed to create a viable package.
 6::
 	A source or auxiliary file specified in the PKGBUILD is
 	missing.
 7::
 	The PKGDIR is missing.
 8::
 	Failed to install dependencies.
 9::
 	Failed to remove dependencies.
 10::
 	User attempted to run makepkg as root.
 11::
 	User lacks permissions to build or install to a given
 	location.
 12::
 	Error parsing PKGBUILD.
 13::
 	A package has already been built.
 14::
 	The package failed to install.
 15::
 	Programs necessary to run makepkg are missing.
 16::
 	Specified GPG key does not exist or failed to sign package.
 17::
 	The local repository is not a clone of the source repository
 	specified in PKGBUILD.
 See Also
 --------
 linkman:makepkg.conf[5], linkman:PKGBUILD[5], linkman:pacman[8]
 include::footer.asciidoc[]
--- a/doc/makepkg.conf.5
+++ b/doc/makepkg.conf.5
@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
 ." the string declarations are a start to try and make distro independent
 .ds DS Arch Linux
 .ds PB PKGBUILD
 .ds VR 3.0.0
 .TH \*(PB 5 "Feb 08, 2007" "makepkg.conf version \*(VR" "\*(DS Files"
 .SH NAME
 makepkg.conf \- makepkg configuration file
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 Configuration options for \fBmakekpg\fP are stored in \fBmakepkg.conf\fP. This
 file is sourced, so you can include any special compiler flags you wish to use.
 This is helpful for building for different architectures, or with different
 optimizations.
 \fBNOTE:\fP This does not guarantee that all package Makefiles will use your
 exported variables.  Some of them are non-standard...
 The default file is fairly well commented, so it may be easiest to simply
 follow directions given there for customization.
 .SH OPTIONS
 .TP
 .B FTPAGENT="\fI/path/to/command\fP [\fIoptions\fP]"
 Sets the download agent used to fetch source files specified with a URL in the
 \fB\*(PB\fP file. Flags can be specified as well; the download URL is then
 placed on the end of the command.
 .TP
 .B CARCH="\fIcarch\fP"
 Specifies your computer architecture; possible values include such things as
 "i686", "x86_64", "ppc", etc. This should be automatically set on installation.
 .TP
 .B CHOST="\fIchost\fP"
 A string such as "i686-pc-linux-gnu", do not touch unless you know what you are
 doing.
 .TP
 .B CFLAGS="\fIcflags\fP"
 Flags used for the C compiler. This is a key part to the use of makepkg.
 Usually several options are specified, and the most common string resembles
 something like this: "-march=i686 -O2 -pipe". Another useful option may be
 -mcpu in place of -march. Read
 .BR gcc (1)
 for more details on the wide variety of compiler flags available.
 .TP
 .B CXXFLAGS="\fIcxxflags\fP"
 Flags used for the C++ compiler; see \fBCFLAGS\fP for more info.
 .TP
 .B MAKEFLAGS="\fImakeflags\fP"
 This is often used to set the number of jobs used, for example, "-j2". Other
 flags that make accepts can also be passed.
 .TP
 .B BUILDENV=(fakeroot !distcc color !ccache)
 This array contains four options that affect the build environment, the
 defaults are shown here. All options should always be left in the array; to
 enable or disable an option simply remove or place an "!" at the front of the
 option. Each works as follows:
 .RS
 .TP
 .B fakeroot
 Allow building packages as a non-root user. This is \fIhighly\fP recommended.
 .TP
 .B distcc
 Use the distributed C/C++/ObjC compiler to spread compilation among multiple
 machines. If this is enabled, \fBDISTCC_HOSTS\fP must be specified as well.
 .TP
 .B color
 Colorize output messages, making output easier to read.
 .TP
 .B ccache
 Use ccache to cache compilation by default. This allows for faster compiles if
 you are continuously recompiling the same packages. It can be disabled for
 individual packages by placing \fB!ccache\fP in the \fB\*(PB\fP options array.
 .RE
 .TP
 .B DISTCC_HOSTS="\fIhost1 ...\fP"
 If using DistCC, this is used to specify a space-delimited list of hosts
 running in the DistCC cluster. In addition, you will want to modify your
 \fBMAKEFLAGS\fP.
 .TP
 .B OPTIONS=(strip !docs libtool emptydirs)
 This array contains four options that affect the default packaging. All four
 are equivalent to options that can be placed in the PKGBUILD; the defaults are
 shown here. All options should always be left in the array; to enable or
 disable an option simply remove or place an "!" at the front of the option.
 Each works as follows:
 .RS
 .TP
 .B strip
 Strip symbols from binaries and libraries. If you frequently use a debugger on
 programs or libraries, it may be helpful to disable this option.
 .TP
 .B docs
 Save doc and info directories. If you wish to delete doc and info directories,
 specify "!docs" in the array.
 .TP
 .B libtool
 Leave libtool (.la) files in packages. Specify "!libtool" to remove them.
 .TP
 .B emptydirs
 Leave empty directories in packages.
 .RE
 .TP
 .B INTEGRITY_CHECK=(\fIcheck1 ...\fP)
 File integrity checks to use. Multiple checks may be specified; this affects
 both generation and checking. The current valid options are: md5, sha1, sha256,
 sha384, and sha512.
 .TP
 .B DOC_DIRS=(usr/{,share/}{info,doc} ...)
 If "!docs" is specified in the \fBOPTIONS\fP array, this variable will instruct
 makepkg where to look to remove docs. If you build packages that are located in
 opt/, you may need to add the directory to this array. NOTE: do not add the
 leading slash to the directory name.
 .TP
 .B PKGDEST=\fI/path/to/folder\fP
 If this value is not set, packages will by default be placed in the current
 directory (location of the \fB\*(PB\fP). Many people like to keep all their
 packages in one place so this option allows this behavior. A common location is
 "/home/packages".
 .TP
 .B SRCDEST=\fI/path/to/folder\fP
 If this value is not set, downloaded source files will only be stored in the
 current directory. Many people like to keep all source files in a central
 location for easy cleanup, so this path can be set here.
 .TP
 .B PACKAGER="\fIJohn Doe <john@doe.com>\fP"
 This value is used when querying a package to see who was the builder. It is
 recommended you change this to your name and email address.
 .SH SEE ALSO
 .BR makepkg (8),
 .BR pacman (8),
 .BR \*(PB (5)
 See the Arch Linux website at <http://www.archlinux.org> for more current
 information on the distribution and the \fBpacman\fP family of tools, and
 <http://wiki.archlinux.org/index.php/Arch_Packaging_Standards> for
 recommendations on packaging standards.
 .SH AUTHORS
 .nf
 Judd Vinet <jvinet@zeroflux.org>
 Aurelien Foret <aurelien@archlinux.org>
 Aaron Griffin <aaron@archlinux.org>
 Dan McGee <dan@archlinux.org>
 .fi
 See the 'AUTHORS' file for additional contributors.
--- a/doc/makepkg.conf.5.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/makepkg.conf.5.asciidoc
@ -1,312 +0,0 @@
 makepkg.conf(5)
 ===============
 Name
 ----
 makepkg.conf - makepkg configuration file
 Synopsis
 --------
 {sysconfdir}/makepkg.conf, $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/pacman/makepkg.conf, ~/.makepkg.conf
 Description
 -----------
 Configuration options for makepkg are stored in makepkg.conf. This file is
 sourced so you can include any special compiler flags you wish to use. This is
 helpful when building for different architectures or with different
 optimizations. However, only the variables described below are exported to the
 build environment.
 NOTE: This does not guarantee that all package Makefiles will use your exported
 variables. Some of them are non-standard.
 The system-wide configuration file is found in {sysconfdir}/makepkg.conf.
 Specific additions (e.g. build flags for additional languages) can be placed
 in {sysconfdir}/makepkg.conf.d/*.conf.
 Individual options can be overridden (or added to) on a per-user basis in
 $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/pacman/makepkg.conf or ~/.makepkg.conf, with the former
 taking priority.
 The default file is fairly well commented, so it may be easiest to simply
 follow directions given there for customization.
 Options
 -------
 **DLAGENTS=(**\'protocol::/path/to/command [options]' ...**)**::
 	Sets the download agents used to fetch source files specified with a URL in
 	the linkman:PKGBUILD[5] file. Options can be specified for each command as
 	well, and any protocol can have a download agent.  Any spaces in option
 	arguments are required to be escaped to avoid being split.  Several
 	examples are provided in the default makepkg.conf.
 	+
 	If present, `%u` will be replaced with the download URL. Otherwise, the
 	download URL will be placed on the end of the command. If present, `%o` will
 	be replaced with the local file name, plus a ``.part'' extension, which allows
 	makepkg to handle resuming file downloads.
 **VCSCLIENTS=(**\'protocol::package' ...**)**::
 	Sets the packages required to fetch version controlled source files. When
 	required, makepkg will check that these packages are installed or are included
 	in the `depends` or `makedepends` arrays in the PKGBUILD.
 **CARCH=**"carch"::
 	Specifies your computer architecture; possible values include such things
 	as ``i686'', ``x86_64'', ``ppc'', etc. This should be automatically set on
 	installation.
 **CHOST=**"chost"::
 	A string such as ``i686-pc-linux-gnu''; do not touch this unless you know what
 	you are doing. This can be commented out by most users if desired.
 **NPROC=**""::
 	Sets the number of processors to use for parallel jobs in makepkg.
 	Note: this does not affect parallelization of tasks during ``build()`` and
 	related functions.
 **CPPFLAGS=**"cppflags"::
 	Flags used for the C preprocessor; see CFLAGS for more information.
 **CFLAGS=**"cflags"::
 	Flags used for the C compiler. This is a key part to the use of makepkg.
 	Usually several options are specified, and the most common string resembles
 	something like this: ``-march=i686 -O2 -pipe''. Another useful option may
 	be `-mcpu` in place of `-march`. Read gcc(1) for more details on the wide
 	variety of compiler flags available.
 **CXXFLAGS=**"cxxflags"::
 	Flags used for the C++ compiler; see CFLAGS for more info.
 **LDFLAGS=**"ldflags"::
 	Flags used for the linker. Several options may be specified with common
 	usage resembling ``-Wl,--hash-style=gnu''. Read ld(1) for more details on
 	available linker flags.
 **LTOFLAGS=**"ltoflags"::
 	Additional compiler and linker flags appended to `CFLAGS`, `CXXFLAGS`
 	and `LDFLAGS` when building with link time optimization. If empty,
 	``-flto'' is used.
 **MAKEFLAGS=**"makeflags"::
 	This is often used to set the number of jobs used; for example, `-j2`.
 	Other flags that make accepts can also be passed.
 **DEBUG_CFLAGS=**"debug_cflags"::
 	Additional compiler flags appended to `CFLAGS` for use in debugging. Usually
 	this would include: ``-g''. Read gcc(1) for more details on the wide
 	variety of compiler flags available.
 **DEBUG_CXXFLAGS=**"debug_cxxflags"::
 	Debug flags used for the C++ compiler; see DEBUG_CFLAGS for more info.
 **BUILDENV=(**!distcc !color !ccache check !sign**)**::
 	This array contains options that affect the build environment; the defaults
 	are shown here. All options should always be left in the array; to enable
 	or disable an option, simply remove or add an ``!'' at the front of the
 	option. If an option is specified multiple times, the final value takes
 	precedence. Each option works as follows:
 	*distcc*;;
 		Use the distributed C/C++/ObjC compiler to spread compilation among
 		multiple machines. If this is enabled, `DISTCC_HOSTS` must be specified
 		as well.
 	*color*;;
 		Colorize output messages, making output easier to read.
 	*ccache*;;
 		Use ccache to cache compilation by default. This allows for faster
 		compiles if you are continuously recompiling the same packages. It can
 		be disabled for individual packages by placing `!ccache` in the
 		PKGBUILD options array.
 	*check*;;
 		Run the check() function if present in the PKGBUILD. This can be
 		enabled or disabled for individual packages through the use of
 		makepkg's '\--check' and '\--nocheck' options, respectively.
 	*sign*;;
 		Generate a PGP signature file using GnuPG. This will execute 'gpg
 		\--detach-sign' on the built package to generate a detached
 		signature file, using the GPG agent, if it is available. The signature
 		file will be the entire file name of the package with a ``.sig''
 		extension.
 **DISTCC_HOSTS=**"host1 ..."::
 	If using DistCC, this is used to specify a space-delimited list of hosts
 	running in the DistCC cluster. In addition, you will want to modify your
 	`MAKEFLAGS`.
 **BUILDDIR=**"/path/to/directory"::
 	If this value is not set, packages will, by default, be built in
 	subdirectories of the directory that makepkg is called from. This
 	option allows setting the build location to another directory.
 	Incorrect use of `$startdir` in a PKGBUILD may cause building with
 	this option to fail.
 **GPGKEY=**""::
 	Specify a key to use for GPG signing instead of the default key in the
 	keyring. Can be overridden with makepkg's '\--key' option.
 **OPTIONS=(**!strip docs libtool staticlibs emptydirs ...**)**::
 	This array contains options that affect default packaging. They are
 	equivalent to options that can be placed in the PKGBUILD; the defaults are
 	shown here. All options should always be left in the array; to enable or
 	disable an option, simply remove or add an ``!'' at the front of the
 	option. If an option is specified multiple times, the final value takes
 	precedence. Each option works as follows:
 	*strip*;;
 		Strip symbols from binaries and libraries. If you frequently use a
 		debugger on programs or libraries, it may be helpful to disable this
 		option.
 	*docs*;;
 		Save doc directories. If you wish to delete doc directories, specify
 		`!docs` in the array. The directories affected are specified by the
 		`DOC_DIRS` variable.
 	*libtool*;;
 		Leave libtool (.la) files in packages. Specify `!libtool` to remove
 		them.
 	*staticlibs*;;
 		Leave static library (.a) files in packages. Specify `!staticlibs` to
 		remove them, if they have a shared counterpart.
 	*emptydirs*;;
 		Leave empty directories in packages.
 	*zipman*;;
 		Compress manual (man and info) pages with gzip. The directories
 		affected are specified by the `MAN_DIRS` variable.
 	*purge*;;
 		Remove files specified by the `PURGE_TARGETS` variable from the
 		package.
 	*debug*;;
 		Add the user-specified debug flags as specified in DEBUG_CFLAGS and
 		DEBUG_CXXFLAGS to their counterpart buildflags. Creates a separate
 		package containing the debug symbols when used with `strip'.
 	*lto*;;
 		Enable building packages using link time optimization. Adds the
 		flags specified in LTOFLAGS to CFLAGS, CXXFLAGS and LDFLAGS (or
 		``-flto'' if LTOFLAGS is empty).
 	*autodeps*;;
 		Enable the automatic addition of libraries to the depends and
 		provides arrays. Search library directories are controlled by
 		the LIB_DIRS variable defined below.
 **INTEGRITY_CHECK=(**check1 ...**)**::
 	File integrity checks to use. Multiple checks may be specified; this
 	affects both generation and checking. The current valid options are:
 	`ck`, `md5`, `sha1`, `sha224`, `sha256`, `sha384`, `sha512`, and `b2`.
 **STRIP_BINARIES=**"--strip-all"::
 	Options to be used when stripping binaries. See linkman:strip[1]
 	for details.
 **STRIP_SHARED=**"--strip-unneeded"::
 	Options to be used when stripping shared libraries or PIE executables.
 	See linkman:strip[1] for details.
 **STRIP_STATIC=**"--strip-debug"::
 	Options to be used when stripping static libraries. See linkman:strip[1]
 	for details.
 **MAN_DIRS=(**{usr{,/local}{,/share},opt/*}/{man,info} ...**)**::
 	If `zipman` is specified in the `OPTIONS` array, this variable will
 	instruct makepkg where to look to compress manual (man and info)
 	pages. If you build packages that are located in opt/, you may need
 	to add the directory to this array. *NOTE:* Do not add the leading
 	slash to the directory name.
 **DOC_DIRS=(**usr/{,share/}{doc,gtk-doc} ...**)**::
 	If `!docs` is specified in the `OPTIONS` array, this variable will
 	instruct makepkg where to look to remove docs. If you build packages
 	that are located in opt/, you may need to add the directory to this
 	array. *NOTE:* Do not add the leading slash to the directory name.
 **LIB_DIRS=(**lib:usr/lib ...**)**::
 	If `autodeps` is specified in the `OPTIONS` array, this variable will
 	instruct makepkg where to look to find libraries to add to the `provides`
 	array. The format is "prefix:path", where provides will be added for
 	libraries found in "path" with the specified prefix added.
 **PURGE_TARGETS=(**usr/{,share}/info/dir .podlist *.pod...**)**::
 	If `purge` is specified in the `OPTIONS` array, this variable will
 	instruct makepkg which files to remove from the package. This is
 	useful for index files that are added by multiple packages.
 **DBGSRCDIR=**"/usr/src/debug"::
 	If `strip` and `debug` are specified in the `OPTIONS` array, this variable
 	will instruct makepkg where to place source files for installed binaries.
 	The binaries will be modified to link this directory for the debugger
 	search path.
 **PKGDEST=**"/path/to/directory"::
 	If this value is not set, packages will, by default, be placed in the
 	current directory (location of the linkman:PKGBUILD[5]). Many people
 	like to keep all their packages in one place so this option allows
 	for this behavior. A common location is ``/home/packages''.
 **SRCDEST=**"/path/to/directory"::
 	If this value is not set, downloaded source files will only be stored
 	in the current directory. Many people like to keep all source files in
 	a central location for easy cleanup, so this path can be set here.
 **SRCPKGDEST=**"/path/to/directory"::
 	If this value is not set, source package files will be stored in
 	in the current directory. Many people like to keep all source package files
 	in a central location for easy cleanup, so this path can be set here.
 **LOGDEST=**"/path/to/directory"::
 	If this value is not set, log files are written to the current
 	directory. This centralizes the log location, facilitating cleanup
 	and compression.
 **PACKAGER=**"John Doe <john@example.com>"::
 	This value is used when querying a package to see who was the builder.
 	The given format is required for PGP key lookup through WKD.
 	It is recommended to change this to your name and email address.
 **COMPRESSGZ=**"(gzip -c -f -n)"::
 **COMPRESSBZ2=**"(bzip2 -c -f)"::
 **COMPRESSXZ=**"(xz -c -z -)"::
 **COMPRESSZST=**"(zstd -c -z -)"::
 **COMPRESSLZO**"(lzop -q)"::
 **COMPRESSLRZ=**"(lrzip -q)"::
 **COMPRESSLZ4=**"(lz4 -q)"::
 **COMPRESSZ=**"(compress -c -f)"::
 **COMPRESSLZ=**"(lzip -c -f)"::
 	Sets the command and options used when compressing compiled or source
 	packages in the named format.
 **PKGEXT=**"{pkgext}", **SRCEXT=**"{srcext}"::
 	Sets the compression used when making compiled or source packages.
 	Valid suffixes are `.pkg` or `.src` (for PKGEXT and SRCEXT respectively)
 	followed by one of `.tar.gz`, `.tar.bz2`, `.tar.xz`, `.tar.zst`, `.tar.lzo`,
 	`.tar.lrz`, `.tar.lz4`, `.tar.lz` and `.tar.Z`, or simply `.tar` to
 	disable compression entirely.
 **PACMAN_AUTH=()**::
 	Specify a command prefix for running pacman as root. If unset, makepkg will
 	check for the presence of sudo(8) and su(1) in turn, and try the first one
 	it finds.
 	+
 	If present, `%c` will be replaced with the shell-quoted form of the command
 	to run. Otherwise, the command to run is appended to the auth command.
 See Also
 --------
 linkman:makepkg[8], linkman:pacman[8], linkman:PKGBUILD[5]
 include::footer.asciidoc[]
--- a/doc/meson.build
+++ b/doc/meson.build
@ -1,157 +0,0 @@
 manpages = [
  { 'name': 'alpm-hooks.5' },
  { 'name': 'pacman.8' },
  { 'name': 'makepkg.8' },
  { 'name': 'makepkg-template.1' },
  { 'name': 'repo-add.8' },
  { 'name': 'vercmp.8' },
  { 'name': 'testpkg.8' },
  { 'name': 'pacman-key.8' },
  { 'name': 'pacman-db-upgrade.8' },
  { 'name': 'PKGBUILD.5', 'extra_depends' : [ 'PKGBUILD-example.txt' ] },
  { 'name': 'makepkg.conf.5' },
  { 'name': 'pacman.conf.5' },
  { 'name': 'BUILDINFO.5' },
  { 'name': 'pacman-conf.8' },
 ]
 sitepages = [
  { 'name': 'submitting-patches' },
  { 'name': 'translation-help' },
  { 'name': 'HACKING', 'source': '../HACKING' },
  { 'name': 'index' },
 ]
 asciidoc_conf = join_paths(meson.current_source_dir(), 'asciidoc.conf')
 asciidoc_opts = [
 '-f', asciidoc_conf,
 '-a', 'pacman_version="@0@"'.format(PACKAGE_VERSION),
 '-a', 'srcext=@0@'.format(get_option('src-ext')),
 '-a', 'pkgext=@0@'.format(get_option('pkg-ext')),
 '-a', 'pkgdatadir=@0@'.format(PKGDATADIR),
 '-a', 'keyringdir=@0@'.format(KEYRINGDIR),
 '-a', 'localstatedir=@0@'.format(LOCALSTATEDIR),
 '-a', 'sysconfdir=@0@'.format(SYSCONFDIR),
 '-a', 'datarootdir=@0@'.format(DATAROOTDIR),
 '-a', 'rootdir=@0@'.format(ROOTDIR),
 '-a', 'libmakepkgdir=@0@'.format(LIBMAKEPKGDIR),
 ]
 html_targets = []
 html_files = []
 foreach page : manpages
  manpage = page['name']
  htmlpage = '@0@.html'.format(manpage)
  input = '@0@.asciidoc'.format(manpage)
  section = page['name'].split('.')[-1]
  mandirn = join_paths(MANDIR, 'man' + section)
  custom_target(
    manpage,
    command : [
      A2X,
      '--no-xmllint',
      '-d', 'manpage',
      '-f', 'manpage',
      '--xsltproc-opts', '-param man.endnotes.list.enabled 0 -param man.endnotes.are.numbered 0',
      '-D', '@OUTDIR@',
      '--asciidoc-opts', ' '.join(asciidoc_opts),
      '@INPUT@',
    ],
    input : input,
    output : [manpage],
    depend_files : [
      asciidoc_conf,
    ] + page.get('extra_depends', []),
    install : true,
    install_dir : mandirn,
  )
 endforeach
 foreach page: manpages + sitepages
  manpage = page['name']
  htmlpage = '@0@.html'.format(manpage)
  input = page.get('source', '@0@.asciidoc'.format(manpage))
  html = custom_target(
    htmlpage,
    command : [
      ASCIIDOC,
    ] + asciidoc_opts + [
      '-a', 'linkcss',
      '-a', 'toc',
      '-a', 'icons',
      '-a', 'max-width=960px',
      '-a', 'stylesheet=asciidoc-override.css',
      '-o', '@OUTPUT@',
      '@INPUT@',
    ],
    input : input,
    output : [htmlpage],
    depend_files : [
      asciidoc_conf,
      'asciidoc-override.css',
    ] + page.get('extra_depends', []),
    build_by_default : false,
    install : false,
  )
  html_targets += [html]
  html_files += [htmlpage]
 endforeach
 run_target('html',
           command : ['/bin/true'],
           depends : html_targets)
 custom_target(
  'website.tar.gz',
  command : [
    'bsdtar', 'czf', '@OUTPUT@',
    '-C', meson.current_build_dir(),
  ] + html_files + [
    '-C', meson.current_source_dir(),
    'asciidoc-override.css',
    '-C', '/etc/asciidoc/stylesheets/',
    'asciidoc.css',
    '-C', '/etc/asciidoc/javascripts/',
    'asciidoc.js',
    '-C', '/etc/asciidoc/',
    'images',
  ],
  output : ['website.tar.gz'],
  build_by_default : false,
  depends : html_targets,
 )
 meson.add_install_script(MESON_MAKE_SYMLINK,
                         'repo-add.8',
                         join_paths(MANDIR, 'man8/repo-remove.8'))
 meson.add_install_script(MESON_MAKE_SYMLINK,
                         'alpm-hooks.5',
                         join_paths(MANDIR, 'man5/pacman-hooks.5'))
 doxygen = find_program('doxygen', required : get_option('doxygen'))
 if doxygen.found() and not get_option('doxygen').disabled()
  doxyconf = configuration_data()
  doxyconf.set('INPUT_DIRECTORY', meson.current_source_dir())
  doxyconf.set('OUTPUT_DIRECTORY', meson.current_build_dir())
  doxyfile = configure_file(
    input : 'Doxyfile.in',
    output : 'Doxyfile',
    configuration : doxyconf,
    install : false)
  custom_target(
    'doxygen',
    input : doxyfile,
    output : ['man3'],
    command : [doxygen, doxyfile],
    build_by_default : true,
    install : true,
    install_dir : MANDIR)
 endif
--- a/doc/pacman-conf.8.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/pacman-conf.8.asciidoc
@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
 pacman-conf(8)
 ==============
 Name
 ----
 pacman-conf - query pacman's configuration file
 Synopsis
 --------
 'pacman-conf' [options] [<directive> ...]
 'pacman-conf' (--repo-list|--help|--version)
 Description
 -----------
 'pacman-conf' is a utility for parsing the 'pacman' configuration file
 and returning script-friendly output. It is designed to properly handle
 non-trivial configuration features such as variable interpolation and
 the use of the Include directive, and guarantees that it will return the
 same configuration values which 'pacman' itself would use.
 'pacman-conf' will output the fully-resolved contents of the
 configuration file by default, or, if provided with the name of a
 configuration directive, output the contents of the given directive alone.
 Options
 -------
 *-c, \--config* <path>::
 	Specify an alternate configuration file.
 *-R, \--rootdir* <path>::
 	Specify an alternate installation root (default is `/`).
 *-r, \--repo* <repository>::
 	Query options for a specific repository.
 *-v, \--verbose*::
 	Always shown directive names.
 *-l, \--repo-list*::
 	List configured repositories.
 *-h, \--help*::
 	Output syntax and command line options.
 *-V, \--version*::
 	Display version and exit.
 Examples
 --------
 pacman-conf -r core Usage::
 	Show the value of the Usage configuration option for core repository.
 pacman-conf HoldPkg::
 	Show the value of the HoldPkg configuration option.
 See Also
 --------
 linkman:pacman.conf[5]
 include::footer.asciidoc[]
--- a/doc/pacman-db-upgrade.8.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/pacman-db-upgrade.8.asciidoc
@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
 pacman-db-upgrade(8)
 ====================
 Name
 ----
 pacman-db-upgrade - upgrade the local pacman database to a newer format
 Synopsis
 --------
 'pacman-db-upgrade' [options]
 Description
 -----------
 'pacman-db-upgrade' is a script that upgrades the local database used
 by linkman:pacman[8] to a newer format.
 Options
 --------------
 *-h, \--help*::
 Show the built-in help message and exit.
 *-V, \--version*::
 Show version information and exit.
 *-d, \--dbpath* <path>::
 Set an alternate database location.
 *-r, \--root* <path>::
 Set an alternate installation root.
 *\--config* <path>::
 Set an alternate configuration file.
 *\--nocolor*::
 Remove color from output.
 See Also
 --------
 linkman:pacman[8]
 include::footer.asciidoc[]
--- a/doc/pacman-key.8.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/pacman-key.8.asciidoc
@ -1,151 +0,0 @@
 pacman-key(8)
 =============
 Name
 ----
 pacman-key - manage pacman's list of trusted keys
 Synopsis
 --------
 'pacman-key' [options] operation [targets]
 Description
 -----------
 'pacman-key' is a wrapper script for GnuPG used to manage pacman's keyring, which
 is the collection of PGP keys used to check signed packages and databases. It
 provides the ability to import and export keys, fetch keys from keyservers and
 update the key trust database.
 More complex keyring management can be achieved using GnuPG directly combined with
 the '\--homedir' option pointing at the pacman keyring (located in
 +{sysconfdir}/pacman.d/gnupg+ by default).
 Invoking pacman-key consists of supplying an operation with any potential
 options and targets to operate on. Depending on the operation, a 'target' may
 be a valid key identifier, filename, or directory.
 Operations
 ----------
 *-a, \--add*::
 	Add the key(s) contained in the specified file or files to pacman's
 	keyring. If a key already exists, update it.
 *-d, \--delete*::
 	Remove the key(s) identified by the specified keyid(s) from pacman's
 	keyring.
 *-e, \--export*::
 	Export key(s) identified by the specified keyid(s) to 'stdout'. If no keyid
 	is specified, all keys will be exported.
 *\--edit-key*::
 	Present a menu for key management task on the specified keyid(s). Useful
 	for adjusting a keys trust level.
 *-f, \--finger*::
 	List a fingerprint for each specified keyid, or for all known keys if no
 	keyids are specified.
 *-h, \--help*::
 	Output syntax and command line options.
 *\--import*::
 	Imports keys from `pubring.gpg` into the public keyring from the specified
 	directories.
 *\--import-trustdb*::
 	Imports ownertrust values from `trustdb.gpg` into the shared trust database
 	from the specified directories.
 *\--init*::
 	Ensure the keyring is properly initialized and has the required access
 	permissions.
 *-l, \--list-keys*::
 	Lists all or specified keys from the public keyring.
 *\--list-sigs*::
 	Same as '\--list-keys', but the signatures are listed too.
 *\--lsign-key*::
 	Locally sign the given key. This is primarily used to root the web of trust
 	in the local private key generated by '\--init'.
 *\--nocolor*::
 	Disable colored output from pacman-key.
 *-r, \--recv-keys*::
 	Equivalent to '\--recv-keys' in GnuPG.
 *\--refresh-keys*::
 	Equivalent to '\--refresh-keys' in GnuPG.
 *\--populate*::
 	Reload the default keys from the (optionally provided) keyrings in
 	+{keyringdir}+. For more information, see
 	<<PK,Providing a Keyring for Import>> below.
 *-u, \--updatedb*::
 	Equivalent to '\--check-trustdb' in GnuPG. This operation can be specified with
 	other operations.
 *-V, \--version*::
 	Displays the program version.
 *-v, \--verify*::
 	Assume that the first argument is a signature and verify it. If a second
 	argument is provided, it is the file to be verified.
 +
 With only one argument given, assume that the signature is a detached
 signature, and look for a matching data file to verify by stripping the file
 extension. If no matching data file is found, fall back on GnuPG semantics and
 attempt to verify a file with an embedded signature.
 Options
 -------
 *\--config* <file>::
 	Use an alternate configuration file instead of the +{sysconfdir}/pacman.conf+
 	default.
 *\--gpgdir* <dir>::
 	Set an alternate home directory for GnuPG. If unspecified, the value is
 	read from +{sysconfdir}/pacman.conf+.
 *\--keyserver* <keyserver>::
 	Use the specified keyserver if the operation requires one. This will take
 	precedence over any keyserver option specified in a `gpg.conf`
 	configuration file. Running '\--init' with this option will set the default
 	keyserver if one was not already configured.
 Providing a Keyring for Import[[PK]]
 ------------------------------------
 A distribution or other repository provided may want to provide a set of
 PGP keys used in the signing of its packages and repository databases that can
 be readily imported into the pacman keyring. This is achieved by providing a
 PGP keyring file `foo.gpg` that contains the keys for the foo keyring in the
 directory +{keyringdir}+.
 Optionally, the file `foo-trusted` can be provided containing a list of trusted
 key IDs for that keyring. This is a file in a format compatible with 'gpg
 \--export-ownertrust' output. This file will inform the user which keys a user
 needs to verify and sign to build a local web of trust, in addition to
 assigning provided owner trust values.
 Also optionally, the file `foo-revoked` can be provided containing a list of
 revoked key IDs for that keyring. Revoked is defined as "no longer valid for
 any signing", so should be used with prudence. A key being marked as revoked
 will be disabled in the keyring and no longer treated as valid, so this always
 takes priority over it's trusted state in any other keyring.
 See Also
 --------
 linkman:pacman[8], linkman:pacman.conf[5]
 include::footer.asciidoc[]
--- a/doc/pacman.8
+++ b/doc/pacman.8
@ -0,0 +1,276 @@
 ." the string declarations are a start to try and make distro independent
 .ds DS Arch Linux
 .ds PB PKGBUILD
 .ds VR 3.0.0
 .ds LV 1.0.0
 .TH pacman 8 "Feb 07, 2007" "pacman version \*(VR" "\*(DS Utilities"
 .SH NAME
 pacman \- package manager utility
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .B pacman
 <\fIoperation\fR> [\fIoptions\fR] [\fIpackages\fR]
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 \fBpacman\fP is a \fIpackage management\fP utility that tracks installed
 packages on a Linux system. It features dependency support, package groups,
 install and uninstall hooks, and the ability to sync your local machine with a
 remote ftp server to automatically upgrade packages. \fBpacman\fP packages are
 a zipped tar format.
 Since version 3.0.0, \fBpacman\fP has been the frontend to \fBlibalpm\fP, the
 "Arch Linux Package Management" library. This library allows alternative front
 ends to be written (for instance, a GUI front end).
 .SH OPERATIONS
 .TP
 .B \-A, --add (deprecated)
 Add a package to the system. Either a URL or file path can be specified. The
 package will be uncompressed into the installation root and the database will
 be updated. The package will not be installed if another version is already
 installed. NOTE: please use \fB--upgrade\fP in place of this option.
 .TP
 .B \-F, --freshen
 This is like \fB--upgrade\fP except it will only upgrade packages already
 installed on the system.
 .TP
 .B \-Q, --query
 Query the package database. This operation allows you to view installed
 packages and their files, as well as meta-information about individual packages
 (dependencies, conflicts, install date, build date, size). This can be run
 against the local package database or can be used on individual .tar.gz
 packages. See \fBQUERY OPTIONS\fP below.
 .TP
 .B \-R, --remove
 Remove a package from the system. Files belonging to the specified package
 will be deleted, and the database will be updated. Most configuration files
 will be saved with a \fI.pacsave\fP extension unless the \fB--nosave\fP option
 is used. See \fBREMOVE OPTIONS\fP below.
 .TP
 .B \-S, --sync
 Synchronize packages. Packages are installed directly from the ftp servers,
 including all dependencies required to run the packages. For example,
 \fBpacman -S qt\fP will download and install \fBqt\fP and all the packages it
 depends on. You can also use \fBpacman -Su\fP to upgrade all packages that are
 out of date. See \fBSYNC OPTIONS\fP below.
 .TP
 .B \-U, --upgrade
 Upgrade or add a package to the system. Either a URL or file path can be
 specified. This is a "remove-then-add" process. See \fBHANDLING CONFIG
 FILES\fP for an explanation on how pacman takes care of config files.
 .TP
 .B \-V, --version
 Display version and exit.
 .TP
 .B \-h, --help
 Display syntax for the given operation. If no operation was supplied then the
 general syntax is shown.
 .SH OPTIONS
 .TP
 .B \-b, --dbpath \fIpath\fP
 Specify an alternative database location (default is "/var/lib/pacman/"). This
 should not be used unless you know what you are doing.
 .TP
 .B \-d, --nodeps
 Skips all dependency checks. Normally, pacman will always check a package's
 dependency fields to ensure that all dependencies are installed and there are
 no package conflicts in the system.
 .TP
 .B \-f, --force
 Bypass file conflict checks and overwrite conflicting files. If the package
 that is about to be installed contains files that are already installed, this
 option will cause all those files to be overwritten.  This option should be
 used with care, ideally not at all.
 .TP
 .B \-r, --root \fIpath\fP
 Specify an alternative installation root (default is "/"). This should
 \fInot\fP be used as a way to install software into /usr/local instead of /usr.
 This option is used if you want to install a package on a temporary mounted
 partition which is "owned" by another system. By using this option you not only
 specify where the software should be installed, but you also specify which
 package database and cache location to use.
 .TP
 .B \-v, --verbose
 Output more status messages, such as the Root and DBPath.
 .TP
 .B \--cachedir \fIdir\fP
 Specify an alternative package cache location (default is
 "/var/cache/pacman/pkg/"). This should not be used unless you know what you are
 doing.
 .TP
 .B \--config \fIfilepath\fP
 Specify an alternate configuration file.
 .TP
 .B \--noconfirm
 Bypass any and all "Are you sure?" messages. It's not a good idea to do this
 unless you want to run pacman from a script.
 .TP
 .B \--noprogressbar
 Do not show a progress bar when downloading files. This can be useful for
 scripts that call pacman and capture the output.
 .SH QUERY OPTIONS
 .TP
 .B \-e, --orphans
 List all packages that were pulled in by a previously installed package but no
 longer required by any installed package.
 .TP
 .B \-g, --groups
 Display all packages that are members of a named group. If not name is
 specified, list all grouped packages.
 .TP
 .B \-i, --info
 Display information on a given package. The \fB-p\fP option can be used if
 querying a package file instead of the local database.
 .TP
 .B \-l, --list
 List all files owned by a given package. Multiple packages can be specified on
 the command line.
 .TP
 .B \-m, --foreign
 List all packages that were not found in the sync database(s). Typically these
 are packages that were downloaded manually and installed with \fB--upgrade\fP.
 .TP
 .B \-o, --owns \fIfile\fP
 Search for the package that owns \fIfile\fP.
 .TP
 .B \-p, --file
 Signifies that the package supplied on the command line is a file and not an
 entry in the database. The file will be decompressed and queried. This is
 useful in combination with \fB--info\fP and \fB--list\fP.
 .TP
 .B \-s, --search \fIregexp\fP
 This will search each locally-installed package for names or descriptions that
 matche \fIregexp\fP.
 .TP
 .B \-u, --upgrades
 Lists all packages that are out of date on the local system. This option works
 best if the sync database is refreshed using \fB-Sy\fP.
 .SH REMOVE OPTIONS
 .TP
 .B \-c, --cascade
 Remove all target packages, as well as all packages that depend on one or more
 target packages. This operation is recursive.
 .TP
 .B \-k, --keep
 Removes the database entry only. Leaves all files in place.
 .TP
 .B \-n, --nosave
 Instructs pacman to ignore file backup designations.  Normally, when a file is
 removed from the system the database is checked to see if the file should be
 renamed with a .pacsave extension.
 .TP
 .B \-s, --recursive
 Remove each target specified including all dependencies, provided that (A) they
 are not required by other packages; and (B) they were not explicitly installed
 by the user.  This option is analogous to a backwards \fB--sync\fP operation.
 .SH SYNC OPTIONS
 .TP
 .B \-c, --clean
 Remove old packages from the cache to free up disk space. When \fBpacman\fP
 downloads packages, it saves them in \fI/var/cache/pacman/pkg\fP. Use one
 \fB--clean\fP switch to remove \fIold\fP packages; use two to remove \fIall\fP
 packages from the cache.
 .TP
 .B \-g, --groups
 Display all the members for each package group specified. If no group names
 are provided, all groups will be listed; pass the flag twice to view all
 groups and their members.
 .TP
 .B \-i, --info
 Display dependency and other information for a given package. This will search
 through all repositories for a matching package.
 .TP
 .B \-l, --list
 List all packages in the specified repositories. Multiple repositories can be
 specified on the command line.
 .TP
 .B \-p, --print-uris
 Print out URIs for each package that will be installed, including any
 dependencies yet to be installed. These can be piped to a file and downloaded
 at a later time, using a program like wget.
 .TP
 .B \-s, --search \fIregexp\fP
 This will search each package in the sync databases for names or descriptions
 that match \fIregexp\fP.
 .TP
 .B \-u, --sysupgrade
 Upgrades all packages that are out of date. Each currently-installed package
 will be examined and upgraded if a newer package exists. A report of all
 packages to upgrade will be presented and the operation will not proceed
 without user confirmation. Dependencies are automatically resolved at this
 level and will be installed/upgraded if necessary.
 .TP
 .B \-w, --downloadonly
 Retrieve all packages from the server, but do not install/upgrade anything.
 .TP
 .B \-y, --refresh
 Download a fresh copy of the master package list from the server(s) defined in
 \fBpacman.conf\fP. This should typically be used each time you use
 \fB--sysupgrade\fP or \fB-u\fP. Passing two \fB--refresh\fP or \fB-y\fP flags
 will force a refresh of all package lists even if they are thought to be
 up to date.
 .TP
 .B \--ignore \fIpackage\fP
 Directs \fBpacman\fP to ignore upgrades of \fIpackage\fP even if there is one
 available.
 .SH HANDLING CONFIG FILES
 pacman uses the same logic as rpm to determine action against files that are
 designated to be backed up. During an upgrade, 3 md5 hashes are used for each
 backup file to determine the required action: one for the original file
 installed, one for the new file that's about to be installed, and one for the
 actual file existing on the filesystem. After comparing these 3 hashes, the
 follow scenarios can result:
 .TP
 original=\fBX\fP, current=\fBX\fP, new=\fBX\fP
 All three files are the same, so overwrites are not an issue Install the new
 file.
 .TP
 original=\fBX\fP, current=\fBX\fP, new=\fBY\fP
 The current file is the same as the original but the new one differs.  Since
 the user did not ever modify the file, and the new one may contain improvements
 or bugfixes, install the new file.
 .TP
 original=\fBX\fP, current=\fBY\fP, new=\fBX\fP
 Both package versions contain the exact same file, but the one on the
 filesystem has been modified. Leave the current file in place.
 .TP
 original=\fBX\fP, current=\fBY\fP, new=\fBY\fP
 The new file is identical to the current file. Install the new file.
 .TP
 original=\fBX\fP, current=\fBY\fP, new=\fBZ\fP
 All three files are different, so install the new file with a .pacnew extension
 and warn the user. The user must then manually merge any necessary changes into
 the original file.
 .SH CONFIGURATION
 See
 .BR pacman.conf (5)
 for more details on configuring \fBpacman\fP using the \fBpacman.conf\fP file.
 .SH BUGS
 Bugs? You must be kidding, there are no bugs in this software. But if we happen
 to be wrong, send us an email with as much detail as possible to
 <pacman-dev@archlinux.org>.
 .SH SEE ALSO
 .BR pacman.conf (5),
 .BR makepkg (8),
 .BR libalpm (3)
 See the Arch Linux website at <http://www.archlinux.org> for more current
 information on the distribution and the \fBpacman\fP family of tools.
 .SH AUTHORS
 .nf
 Judd Vinet <jvinet@zeroflux.org>
 Aurelien Foret <aurelien@archlinux.org>
 Aaron Griffin <aaron@archlinux.org>
 Dan McGee <dan@archlinux.org>
 .fi
 See the 'AUTHORS' file for additional contributors.
--- a/doc/pacman.8.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/pacman.8.asciidoc
@ -1,583 +0,0 @@
 pacman(8)
 =========
 Name
 ----
 pacman - package manager utility
 Synopsis
 --------
 'pacman' <operation> [options] [targets]
 Description
 -----------
 Pacman is a package management utility that tracks installed packages on a Linux
 system. It features dependency support, package groups, install and uninstall
 scripts, and the ability to sync your local machine with a remote repository to
 automatically upgrade packages. Pacman packages are a zipped tar format.
 Since version 3.0.0, pacman has been the front-end to linkman:libalpm[3], the
 ``Arch Linux Package Management'' library. This library allows alternative
 front-ends to be written (for instance, a GUI front-end).
 Invoking pacman involves specifying an operation with any potential options and
 targets to operate on. A 'target' is usually a package name, file name, URL, or
 a search string. Targets can be provided as command line arguments.
 Additionally, if stdin is not from a terminal and a single hyphen (-) is passed
 as an argument, targets will be read from stdin.
 Operations
 ----------
 *-D, \--database*::
 	Operate on the package database. This operation allows you to modify
 	certain attributes of the installed packages in pacman's database. It
 	also allows you to check the databases for internal consistency.
 	See <<DO,Database Options>> below.
 *-Q, \--query*::
 	Query the package database. This operation allows you to view installed
 	packages and their files, as well as meta-information about individual
 	packages (dependencies, conflicts, install date, build date, size). This
 	can be run against the local package database or can be used on
 	individual package files. In the first case, if no package names
 	are provided in the command line, all installed packages will be
 	queried. Additionally, various filters can be applied on the package
 	list. See <<QO,Query Options>> below.
 *-R, \--remove*::
 	Remove package(s) from the system. Groups can also be specified to be
 	removed, in which case every package in that group will be removed.
 	Files belonging to the specified package will be deleted, and the
 	database will be updated. Most configuration files will be saved
 	with a '.pacsave' extension unless the '\--nosave' option is used.
 	See <<RO,Remove Options>> below.
 *-S, \--sync*::
 	Synchronize packages. Packages are installed directly from the remote
 	repositories, including all dependencies required to run the packages. For
 	example, `pacman -S qt` will download and install qt and all the
 	packages it depends on. If a package name exists in more than one
 	repository, the repository can be explicitly specified to clarify the
 	package to install: `pacman -S testing/qt`. You can also specify version
 	requirements: `pacman -S "bash>=3.2"`. Quotes are needed, otherwise the
 	shell interprets ">" as redirection to a file.
 +
 In addition to packages, groups can be specified as well. For example, if
 gnome is a defined package group, then `pacman -S gnome` will provide a
 prompt allowing you to select which packages to install from a numbered list.
 The package selection is specified using a space- and/or comma-separated list of
 package numbers. Sequential packages may be selected by specifying the first
 and last package numbers separated by a hyphen (`-`). Excluding packages is
 achieved by prefixing a number or range of numbers with a caret (`^`).
 +
 Packages that provide other packages are also handled. For example, `pacman -S
 foo` will first look for a foo package. If foo is not found, packages that
 provide the same functionality as foo will be searched for. If any package is
 found, it will be installed. A selection prompt is provided if multiple packages
 providing foo are found.
 +
 You can also use `pacman -Su` to upgrade all packages that are out-of-date. See
 <<SO,Sync Options>> below. When upgrading, pacman performs version comparison
 to determine which packages need upgrading. This behavior operates as follows:
  Alphanumeric:
    1.0a < 1.0b < 1.0beta < 1.0p < 1.0pre < 1.0rc < 1.0 < 1.0.a < 1.0.1
  Numeric:
    1 < 1.0 < 1.1 < 1.1.1 < 1.2 < 2.0 < 3.0.0
 +
 Additionally, version strings can have an 'epoch' value defined that will
 overrule any version comparison, unless the epoch values are equal. This is
 specified in an `epoch:version-rel` format. For example, `2:1.0-1` is always
 greater than `1:3.6-1`.
 *-T, \--deptest*::
 	Check dependencies; this is useful in scripts such as makepkg to check
 	installed packages. This operation will check each dependency specified and
 	return a list of dependencies that are not currently satisfied on the system.
 	This operation accepts no other options. Example usage: `pacman -T qt
 	"bash>=3.2"`.
 *-U, \--upgrade*::
 	Upgrade or add package(s) to the system and install the required
 	dependencies from sync repositories. Either a URL or file path can be
 	specified. This is a ``remove-then-add'' process. See <<UO,Upgrade
 	Options>> below; also see <<HCF,Handling Config Files>> for an explanation
 	on how pacman takes care of configuration files.
 *-F, \--files*::
 	Query the files database. This operation allows you to look for packages
 	owning certain files or display files owned by certain packages. Only
 	packages that are part of your sync databases are searched. See
 	<<FO,File Options>> below.
 *-V, \--version*::
 	Display version and exit.
 *-h, \--help*::
 	Display syntax for the given operation. If no operation was supplied,
 	then the general syntax is shown.
 Options
 -------
 *-b, \--dbpath* <path>::
 	Specify an alternative database location (the default is
 	+{localstatedir}/lib/pacman+). This should not be used unless you know what
 	you are doing.
 	*NOTE*: If specified, this is an absolute path, and the root path is
 	not automatically prepended.
 *-r, \--root* <path>::
 	Specify an alternative installation root (default is +{rootdir}+). This should
 	not be used as a way to install software into `/usr/local` instead of
 	`/usr`.
 	*NOTE*: If database path or log file are not specified on either the
 	command line or in linkman:pacman.conf[5], their default location will
 	be inside this root path.
 	*NOTE*: This option is not suitable for performing operations on a mounted
 	guest system. See '\--sysroot' instead.
 *-v, \--verbose*::
 	Output paths such as the Root, Conf File, DB Path, Cache Dirs, etc.
 *\--arch* <arch>::
 	Specify an alternate architecture.
 *\--cachedir* <dir>::
 	Specify an alternative package cache location (the default is
 	+{localstatedir}/cache/pacman/pkg+). Multiple cache directories can be
 	specified, and they are tried in the order they are passed to pacman.
 	*NOTE*: This is an absolute path, and the root path is not automatically
 	prepended. If DownloadUser is set in linkman:pacman.conf[5], then the
 	specified user must have permission to access the cache directory.
 *\--color* <when>::
 	Specify when to enable coloring. Valid options are 'always', 'never', or
 	'auto'. 'always' forces colors on; 'never' forces colors off; and 'auto' only
 	automatically enables colors when outputting onto a tty.
 *\--config* <file>::
 	Specify an alternate configuration file.
 *\--debug*::
 	Display debug messages. When reporting bugs, this option is recommended
 	to be used.
 *\--gpgdir* <dir>::
 	Specify a directory of files used by GnuPG to verify package signatures
 	(the default is +{sysconfdir}/pacman.d/gnupg+). This directory should contain
 	two files: `pubring.gpg` and `trustdb.gpg`. `pubring.gpg` holds the public keys
 	of all packagers. `trustdb.gpg` contains a so-called trust database, which
 	specifies that the keys are authentic and trusted. *NOTE*: This is an absolute
 	path, and the root path is not automatically prepended.
 *\--hookdir* <dir>::
 	Specify a alternative directory containing hook files (the default is
 	+{sysconfdir}/pacman.d/hooks+). Multiple hook directories can be specified
 	with hooks in later directories taking precedence over hooks in earlier
 	directories. *NOTE*: This is an absolute path, and the root path is not
 	automatically prepended.
 *\--logfile* <file>::
 	Specify an alternate log file. This is an absolute path, regardless of
 	the installation root setting.
 *\--noconfirm*::
 	Bypass any and all ``Are you sure?'' messages. It's not a good idea to do
 	this unless you want to run pacman from a script.
 *\--confirm*::
 	Cancels the effects of a previous '\--noconfirm'.
 *\--disable-download-timeout*::
 	Disable defaults for low speed limit and timeout on downloads. Use this
 	if you have issues downloading files with proxy and/or security gateway.
 *\--sysroot* <dir>:: Specify an alternative system root.  This path will be
 	prepended to all other configuration directories and any repository servers
 	beginning with `file://`.  Any paths or URLs passed as targets will not be
 	modified.  This allows mounted guest systems to be properly operated on.
 *\--disable-sandbox*::
 	Disable the default sandbox applied to the process downloading files on Linux
 	systems. Useful if experiencing landlock related failures while downloading
 	files when running a Linux kernel that does not support this feature.
 Transaction Options (apply to '-S', '-R' and '-U')
 --------------------------------------------------
 *-d, \--nodeps*::
 	Skips dependency version checks. Package names are still checked. Normally,
 	pacman will always check a package's dependency fields to ensure that all
 	dependencies are installed and there are no package conflicts in the
 	system. Specify this option twice to skip all dependency checks.
 *\--assume-installed* <package=version>::
 	Add a virtual package "package" with version "version" to the transaction
 	to satisfy dependencies. This allows disabling the specific dependency checks
 	without affecting all dependency checks. To disable all dependency
 	checking, see the '\--nodeps' option.
 *\--dbonly*::
 	Adds/removes the database entry only, leaving all files in place.
 *\--noprogressbar*::
 	Do not show a progress bar when downloading files. This can be useful
 	for scripts that call pacman and capture the output.
 *\--noscriptlet*::
 	If an install scriptlet exists, do not execute it. Do not use this
 	unless you know what you are doing.
 *-p, \--print*::
 	Only print the targets instead of performing the actual operation (sync,
 	remove or upgrade). Use '\--print-format' to specify how targets are
 	displayed. The default format string is "%l", which displays URLs with
 	'-S', file names with '-U', and pkgname-pkgver with '-R'.
 *\--print-format* <format>::
 	Specify a printf-like format to control the output of the '\--print'
 	operation. The possible attributes are: "%a" for arch, "%b" for
 	builddate, "%d" for description, "%e" for pkgbase, "%f" for filename,
 	"%g" for base64 encoded PGP signature, "%h" for sha256sum, "%m" for
 	md5sum, "%n" for pkgname, "%p" for packager, "%v" for pkgver, "%l" for
 	location, "%r" for repository, "%s" for size, "%C" for checkdepends,
 	"%D" for depends, "%G" for groups, "%H" for conflicts, "%L" for
 	licenses, "%M" for makedepends, "%O" for optional depends, "%P" for
 	provides and "%R" for replaces.
 	Implies '\--print'.
 Upgrade Options (apply to '-S' and '-U')[[UO]]
 ----------------------------------------------
 *-w, \--downloadonly*::
 	Retrieve all packages from the server, but do not install/upgrade anything.
 *\--asdeps*::
 	Install packages non-explicitly; in other words, fake their install reason
 	to be installed as a dependency. This is useful for makepkg and other
 	build-from-source tools that need to install dependencies before building
 	the package.
 *\--asexplicit*::
 	Install packages explicitly; in other words, fake their install reason to
 	be explicitly installed. This is useful if you want to mark a dependency
 	as explicitly installed so it will not be removed by the '\--recursive'
 	remove operation.
 *\--ignore* <package>::
 	Directs pacman to ignore upgrades of package even if there is one
 	available. Multiple packages can be specified by separating them
 	with a comma.
 *\--ignoregroup* <group>::
 	Directs pacman to ignore upgrades of all packages in 'group', even if
 	there is one available. Multiple groups can be specified by
 	separating them with a comma.
 *\--needed*::
 	Do not reinstall the targets that are already up-to-date.
 *\--overwrite* <glob>::
 	Bypass file conflict checks and overwrite conflicting files. If the
 	package that is about to be installed contains files that are already
 	installed and match 'glob', this option will cause all those files to be
 	overwritten.  Using '\--overwrite' will not allow overwriting a directory
 	with a file or installing packages with conflicting files and directories.
 	Multiple patterns can be specified by separating them with a comma. May be
 	specified multiple times.  Patterns can be negated, such that files
 	matching them will not be overwritten, by prefixing them with an
 	exclamation mark. Subsequent matches will override previous ones. A leading
 	literal exclamation mark or backslash needs to be escaped.
 Query Options (apply to '-Q')[[QO]]
 -----------------------------------
 *-c, \--changelog*::
 	View the ChangeLog of a package if it exists.
 *-d, \--deps*::
 	Restrict or filter output to packages installed as dependencies. This
 	option can be combined with '-t' for listing real orphans - packages that
 	were installed as dependencies but are no longer required by any
 	installed package.
 *-e, \--explicit*::
 	Restrict or filter output to explicitly installed packages. This option
 	can be combined with '-t' to list explicitly installed packages that
 	are not required by any other package.
 *-g, \--groups*::
 	Display all packages that are members of a named group. If a name is not
 	specified, list all grouped packages.
 *-i, \--info*::
 	Display information on a given package. The '-p' option can be used if
 	querying a package file instead of the local database. Passing two
 	'\--info' or '-i' flags will also display the list of backup files and
 	their modification states.
 *-k, \--check*::
 	Check that all files owned by the given package(s) are present on the
 	system. If packages are not specified or filter flags are not provided,
 	check all installed packages. Specifying this option twice will perform
 	more detailed file checking (including permissions, file sizes, and
 	modification times) for packages that contain the needed mtree file.
 *-l, \--list*::
 	List all files owned by a given package. Multiple packages can be
 	specified on the command line.
 *-m, \--foreign*::
 	Restrict or filter output to packages that were not found in the sync
 	database(s). Typically these are packages that were downloaded manually
 	and installed with '\--upgrade'.
 *-n, \--native*::
 	Restrict or filter output to packages that are found in the sync
 	database(s). This is the inverse filter of '\--foreign'.
 *-o, \--owns* <file>::
 	Search for packages that own the specified file(s). The path can be
 	relative or absolute, and one or more files can be specified.
 *-p, \--file*::
 	Signifies that the package supplied on the command line is a file and
 	not an entry in the database. The file will be decompressed and queried.
 	This is useful in combination with '\--info' and '\--list'.
 *-q, \--quiet*::
 	Show less information for certain query operations. This is useful when
 	pacman's output is processed in a script. Search will only show package
 	names and not version, group, and description information; owns will
 	only show package names instead of "file is owned by pkg" messages; group
 	will only show package names and omit group names; list will only show
 	files and omit package names; check will only show pairs of package names
 	and missing files; a bare query will only show package names
 	rather than names and versions.
 *-s, \--search* <regexp>::
 	Search each locally-installed package for names or descriptions that
 	match `regexp`. When including multiple search terms, only packages
 	with descriptions matching ALL of those terms are returned.
 *-t, \--unrequired*::
 	Restrict or filter output to print only packages neither required nor
 	optionally required by any currently installed package. Specify this
 	option twice to include packages which are optionally, but not directly,
 	required by another package.
 *-u, \--upgrades*::
 	Restrict or filter output to packages that are out-of-date on the local
 	system. Only package versions are used to find outdated packages;
 	replacements are not checked here. This option works best if the sync
 	database is refreshed using '-Sy'.
 Remove Options (apply to '-R')[[RO]]
 ------------------------------------
 *-c, \--cascade*::
 	Remove all target packages, as well as all packages that depend on one
 	or more target packages. This operation is recursive and must be used
 	with care, since it can remove many potentially needed packages.
 *-n, \--nosave*::
 	Instructs pacman to ignore file backup designations. Normally, when a
 	file is removed from the system, the database is checked to see if the
 	file should be renamed with a '.pacsave' extension.
 *-s, \--recursive*::
 	Remove each target specified including all of their dependencies, provided
 	that (A) they are not required by other packages; and (B) they were not
 	explicitly installed by the user. This operation is recursive and analogous
 	to a backwards '\--sync' operation, and it helps keep a clean system without
 	orphans. If you want to omit condition (B), pass this option twice.
 *-u, \--unneeded*::
 	Removes targets that are not required by any other packages.
 	This is mostly useful when removing a group without using the '-c' option,
 	to avoid breaking any dependencies.
 Sync Options (apply to '-S')[[SO]]
 ----------------------------------
 *-c, \--clean*::
 	Remove packages that are no longer installed from the cache as well as
 	currently unused sync databases to free up disk space. When pacman
 	downloads packages, it saves them in a cache directory. In addition,
 	databases are saved for every sync DB you download from and are not
 	deleted even if they are removed from the configuration file
 	linkman:pacman.conf[5]. Use one '\--clean' switch to only remove
 	packages that are no longer installed; use two to remove all files
 	from the cache. In both cases, you will have a yes or no option to
 	remove packages and/or unused downloaded databases.
 +
 If you use a network shared cache, see the 'CleanMethod' option in
 linkman:pacman.conf[5].
 *-g, \--groups*::
 	Display all the members for each package group specified. If no group
 	names are provided, all groups will be listed; pass the flag twice to
 	view all groups and their members.
 *-i, \--info*::
 	Display information on a given sync database package. Passing two '\--info'
 	or '-i' flags will also display those packages in all repositories that
 	depend on this package.
 *-l, \--list*::
 	List all packages in the specified repositories. Multiple repositories
 	can be specified on the command line.
 *-q, \--quiet*::
 	Show less information for certain sync operations. This is useful when
 	pacman's output is processed in a script. Search will only show package
 	names and not repository, version, group, and description information; list
 	will only show package names and omit databases and versions; group will
 	only show package names and omit group names.
 *-s, \--search* <regexp>::
 	This will search each package in the sync databases for names or
 	descriptions that match `regexp`. When you include multiple search
 	terms, only packages with descriptions matching ALL of those terms will
 	be returned.
 *-u, \--sysupgrade*::
 	Upgrades all packages that are out-of-date. Each currently-installed
 	package will be examined and upgraded if a newer package exists. A
 	report of all packages to upgrade will be presented, and the operation
 	will not proceed without user confirmation. Dependencies are
 	automatically resolved at this level and will be installed/upgraded if
 	necessary.
 +
 Pass this option twice to enable package downgrades; in this case, pacman will
 select sync packages whose versions do not match with the local versions. This
 can be useful when the user switches from a testing repository to a stable one.
 +
 Additional targets can also be specified manually, so that '-Su foo' will do a
 system upgrade and install/upgrade the "foo" package in the same operation.
 *-y, \--refresh*::
 	Download a fresh copy of the master package databases '(repo.db)' from the
 	server(s) defined in linkman:pacman.conf[5]. This should typically be used
 	each time you use '\--sysupgrade' or '-u'. Passing two '\--refresh' or '-y'
 	flags will force a refresh of all package databases, even if they appear to
 	be up-to-date.
 Database Options (apply to '-D')[[QO]]
 --------------------------------------
 *\--asdeps* <package>::
 	Mark a package as non-explicitly installed; in other words, set their install
 	reason to be installed as a dependency.
 *\--asexplicit* <package>::
 	Mark a package as explicitly installed; in other words, set their install
 	reason to be explicitly installed. This is useful if you want to keep a
 	package installed even when it was initially installed as a dependency
 	of another package.
 *-k, \--check*::
 	Check the local package database is internally consistent. This will
 	check all required files are present and that installed packages have
 	the required dependencies, do not conflict and that multiple packages
 	do not own the same file. Specifying this option twice will perform
 	a check on the sync databases to ensure all specified dependencies
 	are available.
 *-q, \--quiet*::
 	Suppress messages on successful completion of database operations.
 File Options (apply to '-F')[[FO]]
 ----------------------------------
 *-y, --refresh*::
 	Download fresh package file databases '(repo.files)' from the server.
 	Use twice to force a refresh even if databases are up to date.
 *-l, \--list*::
 	List the files owned by the queried package.
 *-x, --regex*::
 	Interpret each query as a regular expression.
 *-q, \--quiet*::
 	Show less information for certain file operations. This is useful when
 	pacman's output is processed in a script, however, you may want to use
 	'--machinereadable' instead.
 *--machinereadable*::
 	Print each match in a machine readable output format. The format is
 	'repository\0pkgname\0pkgver\0path\n' with '\0' being the NULL character
 	and '\n' a linefeed.
 Handling Config Files[[HCF]]
 ----------------------------
 Pacman uses the same logic as 'rpm' to determine action against files that are
 designated to be backed up. During an upgrade, three MD5 hashes are used for
 each backup file to determine the required action: one for the original file
 installed, one for the new file that is about to be installed, and one for the
 actual file existing on the file system. After comparing these three hashes, the
 following scenarios can result:
 original=X, current=X, new=X::
 	All three files are the same, so overwrites are not an issue. Install the
 	new file.
 original=X, current=X, new=Y::
 	The current file is the same as the original, but the new one differs.
 	Since the user did not ever modify the file, and the new one may contain
 	improvements or bug fixes, install the new file.
 original=X, current=Y, new=X::
 	Both package versions contain the exact same file, but the one on the
 	file system has been modified. Leave the current file in place.
 original=X, current=Y, new=Y::
 	The new file is identical to the current file. Install the new file.
 original=X, current=Y, new=Z::
 	All three files are different, so install the new file with a '.pacnew'
 	extension and warn the user. The user must then manually merge any
 	necessary changes into the original file.
 original=NULL, current=Y, new=Z::
 	The package was not previously installed, and the file already exists on the
 	file system. Install the new file with a '.pacnew' extension and warn the
 	user. The user must then manually merge any necessary changes into the
 	original file.
 Examples
 --------
 pacman -Ss ne.hack::
 	Search for regexp "ne.hack" in package database.
 pacman -S gpm::
 	Download and install gpm including dependencies.
 pacman -U /home/user/ceofhack-0.6-1-x86_64.pkg.tar.gz::
 	Install ceofhack-0.6-1 package from a local file.
 pacman -Syu::
 	Update package list and upgrade all packages afterwards.
 pacman -Syu gpm::
 	Update package list, upgrade all packages, and then install gpm if it
 	wasn't already installed.
 Configuration
 -------------
 See linkman:pacman.conf[5] for more details on configuring pacman using the
 'pacman.conf' file.
 See Also
 --------
 linkman:alpm-hooks[5], linkman:libalpm[3], linkman:makepkg[8],
 linkman:pacman.conf[5]
 include::footer.asciidoc[]
--- a/doc/pacman.conf.5
+++ b/doc/pacman.conf.5
@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
 ." the string declarations are a start to try and make distro independent
 .ds DS Arch Linux
 .ds PB PKGBUILD
 .ds VR 3.0.0
 .ds LV 1.0.0
 .TH \*(PB 5 "Feb 07, 2007" "pacman.conf version \*(VR" "\*(DS Files"
 .SH NAME
 pacman.conf \- pacman package manager configuration file
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 \fBpacman\fP, using \fBlibalpm\fP, will attempt to read \fBpacman.conf\fP each
 time it is invoked.  This configuration file is divided into sections or
 \fIrepositories\fP. Each section defines a package repository that \fBpacman\fP
 can use when searching for packages in \fB--sync\fP mode. The exception to this
 is the \fIoptions\fP section, which defines global options.
 .SH EXAMPLE
 .RS
 .nf
 #
 # pacman.conf
 #
 [options]
 NoUpgrade = etc/passwd etc/group etc/shadow
 NoUpgrade = etc/fstab
 [current]
 Include = /etc/pacman.d/current
 [custom]
 Server = file:///home/pkgs
 .fi
 .RE
 .SH OPTIONS
 .TP
 .B DBPath = \fIpath/to/db/dir\fP
 Overrides the default location of the toplevel database directory.  The default
 is \fIvar/lib/pacman\fP.
 .TP
 .B CacheDir = \fIpath/to/cache/dir\fP
 Overrides the default location of the package cache directory. The default is
 \fIvar/cache/pacman\fP.
 .TP
 .B HoldPkg = \fIpackage\fP ...
 If a user tries to \fB--remove\fP a package that's listed in \fBHoldPkg\fI,
 \fBpacman\fP will ask for confirmation before proceeding.
 .TP
 .B IgnorePkg = \fIpackage\fP ...
 Instructs \fBpacman\fP to ignore any upgrades for this package when performing a
 \fB--sysupgrade\fP.
 .TP
 .B Include = \fIpath\fP
 Include another config file. This file can include repositories or general
 configuration options.
 .TP
 .B ProxyServer = <\fIhost\fP|\fIip\fP>[:\fIport\fP]
 If set, \fBpacman\fP will use this proxy server for all ftp/http transfers.
 .TP
 .B XferCommand = \fI/path/to/command %u\fP
 If set, an external program will be used to download all remote files.  All
 instances of \fB%u\fP will be replaced with the download URL. If present,
 instances of \fB%o\fP will be replaced with the local filename, plus a ".part"
 extension, which allows programs like wget to do file resumes properly.
 This option is useful for users who experience problems with built-in
 http/ftp support, or need the more advanced proxy support that comes with
 utilities like wget.
 .TP
 .B NoPassiveFtp
 Disables passive ftp connections when downloading packages. (aka Active Mode)
 .TP
 .B NoUpgrade = \fIfile\fP ...
 All files listed with a \fBNoUpgrade\fP directive will never be touched during
 a package install/upgrade. Do \fInot\fP include the leading slash when
 specifying files.
 .TP
 .B NoExtract = \fIfile\fP ...
 All files listed with a \fBNoExtract\fP directive will never be extracted from
 a package into the filesystem. This can be useful when you don't want part of a
 package to be installed. For example, if your httpd root uses an index.php,
 then you would not want the index.html file to be extracted from the
 \fBapache\fP package.
 .TP
 .B UseSyslog
 Log action messages through \fBsyslog()\fP. This will insert log entries into
 \fI/var/log/messages\fP or equivalent.
 .TP
 .B LogFile = \fI/path/to/file\fP
 Log actions directly to a file. Default is \fI/var/log/pacman.log\fP.
 .SH REPOSITORY SECTIONS
 Each repository section defines a section name and at least one location where
 the packages can be found. The section name is defined by the string within
 square brackets (the two above are 'current' and 'custom'). Locations are
 defined with the \fBServer\fP directive and follow a URL naming structure.  If
 you want to use a local directory, you can specify the full path with
 a 'file://' prefix, as shown above.
 The order of repositories in the file matters; repositories listed first will
 take precedence over those listed later in the file when packages in two
 repositories have identical names, regardless of version number.
 .SH USING YOUR OWN REPOSITORY
 If you have numerous custom packages of your own, it is often easier to
 generate your own custom local repository than install them all with the
 \fB--upgrade\fP option. All you need to do is generate a compressed package
 database in the directory with these packages so \fBpacman\fP can find it when
 run with \fB--refresh\fP.
 .RS
 .nf
 repo-add /home/pkgs/custom.db.tar.gz /home/pkgs/*.pkg.tar.gz
 .fi
 .RE
 The above command will generate a compressed database named
 \fI/home/pkgs/custom.db.tar.gz\fP. Note that the database must be of the form
 \fI{treename}.db.tar.gz\fP, where {treename} is the name of the section defined
 in the configuration file.  That's it!  Now configure your \fIcustom\fP section
 in the configuration file as shown in the config example above.  Pacman will
 now use your package repository.  If you add new packages to the repository,
 remember to re-generate the database and use \fBpacman\fP's --refresh option.
 For more information on the \fBrepo-add\fP command, use \fB repo-add --help\fP.
 .SH SEE ALSO
 .BR pacman (8),
 .BR libalpm (3)
 See the Arch Linux website at <http://www.archlinux.org> for more current
 information on the distribution and the \fBpacman\fP family of tools.
 .SH AUTHORS
 .nf
 Judd Vinet <jvinet@zeroflux.org>
 Aurelien Foret <aurelien@archlinux.org>
 Aaron Griffin <aaron@archlinux.org>
 Dan McGee <dan@archlinux.org>
 .fi
 See the 'AUTHORS' file for additional contributors.
--- a/doc/pacman.conf.5.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/pacman.conf.5.asciidoc
@ -1,382 +0,0 @@
 pacman.conf(5)
 ==============
 Name
 ----
 pacman.conf - pacman package manager configuration file
 Synopsis
 --------
 {sysconfdir}/pacman.conf
 Description
 -----------
 Pacman, using linkman:libalpm[3], will attempt to read pacman.conf each time it
 is invoked. This configuration file is divided into sections or repositories.
 Each section defines a package repository that pacman can use when searching
 for packages in '\--sync' mode. The exception to this is the options section,
 which defines global options.
 Comments are only supported by beginning a line with the hash (#) symbol.
 Comments cannot begin in the middle of a line.
 Example
 -------
 --------
 #
 # pacman.conf
 #
 [options]
 NoUpgrade = etc/passwd etc/group etc/shadow
 NoUpgrade = etc/fstab
 [core]
 Include = /etc/pacman.d/core
 [custom]
 Server = file:///home/pkgs
 --------
 NOTE: Each directive must be in CamelCase. If the case isn't respected, the
 directive won't be recognized. For example. noupgrade or NOUPGRADE will not
 work.
 Options
 -------
 *RootDir =* /path/to/root/dir::
 	Set the default root directory for pacman to install to. This option is
 	used if you want to install a package on a temporary mounted partition
 	which is "owned" by another system, or for a chroot install.
 	*NOTE*: If database path or log file are not specified on either the
 	command line or in linkman:pacman.conf[5], their default location will
 	be inside this root path.
 *DBPath =* /path/to/db/dir::
 	Overrides the default location of the toplevel database directory. The
 	default is +{localstatedir}/lib/pacman/+. Most users will not need to set
 	this option. *NOTE*: if specified, this is an absolute path and the root
 	path is not automatically prepended.
 *CacheDir =* /path/to/cache/dir::
 	Overrides the default location of the package cache directory. The
 	default is +{localstatedir}/cache/pacman/pkg/+. Multiple cache directories can be
 	specified, and they are tried in the order they are listed in the config
 	file. If a file is not found in any cache directory, it will be downloaded
 	to the first cache directory with write access. *NOTE*: this is an absolute
 	path, the root path is not automatically prepended.
 *HookDir =* /path/to/hook/dir::
 	Add directories to search for alpm hooks in addition to the system hook
 	directory (+{datarootdir}/libalpm/hooks/+).  The default is
 	+{sysconfdir}/pacman.d/hooks+.  Multiple directories can be specified with
 	hooks in later directories taking precedence over hooks in earlier
 	directories.  *NOTE*: this is an absolute path, the root path is not
 	automatically prepended.  For more information on the alpm hooks, see
 	linkman:alpm-hooks[5].
 *GPGDir =* /path/to/gpg/dir::
 	Overrides the default location of the directory containing configuration
 	files for GnuPG. The default is +{sysconfdir}/pacman.d/gnupg/+.
 	This directory should contain two files: `pubring.gpg` and `trustdb.gpg`.
 	`pubring.gpg` holds the public keys of all packagers. `trustdb.gpg`
 	contains a so-called trust database, which specifies that the keys are
 	authentic and trusted.
 	*NOTE*: this is an absolute path, the root path is not automatically
 	prepended.
 *LogFile =* /path/to/log/file::
 	Overrides the default location of the pacman log file. The default
 	is +{localstatedir}/log/pacman.log+. This is an absolute path and the root directory
 	is not prepended.
 *HoldPkg =* package ...::
 	If a user tries to '\--remove' a package that's listed in `HoldPkg`,
 	pacman will ask for confirmation before proceeding. Shell-style glob
 	patterns are allowed.
 *IgnorePkg =* package ...::
 	Instructs pacman to ignore any upgrades for this package when performing
 	a '\--sysupgrade'. Shell-style glob patterns are allowed.
 *IgnoreGroup =* group ...::
 	Instructs pacman to ignore any upgrades for all packages in this
 	group when performing a '\--sysupgrade'. Shell-style glob patterns are
 	allowed.
 *Include =* /path/to/config/file::
 	Include another configuration file. This file can include repositories or
 	general configuration options. Wildcards in the specified paths will get
 	expanded based on linkman:glob[7] rules.
 *Architecture =* auto &| i686 &| x86_64 | ...::
 	If set, pacman will only allow installation of packages with the given
 	architectures (e.g. 'i686', 'x86_64', etc). The special value 'auto' will
 	use the system architecture, provided via ``uname -m''. If unset, no
 	architecture checks are made. *NOTE*: Packages with the special
 	architecture 'any' can always be installed, as they are meant to be
 	architecture independent.
 *XferCommand =* /path/to/command %u [%o]::
 	If set, an external program will be used to download all remote files.
 	All instances of `%u` will be replaced with the download URL. If present,
 	instances of `%o` will be replaced with the local filename, plus a
 	``.part'' extension, which allows programs like wget to do file resumes
 	properly.
 	+
 	This option is useful for users who experience problems with built-in
 	HTTP/FTP support, or need the more advanced proxy support that comes with
 	utilities like wget.
 *NoUpgrade =* file ...::
 	All files listed with a `NoUpgrade` directive will never be touched during
 	a package install/upgrade, and the new files will be installed with a
 	'.pacnew' extension.
 	These files refer to files in the package archive, so do not include the
 	leading slash (the RootDir) when specifying them. Shell-style glob patterns
 	are allowed. It is possible to invert matches by prepending a file with
 	an exclamation mark. Inverted files will result in previously blacklisted
 	files being whitelisted again. Subsequent matches will override previous
 	ones. A leading literal exclamation mark or backslash needs to be escaped.
 *NoExtract =* file ...::
 	All files listed with a `NoExtract` directive will never be extracted from
 	a package into the filesystem. This can be useful when you don't want part
 	of a package to be installed. For example, if your httpd root uses an
 	'index.php', then you would not want the 'index.html' file to be extracted
 	from the 'apache' package.
 	These files refer to files in the package archive, so do not include the
 	leading slash (the RootDir) when specifying them. Shell-style glob patterns
 	are allowed. It is possible to invert matches by prepending a file with
 	an exclamation mark. Inverted files will result in previously blacklisted
 	files being whitelisted again. Subsequent matches will override previous
 	ones. A leading literal exclamation mark or backslash needs to be escaped.
 *CleanMethod =* KeepInstalled &| KeepCurrent::
 	If set to `KeepInstalled` (the default), the '-Sc' operation will clean
 	packages that are no longer installed (not present in the local database).
 	If set to `KeepCurrent`, '-Sc' will clean outdated packages (not present in
 	any sync database).
 	The second behavior is useful when the package cache is shared among
 	multiple machines, where the local databases are usually different, but the
 	sync databases in use could be the same. If both values are specified,
 	packages are only cleaned if not installed locally and not present in any
 	known sync database.
 *SigLevel =* ...::
 	Set the default signature verification level. For more information, see
 	<<SC,Package and Database Signature Checking>> below.
 *LocalFileSigLevel =* ...::
 	Set the signature verification level for installing packages using the "-U"
 	operation on a local file. Uses the value from SigLevel as the default.
 *RemoteFileSigLevel =* ...::
 	Set the signature verification level for installing packages using the "-U"
 	operation on a remote file URL. Uses the value from SigLevel as the default.
 *UseSyslog*::
 	Log action messages through syslog(). This will insert log entries into
 	+{localstatedir}/log/messages+ or equivalent.
 *Color*::
 	Automatically enable colors only when pacman's output is on a tty.
 *NoProgressBar*::
 	Disables progress bars. This is useful for terminals which do
 	not support escape characters.
 *CheckSpace*::
 	Performs an approximate check for adequate available disk space before
 	installing packages.
 *VerbosePkgLists*::
 	Displays name, version and size of target packages formatted
 	as a table for upgrade, sync and remove operations.
 *DisableDownloadTimeout*::
 	Disable defaults for low speed limit and timeout on downloads. Use this
 	if you have issues downloading files with proxy and/or security gateway.
 *ParallelDownloads =* ...::
 	Specifies number of concurrent download streams. The value needs to be a
 	positive integer. If this config option is not set then only one download
 	stream is used (i.e. downloads happen sequentially).
 *DownloadUser =* username::
 	Specifies the user to switch to for downloading files. If this config
 	option is not set then the downloads are done as the user running pacman.
 *DisableSandbox*::
 	Disable the default sandbox applied to the process downloading files on Linux
 	systems. Useful if experiencing landlock related failures while downloading
 	files when running a Linux kernel that does not support this feature.
 Repository Sections
 -------------------
 Each repository section defines a section name and at least one location where
 the packages can be found. The section name is defined by the string within
 square brackets (the two above are 'core'  and  'custom'). Repository names
 must be unique and the name 'local' is reserved for the database of installed
 packages. Locations are defined with the 'Server' directive and follow a URL
 naming structure. If you want to use a local directory, you can specify the
 full path with a ``file://'' prefix, as shown above.
 A common way to define DB locations utilizes the 'Include' directive. For each
 repository defined in the configuration file, a single 'Include' directive can
 contain a file that lists the servers for that repository.
 --------
 [core]
 # use this server first
 Server = ftp://ftp.archlinux.org/$repo/os/$arch
 # next use servers as defined in the mirrorlist below
 Include = /etc/pacman.d/mirrorlist
 --------
 The order of repositories in the configuration files matters; repositories
 listed first will take precedence over those listed later in the file when
 packages in two repositories have identical names, regardless of version
 number.
 *Include =* path::
 	Include another config file. This file can include repositories or
 	general configuration options. Wildcards in the specified paths will get
 	expanded based on linkman:glob[7] rules.
 *CacheServer =* url::
 	A full URL to a location where the packages, and signatures (if
 	available) for this repository can be found.  Cache servers will be tried
 	before any non-cache servers, will not be removed from the server pool for
 	404 download errors, and will not be used for database files.
 *Server =* url::
 	A full URL to a location where the database, packages, and signatures (if
 	available) for this repository can be found.
 +
 During parsing, pacman will define the `$repo` variable to the name of the
 current section. This is often utilized in files specified using the 'Include'
 directive so all repositories can use the same mirrorfile. pacman also defines
 the `$arch` variable to the first (or only) value of the `Architecture` option,
 so the same mirrorfile can even be used for different architectures.
 *SigLevel =* ...::
 	Set the signature verification level for this repository. For more
 	information, see <<SC,Package and Database Signature Checking>> below.
 *Usage =* ...::
 	Set the usage level for this repository. This option takes a list of tokens
 	which must be at least one of the following:
 		*Sync*;;
 			Enables refreshes for this repository.
 		*Search*;;
 			Enables searching for this repository.
 		*Install*;;
 			Enables installation of packages from this repository during a '\--sync'
 			operation.
 		*Upgrade*;;
 			Allows this repository to be a valid source of packages when performing
 			a '\--sysupgrade'.
 		*All*;;
 			Enables all of the above features for the repository. This is the default
 			if not specified.
 +
 Note that an enabled repository can be operated on explicitly, regardless of the Usage
 level set.
 Package and Database Signature Checking[[SC]]
 ---------------------------------------------
 The 'SigLevel' directive is valid in both the `[options]` and repository
 sections. If used in `[options]`, it sets a default value for any repository
 that does not provide the setting.
 * If set to *Never*, no signature checking will take place.
 * If set to *Optional* , signatures will be checked when present, but unsigned
  databases and packages will also be accepted.
 * If set to *Required*, signatures will be required on all packages and
  databases.
 Alternatively, you can get more fine-grained control by combining some of
 the options and prefixes described below. All options in a config file are
 processed in top-to-bottom, left-to-right fashion, where later options override
 and/or supplement earlier ones. If 'SigLevel' is specified in a repository
 section, the starting value is that from the `[options]` section, or the
 built-in system default as shown below if not specified.
 The options are split into two main groups, described below. Terms used such as
 ``marginally trusted'' are terms used by GnuPG, for more information please
 consult linkman:gpg[1].
 When to Check::
 	These options control if and when signature checks should take place.
 	*Never*;;
 		All signature checking is suppressed, even if signatures are present.
 	*Optional* (default);;
 		Signatures are checked if present; absence of a signature is not an
 		error. An invalid signature is a fatal error, as is a signature from a
 		key not in the keyring.
 	*Required*;;
 		Signatures are required; absence of a signature or an invalid signature
 		is a fatal error, as is a signature from a key not in the keyring.
 What is Allowed::
 	These options control what signatures are viewed as permissible. Note that
 	neither of these options allows acceptance of invalid or expired
 	signatures, or those from revoked keys.
 	*TrustedOnly* (default);;
 		If a signature is checked, it must be in the keyring and fully trusted;
 		marginal trust does not meet this criteria.
 	*TrustAll*;;
 		If a signature is checked, it must be in the keyring, but is not
 		required to be assigned a trust level (e.g., unknown or marginal
 		trust).
 Options in both groups can additionally be prefixed with either *Package* or
 *Database*, which will cause it to only take effect on the specified object
 type. For example, `PackageTrustAll` would allow marginal and unknown trust
 level signatures for packages.
 The built-in default is the following:
 --------
 SigLevel = Optional TrustedOnly
 --------
 Using Your Own Repository
 -------------------------
 If you have numerous custom packages of your own, it is often easier to generate
 your own custom local repository than install them all with the '\--upgrade'
 option. All you need to do is generate a compressed package database in the
 directory with these packages so pacman can find it when run with '\--refresh'.
 	repo-add /home/pkgs/custom.db.tar.gz /home/pkgs/*.pkg.tar.gz
 The above command will generate a compressed database named
 '/home/pkgs/custom.db.tar.gz'. Note that the database must be of the form
 '\{treename\}.db.tar.{ext}', where '\{treename\}' is the name of the section
 defined in the configuration file and '\{ext\}' is a valid compression type as
 documented in linkman:repo-add[8]. That's it! Now configure your custom section
 in the configuration file as shown in the config example above. Pacman will now
 use your package repository. If you add new packages to the repository,
 remember to re-generate the database and use pacman's '\--refresh' option.
 For more information on the repo-add command, see ``repo-add \--help'' or
 linkman:repo-add[8].
 See Also
 --------
 linkman:pacman[8], linkman:libalpm[3]
 include::footer.asciidoc[]
--- a/doc/repo-add.8.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/repo-add.8.asciidoc
@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
 repo-add(8)
 ==========
 Name
 ----
 repo-add - package database maintenance utility
 Synopsis
 --------
 'repo-add' [options] <path-to-db> <package> [<package> ...]
 'repo-remove' [options] <path-to-db> <packagename> [<packagename> ...]
 Description
 -----------
 'repo-add' and 'repo-remove' are two scripts to help build a package database for
 packages built with linkman:makepkg[8] and installed with linkman:pacman[8].
 'repo-add' will update a package database by reading a built package file.
 Multiple packages to add can be specified on the command line.
 If a matching ``.sig'' file is found alongside a package file, the signature
 will automatically be embedded into the database.
 'repo-remove' will update a package database by removing the package name
 specified on the command line. Multiple packages to remove can be specified
 on the command line.
 A package database is a tar file, optionally compressed. Valid extensions are
 ``.db'' followed by an archive extension of ``.tar'', ``.tar.bz2'',
 ``.tar.gz'', ``.tar.lrz'', ``.tar.lz'', ``.tar.lz4'', ``.tar.lzo'',
 ``.tar.xz'', ``.tar.zst'' or ``.tar.Z''. The file does not need to exist, but
 all parent directories must exist.
 Common Options
 --------------
 *-q, \--quiet*::
 	Force this program to keep quiet and run silently except for warning and
 	error messages.
 *-s, \--sign*::
 	Generate a PGP signature file using GnuPG. This will execute `gpg
 	--detach-sign` on the generated database to generate a detached
 	signature file, using the GPG agent if it is available. The signature file
 	will be the entire filename of the database with a ``.sig'' extension.
 *-k, \--key* <key>::
 	Specify a key to use when signing packages. Can also be specified using
 	the GPGKEY environment variable. If not specified in either location, the
 	default key from the keyring will be used.
 *-v, \--verify*::
 	Verify the PGP signature of the database before updating the database.
 	If the signature is invalid, an error is produced and the update does not
 	proceed.
 *\--nocolor*::
 	Remove color from 'repo-add' and 'repo-remove' output.
 *-R, \--remove*::
 	Remove old package files from the disk when updating or removing their
 	entry in the database.
 *-w, \--wait-for-lock*::
 	Wait for the lock file to be acquired. If unset, command will fail with
 	exit code 2 if acquiring the lock fails. If set, it will retry to acquire
 	lock until success.
 repo-add Options
 ----------------
 *-n, \--new*::
 	Only add packages that are not already in the database.  Warnings will be
 	printed upon detection of existing packages, but they will not be re-added.
 *\--include-sigs*::
 	Include package PGP signatures in the repository database (if available)
 Example
 -------
 'repo-add' foo.db.tar.xz <pkg1> [<pkg2> ...]
 This creates two separate databases; a smaller database ``foo.db.tar.xz'' used by
 pacman and a large database containing package file lists ``foo.files.tar.xz'' for
 use by other utilities. While pacman can use the large database (if renamed with a
 db.tar* extension), there is currently no additional benefit for the larger download.
 See Also
 --------
 linkman:makepkg[8], linkman:pacman[8]
 include::footer.asciidoc[]
--- a/doc/submitting-patches.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/submitting-patches.asciidoc
@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
 Pacman - Submitting Patches
 ===========================
 This document is here mainly to make the job of those who review patches
 easier and is more of a guideline and not a strict set of rules.  However,
 please try to follow as much as you can.
 NOTE: Some of this is paraphrased from the kernel documentation's
 "SubmittingPatches" file.
 Getting the most recent source
 ------------------------------
 Patches need to be submitted in Git format and are best if they are against the
 latest version of the code. There are several helpful tutorials for getting
 started with Git if you have not worked with it before.
 * https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/scm/git/docs/gittutorial.html
 * https://wiki.archlinux.org/index.php/Super_Quick_Git_Guide
 The pacman code can be fetched using the following command:
 	git clone https://gitlab.archlinux.org/pacman/pacman.git
 Before making large changes
 ---------------------------
 --
 * Discuss your idea
 There is nothing worse that spending time making a change only for it to be
 rejected immediately.  Ensure ideas are discussed beforehand to avoid
 disappointment.  Appropriate locations for discussion are the issue tracker
 on gitlab, or the pacman-dev mailing list.  Transient discussion channels
 such as IRC are not appropriate.
 --
 Creating your patch
 -------------------
 --
 * Use `git commit -s` for creating a commit of your changes.
 The -s allows you to credit yourself by adding a "Signed Off By" line to
 indicate who has "signed" the patch - who has approved it.
 	Signed-off-by: Aaron Griffin <aaron@archlinux.org>
 Please use your real name and email address. Feel free to "scramble" the
 address if you're afraid of spam.
 * Describe your patch.
 It helps if you describe the overview and goals of the patch in the git commit
 log.  This allows others to see what you intended so as to compare it to what
 was actually done, and allows better feedback.
 --
 Submitting your patch
 ---------------------
 --
 * Submit patches with a gitlab merge request
 The pacman gitlab instance is the primary queue for review and acceptance.
 Here you will get feedback, and let the reviewers know the details of your
 patch.
 --
 After you submit
 ----------------
 --
 * Don't get discouraged
 Any feedback you get, positive or negative, has nothing to do with you.  If a
 patch is rejected, try taking the suggestions into account and re-submitting.
 We welcome most submissions here, and some may take a bit longer to get
 looked over than others. If you think your patch got lost in the shuffle,
 send another email to the list in reply to the original asking if anyone has
 looked at it yet.
 * Respond to feedback
 When you do get feedback, it usually merits a response, whether this be a
 resubmission of the patch with corrections or a follow-up email asking for
 clarifications. When neither of these occurs, don't expect your patch to get
 further review. The all-volunteer staff don't have time to fix up patches that
 aren't their own.
 --
--- a/doc/testpkg.8.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/testpkg.8.asciidoc
@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
 testpkg(8)
 ==========
 Name
 ----
 testpkg - test a pacman package for validity
 Synopsis
 --------
 'testpkg' <package file>
 Description
 -----------
 'testpkg' is a script used to make sure that a pacman package is valid.
 See Also
 --------
 linkman:pacman[8]
 include::footer.asciidoc[]
--- a/doc/translation-help.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/translation-help.asciidoc
@ -1,159 +0,0 @@
 Pacman - Translating
 ====================
 This document is here to guide you in helping translate pacman messages,
 libalpm messages, and the manual pages for the entire pacman package.
 We are currently using https://app.transifex.com/[Transifex] as the translation
 platform for pacman and libalpm. You will need to sign up for an account there
 and then register with a translation team on the
 https://explore.transifex.com/toofishes/archlinux-pacman/[pacman project page].
 NOTE: This may be old information due to our switch to Transifex, but the
 gettext website is a very useful guide to read before embarking on translation
 work, as it describes many of the commands in more detail than I will here:
 https://www.gnu.org/software/gettext/manual/html_node/gettext.html[].
 Translating Messages
 --------------------
 Overview
 ~~~~~~~~
 There are two separate message catalogs in pacman: one for the back-end
 (libalpm) and one for the front-end (pacman and scripts). These correspond to
 the `lib/libalpm/po` and `po` directories in the pacman source, respectively.
 Translation message files are a specially formatted text file containing the
 original message and the corresponding translation. These po files can then
 either be hand-edited, or modified with a tool such as poedit, gtranslator or
 kbabel. Using a translation tool tends to make the job easier.
 Please read up on Transifex usage using the
 https://help.transifex.com/[Transifex Help] if you are not familiar.
 Transifex provides a command-line client to help with translations.  Here is
 an example set of commands if you have a source code checkout and are not
 worried about any local translations being overwritten. The .tx/ directory is
 checked into the git repository so is preconfigured with the two project
 resources (See `tx status` output for a quick overview).
 	tx pull -f
 	poedit po/<mylang>.po
 	poedit lib/libalpm/po/<mylang>.po
 	tx push -t -l <mylang>
 Or to just push one of the two available resources:
 	tx push -r archlinux-pacman.pacman-pot -t -l <mylang>
 	tx push -r archlinux-pacman.libalpm-pot -t -l <mylang>
 See the <<Notes,Notes>> section for additional hints on translating.
 Pre-release Updates
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 A week or two before each release, the codebase will go into a string freeze
 and an email will be sent to the mailto:pacman-dev@lists.archlinux.org[pacman-dev]
 mailing list asking for translations. An announcement in Transifex is also made,
 which reaches everyone that is member of the translation team.
 At this time, the latest `.po` language files will be made available at the
 Transifex project page.  Each language will have three files available (libalpm,
 pacman and pacman-scripts). Translators interested in helping are encouraged to use the
 features of Transifex to let others know they are currently translating their
 language.
 Once a translator has completed the translation offline (*OR* realizes they do not have
 time to finish), please upload your progress back to the Transifex site.
 NOTE: Please upload your translations as soon as possible - this will give other
 speakers of your language time to review your translations and update them as
 necessary.
 Incremental Updates
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 If you have more advanced needs you will have to get a copy of the pacman
 repository.
 	git clone https://gitlab.archlinux.org/pacman/pacman.git
 Next, you will need to configure the build environment. From the base directory,
 run:
 	meson setup . build
 If any required dependencies are missing, please install. After that,
 update the template translation (.pot) files to the latest state of
 the source code by running:
 	meson compile -C build pacman-scripts-pot pacman-pot libalpm-pot
 We need to first update the main message catalog file. Navigate into either
 the `lib/libalpm/po`, `scripts/po` or `src/pacman/po` directory depending
 on which translation you wish to work on first, and execute the following
 command to update your specific language's translation file
 (replace `lang_code` with your language code e.g. 'pt_BR', and `pot_file`
 with `libalpm.pot`, `pacman.pot` or `pacman-scripts.pot`):
 	msgmerge --update --previous <lang_code>.po  <pot_filename>.pot
 At this point, you can do the translation. To submit your changes, either email
 the new `.po` file to the mailing-list with *[translation]* in the subject, or
 submit a Git-formatted patch (please do not include any `.pot` file changes).
 As a shortcut, all translation files (including `.pot` files) can be updated
 with the following command:
 	./build-aux/update-po
 Adding a New Language
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 Making a new language is not too hard, but be sure to follow all the steps.
 You will have to do the following steps in both the `lib/libalpm/po/` and `po/`
 directories, substituting where appropriate. First, edit the `LINGUAS` file and
 add your new language code at the bottom. Next, run the following command,
 substituting `libalpm.pot` or `pacman.pot` for potfile depending on which
 directory you are currently working in:
 	msginit -l <lang_code> -o <lang_code>.po -i <potfile>
 You can then also add your language code to the end of the `LINGUAS` file
 located in each po directory.
 Look at the current message files for more guidance if necessary. Once you
 create the new language file, you may need to slightly modify the headers;
 try to make them look similar to the other .po file headers. In addition, for
 all new translations we would strongly recommend using UTF-8 encoding.
 Notes[[Notes]]
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 msgid and msgstr 'variables' can be on as many lines as necessary. Line breaks
 are ignored; if you need a literal line break, use an `\n` in your string. The
 following two translations are equivalent:
 	msgstr "This is a test translation"
 	msgstr ""
 	"This is a test translation"
 If you want to test the translation (copy the .po file you want to test,
 you may ignore the rest), replacing `<lang_code>` accordingly:
 	meson compile -C build pacman-scripts-gmo pacman-gmo libalpm-gmo
 	cp ./build/lib/libalpm/po/<lang_code>/LC_MESSAGES/libalpm.mo    /usr/share/locale/<lang_code>/LC_MESSAGES/libalpm.mo
 	cp ./build/scripts/po/<lang_code>/LC_MESSAGES/pacman-scripts.mo /usr/share/locale/<lang_code>/LC_MESSAGES/pacman-scripts.mo
 	cp ./build/src/pacman/po/<lang_code>/LC_MESSAGES/pacman.mo      /usr/share/locale/<lang_code>/LC_MESSAGES/pacman.mo
 Translating Manpages
 --------------------
 There are currently no efforts underway to include translated manual pages in
 the pacman codebase. However, this is not to say translations are unwelcome. If
 someone has experience with i18n man pages and how to best include them with our
 source, please contact the pacman-dev mailing list at
 mailto:pacman-dev@lists.archlinux.org[].
--- a/doc/vercmp.8.asciidoc
+++ b/doc/vercmp.8.asciidoc
@ -1,72 +0,0 @@
 vercmp(8)
 =========
 Name
 ----
 vercmp - version comparison utility
 Synopsis
 --------
 'vercmp' [-h] [--help] <version1> <version2>
 Description
 -----------
 'vercmp' is used to determine the relationship between two given version
 numbers. It outputs values as follows:
 *  < 0 : if ver1 < ver2
 *  = 0 : if ver1 == ver2
 *  > 0 : if ver1 > ver2
 Version comparison operates as follows:
  Alphanumeric:
    1.0a < 1.0b < 1.0beta < 1.0p < 1.0pre < 1.0rc < 1.0 < 1.0.a < 1.0.1
  Numeric:
    1 < 1.0 < 1.1 < 1.1.1 < 1.2 < 2.0 < 3.0.0
 Additionally, version strings can have an 'epoch' value defined that will
 overrule any version comparison, unless the epoch values are equal. This is
 specified in an `epoch:version-rel` format. For example, `2:1.0-1` is always
 greater than `1:3.6-1`.
 Keep in mind that the 'pkgrel' is only compared if it is available on both
 versions given to this tool. For example, comparing `1.5-1` and `1.5` will
 yield 0; comparing `1.5-1` and `1.5-2` will yield < 0 as expected. This is
 mainly for supporting versioned dependencies that do not include the 'pkgrel'.
 Options
 -------
 *-h, \--help*::
 	Display summary of the available return codes. Must be the first option
 	specified.
 Examples
 --------
  $ vercmp 1 2
  -1
  $ vercmp 2 1
  1
  $ vercmp 2.0-1 1.7-6
  1
  $ vercmp 2.0 2.0-13
  0
  $ vercmp 4.34 1:001
  -1
 See Also
 --------
 linkman:pacman[8], linkman:makepkg[8], linkman:libalpm[3]
 include::footer.asciidoc[]
--- a/etc/.cvsignore
+++ b/etc/.cvsignore
@ -1,2 +1,4 @@
 Makefile
 Makefile.in
 makepkg.conf
 pacman.conf
--- a/etc/Makefile.am
+++ b/etc/Makefile.am
@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
 SUBDIRS = pacman.d abs
 EXTRA_DIST = makepkg.conf pacman.conf
 dist_sysconf_DATA = makepkg.conf pacman.conf
--- a/etc/abs/.cvsignore
+++ b/etc/abs/.cvsignore
@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
 Makefile
 Makefile.in
--- a/etc/abs/Makefile.am
+++ b/etc/abs/Makefile.am
@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
 EXTRA_DIST = abs.conf \
 			 supfile.arch \
 			 supfile.community \
 			 supfile.extra \
 			 supfile.testing \
 			 supfile.unstable
 install-data-hook:
 	mkdir -p $(DESTDIR)$(sysconfdir)/abs ; \
 	for j in $(EXTRA_DIST); do \
 	    $(INSTALL) -c -m 644 $(srcdir)/$$j $(DESTDIR)$(sysconfdir)/abs/$$j ; \
 	done
 uninstall-hook:
 	for j in $(EXTRA_DIST); do \
 	    rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(sysconfdir)/abs/$$j ; \
 	done
--- a/etc/abs/abs.conf
+++ b/etc/abs/abs.conf
@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
 #
 # /etc/abs/abs.conf
 #
 # the top-level directory of all your PKGBUILDs
 [ "$ABSROOT" = "" ] && ABSROOT="/var/abs/"
 #
 # Supfiles to be parsed by abs (in this order)
 #   (prefix a module with a ! to disable it)
 #
 SUPFILES=(arch extra !unstable !community !testing)
--- a/etc/abs/supfile.arch
+++ b/etc/abs/supfile.arch
@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
 #
 # /etc/abs/supfile.arch
 #
 # this is the host containing the current PKGBUILD files
 *default host=cvs.archlinux.org
 *default release=cvs
 *default delete
 *default use-rel-suffix
 *default compress
 #*default umask=002
 *default tag=CURRENT
 arch
--- a/etc/abs/supfile.community
+++ b/etc/abs/supfile.community
@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
 #
 # /etc/abs/supfile.community
 #
 # this is the host containing the community PKGBUILD files
 *default host=cvs.archlinux.org
 *default release=cvs
 *default delete
 *default use-rel-suffix
 *default compress
 #*default umask=002
 *default tag=CURRENT
 community
--- a/etc/abs/supfile.extra
+++ b/etc/abs/supfile.extra
@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
 #
 # /etc/abs/supfile.extra
 #
 # this is the host containing the extra PKGBUILD files
 *default host=cvs.archlinux.org
 *default release=cvs
 *default delete
 *default use-rel-suffix
 *default compress
 #*default umask=002
 *default tag=CURRENT
 extra
--- a/etc/abs/supfile.testing
+++ b/etc/abs/supfile.testing
@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
 #
 # /etc/abs/supfile.testing
 #
 # this is the host containing the testing PKGBUILD files
 *default host=cvs.archlinux.org
 *default release=cvs
 *default delete
 *default use-rel-suffix
 *default compress
 #*default umask=002
 *default tag=TESTING
 arch
 extra
--- a/etc/abs/supfile.unstable
+++ b/etc/abs/supfile.unstable
@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
 #
 # /etc/abs/supfile.unstable
 #
 # this is the host containing the unstable PKGBUILD files
 *default host=cvs.archlinux.org
 *default release=cvs
 *default delete
 *default use-rel-suffix
 *default compress
 #*default umask=002
 *default tag=CURRENT
 unstable
--- a/etc/makepkg.conf.d/fortran.conf.in
+++ b/etc/makepkg.conf.d/fortran.conf.in
@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
 #!/hint/bash
 #
 # @sysconfdir@/makepkg.conf.d/fortran.conf
 #
 #########################################################################
 # FORTRAN LANGUAGE SUPPORT
 #########################################################################
 # Flags used for the Fortran compiler, similar in spirit to CFLAGS. Read
 # linkman:gfortran[1] for more details on the available flags.
 #FFLAGS="-O2 -pipe"
 #FCFLAGS="$FFLAGS"
 # Additional compiler flags appended to `FFLAGS` and `FCFLAGS` for use in debugging. Usually
 # this would include: ``-g''. Read linkman:gfortran[1] for more details on the wide
 # variety of compiler flags available.
 #DEBUG_FFLAGS="-g"
--- a/etc/makepkg.conf.d/rust.conf.in
+++ b/etc/makepkg.conf.d/rust.conf.in
@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
 #!/hint/bash
 #
 # @sysconfdir@/makepkg.conf.d/rust.conf
 #
 #########################################################################
 # RUST LANGUAGE SUPPORT
 #########################################################################
 # Flags used for the Rust compiler, similar in spirit to CFLAGS. Read
 # linkman:rustc[1] for more details on the available flags.
 #RUSTFLAGS="-C opt-level=3"
 # Additional compiler flags appended to `RUSTFLAGS` for use in debugging.
 # Usually this would include: ``-C debuginfo=2''. Read linkman:rustc[1] for
 # more details on the available flags.
 #DEBUG_RUSTFLAGS="-C debuginfo=2"
--- a/etc/makepkg.conf.in
+++ b/etc/makepkg.conf.in
@ -1,33 +1,15 @@
 #!/hint/bash
 #
-# @sysconfdir@/makepkg.conf
+# /etc/makepkg.conf
 #
 #########################################################################
 # SOURCE ACQUISITION
 #########################################################################
 #
-#-- The download utilities that makepkg should use to acquire sources
+#-- The FTP/HTTP download utility that makepkg should use to acquire sources
-#  Format: 'protocol::agent'
+FTPAGENT="/usr/bin/wget --continue --passive-ftp --tries=3 --waitretry=3 --no-check-certificate"
-DLAGENTS=('file::/usr/bin/curl -qgC - -o %o %u'
+#FTPAGENT="/usr/bin/snarf"
-          'ftp::/usr/bin/curl -qgfC - --ftp-pasv --retry 3 --retry-delay 3 -o %o %u'
+#FTPAGENT="/usr/bin/lftpget -c"
          'http::/usr/bin/curl -qgb "" -fLC - --retry 3 --retry-delay 3 -o %o %u'
          'https::/usr/bin/curl -qgb "" -fLC - --retry 3 --retry-delay 3 -o %o %u'
          'rsync::/usr/bin/rsync --no-motd -z %u %o'
          'scp::/usr/bin/scp -C %u %o')
 # Other common tools:
 # /usr/bin/snarf
 # /usr/bin/lftpget -c
 # /usr/bin/wget
 #-- The package required by makepkg to download VCS sources
 #  Format: 'protocol::package'
 VCSCLIENTS=('bzr::breezy'
            'fossil::fossil'
            'git::git'
            'hg::mercurial'
            'svn::subversion')
 #########################################################################
 # ARCHITECTURE, COMPILE FLAGS
@ -36,82 +18,49 @@ VCSCLIENTS=('bzr::breezy'
 CARCH="@CARCH@"
 CHOST="@CHOST@"
-#NPROC=2
+#-- Exclusive: will only run on @CARCHFLAGS@
-
+# -mtune builds exclusively for an architecture
-#-- Compiler and Linker Flags
+# -mcpu optimizes for an architecture, but builds for the whole processor family
-#CPPFLAGS=""
+CFLAGS="-@ARCHSWITCH@=@CARCHFLAGS@ -O2 -pipe"
-#CFLAGS="-O2 -pipe"
+CXXFLAGS="-@ARCHSWITCH@=@CARCHFLAGS@ -O2 -pipe"
 #CXXFLAGS="-O2 -pipe"
 #LDFLAGS=""
 #LTOFLAGS="-flto"
 #-- Make Flags: change this for DistCC/SMP systems
 #MAKEFLAGS="-j2"
 #-- Debugging flags
 #DEBUG_CFLAGS="-g"
 #DEBUG_CXXFLAGS="-g"
 #########################################################################
 # BUILD ENVIRONMENT
 #########################################################################
 #
-# Makepkg defaults: BUILDENV=(!distcc !color !ccache check !sign)
+# Defaults: BUILDENV=(!fakeroot !distcc color !ccache)
 #  A negated environment option will do the opposite of the comments below.
 #
 #-- fakeroot: Allow building packages as a non-root user
 #-- distcc:   Use the Distributed C/C++/ObjC compiler
 #-- color:    Colorize output messages
 #-- ccache:   Use ccache to cache compilation
 #-- check:    Run the check() function if present in the PKGBUILD
 #-- sign:     Generate PGP signature file
 #
-BUILDENV=(!distcc color !ccache check !sign)
+BUILDENV=(fakeroot !distcc color !ccache)
 #
 #-- If using DistCC, your MAKEFLAGS will also need modification. In addition,
 #-- specify a space-delimited list of hosts running in the DistCC cluster.
 #DISTCC_HOSTS=""
 #
 #-- Specify a directory for package building.
 #BUILDDIR=/tmp/makepkg
 #########################################################################
 # GLOBAL PACKAGE OPTIONS
 #   These are default values for the options=() settings
 #########################################################################
 #
-# Makepkg defaults:
+# Default: OPTIONS=(strip !docs !libtool emptydirs)
 # OPTIONS=(!strip docs libtool staticlibs emptydirs !zipman !purge !debug !lto !autodeps)
 #  A negated option will do the opposite of the comments below.
 #
-#-- strip:      Strip symbols from binaries/libraries
+#-- strip:     Strip symbols from binaries/libraries
-#-- docs:       Save doc directories specified by DOC_DIRS
+#-- docs:      Save doc and info directories
-#-- libtool:    Leave libtool (.la) files in packages
+#-- libtool:   Leave libtool (.la) files in packages
-#-- staticlibs: Leave static library (.a) files in packages
+#-- emptydirs: Leave empty directories in packages
 #-- emptydirs:  Leave empty directories in packages
 #-- zipman:     Compress manual (man and info) pages in MAN_DIRS with gzip
 #-- purge:      Remove files specified by PURGE_TARGETS
 #-- debug:      Add debugging flags as specified in DEBUG_* variables
 #-- lto:        Add compile flags for building with link time optimization
 #-- autodeps:   Automatically add depends/provides
 #
-OPTIONS=(strip docs libtool staticlibs emptydirs zipman purge !debug !lto !autodeps)
+OPTIONS=(strip !docs libtool emptydirs)
-#-- File integrity checks to use. Valid: ck, md5, sha1, sha224, sha256, sha384, sha512, b2
+#-- File integrity checks to use. Valid: md5, sha1, sha256, sha384, sha512
-INTEGRITY_CHECK=(ck)
+INTEGRITY_CHECK=(md5)
-#-- Options to be used when stripping binaries. See `man strip' for details.
+#-- Info and doc directories to remove (if option set correctly above)
-STRIP_BINARIES="@STRIP_BINARIES@"
+DOC_DIRS=(usr/{,share/}{info,doc} opt/gnome/{,share/}{info,doc,gtk-doc})
 #-- Options to be used when stripping shared libraries. See `man strip' for details.
 STRIP_SHARED="@STRIP_SHARED@"
 #-- Options to be used when stripping static libraries. See `man strip' for details.
 STRIP_STATIC="@STRIP_STATIC@"
 #-- Manual (man and info) directories to compress (if zipman is specified)
 MAN_DIRS=({usr{,/local}{,/share},opt/*}/{man,info})
 #-- Doc directories to remove (if !docs is specified)
 DOC_DIRS=(usr/{,local/}{,share/}{doc,gtk-doc} opt/*/{doc,gtk-doc})
 #-- Files to be removed from all packages (if purge is specified)
 PURGE_TARGETS=(usr/{,share}/info/dir .packlist *.pod)
 #-- Directory to store source code in for debug packages
 DBGSRCDIR="/usr/src/debug"
 #-- Prefix and directories for library autodeps
 LIB_DIRS=('lib:usr/lib' 'lib32:usr/lib32')
 #########################################################################
 # PACKAGE OUTPUT
@ -123,39 +72,7 @@ LIB_DIRS=('lib:usr/lib' 'lib32:usr/lib32')
 #PKGDEST=/home/packages
 #-- Source cache: specify a fixed directory where source files will be cached
 #SRCDEST=/home/sources
 #-- Source packages: specify a fixed directory where all src packages will be placed
 #SRCPKGDEST=/home/srcpackages
 #-- Log files: specify a fixed directory where all log files will be placed
 #LOGDEST=/home/makepkglogs
 #-- Packager: name/email of the person or organization building packages
 #PACKAGER="John Doe <john@doe.com>"
 #-- Specify a key to use for package signing
 #GPGKEY=""
-#########################################################################
+# vim: set ft=sh ts=2 sw=2 et:
 # COMPRESSION DEFAULTS
 #########################################################################
 #
 COMPRESSGZ=(gzip -c -f -n)
 COMPRESSBZ2=(bzip2 -c -f)
 COMPRESSXZ=(xz -c -z -)
 COMPRESSZST=(zstd -c -z -q -)
 COMPRESSLRZ=(lrzip -q)
 COMPRESSLZO=(lzop -q)
 COMPRESSZ=(compress -c -f)
 COMPRESSLZ4=(lz4 -q)
 COMPRESSLZ=(lzip -c -f)
 #########################################################################
 # EXTENSION DEFAULTS
 #########################################################################
 #
 PKGEXT='@PKGEXT@'
 SRCEXT='@SRCEXT@'
 #########################################################################
 # OTHER
 #########################################################################
 #
 #-- Command used to run pacman as root, instead of trying sudo and su
 PACMAN_AUTH=()
--- a/etc/pacman.conf.in
+++ b/etc/pacman.conf.in
@ -1,47 +1,15 @@
 #
-# @sysconfdir@/pacman.conf
+# /etc/pacman.conf
 #
-# See the pacman.conf(5) manpage for option and repository directives
+# See the pacman manpage for option directives
 #
 # GENERAL OPTIONS
 #
 [options]
-# The following paths are commented out with their default values listed.
+LogFile     = /var/log/pacman.log
 # If you wish to use different paths, uncomment and update the paths.
 #RootDir     = @ROOTDIR@
 #DBPath      = @localstatedir@/lib/pacman/
 #CacheDir    = @localstatedir@/cache/pacman/pkg/
 #LogFile     = @localstatedir@/log/pacman.log
 #GPGDir      = @sysconfdir@/pacman.d/gnupg/
 #HookDir     = @sysconfdir@/pacman.d/hooks/
 HoldPkg     = pacman glibc
 #XferCommand = /usr/bin/curl -L -C - -f -o %o %u
 #XferCommand = /usr/bin/wget --passive-ftp -c -O %o %u
 #CleanMethod = KeepInstalled
 Architecture = auto
 # Pacman won't upgrade packages listed in IgnorePkg and members of IgnoreGroup
 #IgnorePkg   =
 #IgnoreGroup =
 #NoUpgrade   =
 #NoExtract   =
 # Misc options
 #UseSyslog
 #Color
 #NoProgressBar
 CheckSpace
 #VerbosePkgLists
 ParallelDownloads = 5
 #DownloadUser = alpm
 #DisableSandbox
 # PGP signature checking
 #SigLevel = Optional
 #LocalFileSigLevel = Optional
 #RemoteFileSigLevel = Optional
 #
 # REPOSITORIES
@ -50,30 +18,28 @@ ParallelDownloads = 5
 #   - local/custom mirrors can be added here or in separate files
 #   - repositories listed first will take precedence when packages
 #     have identical names, regardless of version number
 #   - URLs will have $repo replaced by the name of the current repo
 #   - URLs will have $arch replaced by the name of the architecture
 #
 # Repository entries are of the format:
 #       [repo-name]
 #       Server = ServerName
 #       Include = IncludePath
 #
 # The header [repo-name] is crucial - it must be present and
 # uncommented to enable the repo.
 #
 #[testing]
 #Server = ftp://ftp.archlinux.org/testing/os/@CARCH@
-# An example of a disabled remote package repository with multiple servers
+[current]
-# available. To enable, uncomment the following lines. You can add preferred
+# Add your preferred servers here, they will be used first
-# servers immediately after the header and they will be used before the
+Include = /etc/pacman.d/current
-# default mirrors.
+
-#[core]
+[extra]
-#SigLevel = Required
+# Add your preferred servers here, they will be used first
-#Server = ftp://ftp.example.com/foobar/$repo/os/$arch/
+Include = /etc/pacman.d/extra
-# The file referenced here should contain a list of 'Server = ' lines.
+
-#Include = @sysconfdir@/pacman.d/mirrorlist
+[community]
 # Add your preferred servers here, they will be used first
 Include = /etc/pacman.d/community
 #[unstable]
 # Add your preferred servers here, they will be used first
 #Include = /etc/pacman.d/unstable
 # An example of a custom package repository.  See the pacman manpage for
 # tips on creating your own repositories.
 #[custom]
-#SigLevel = Optional TrustAll
+#Server = file:///home/custompkgs
-#Server = file:///home/packages
+
--- a/etc/pacman.d/.cvsignore
+++ b/etc/pacman.d/.cvsignore
@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
 Makefile
 Makefile.in
 community
 current
 extra
 mirrorlist
 release
 unstable
--- a/etc/pacman.d/Makefile.am
+++ b/etc/pacman.d/Makefile.am
@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
 pkgsysconfdir = ${sysconfdir}/pacman.d
 dist_pkgsysconf_DATA = community current extra release unstable
 $(dist_pkgsysconf_DATA): mirrorlist
 	sed "s|@@REPO@@|$@|g" <$< >$@
 clean-local:
 	rm -f $(dist_pkgsysconf_DATA)
--- a/etc/pacman.d/mirrorlist.in
+++ b/etc/pacman.d/mirrorlist.in
@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
 #
 # @@REPO@@: Arch Linux @@REPO@@ repository
 #
 # United States
 Server = ftp://ftp.archlinux.org/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 Server = ftp://ftp.nethat.com/pub/linux/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 Server = ftp://ftp-linux.cc.gatech.edu/pub/linux/distributions/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 Server = ftp://mirror.cs.vt.edu/pub/ArchLinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 Server = ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/linux/distributions/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # Europe
 # - Austria
 Server = ftp://gd.tuwien.ac.at/opsys/linux/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Belgium
 Server = ftp://ftp.belnet.be/packages/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Czech Republic
 Server = ftp://ftp.sh.cvut.cz/MIRRORS/arch/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Estonia
 Server = ftp://ftp.estpak.ee/pub/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Finland
 Server = ftp://ftp.sixnix.net/pub/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - France
 Server = ftp://ftp.rez-gif.supelec.fr/pub/Linux/distrib/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 Server = ftp://mir1.archlinuxfr.org/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 Server = ftp://mir2.archlinuxfr.org/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 Server = ftp://distrib-coffee.ipsl.jussieu.fr/pub/linux/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Germany
 Server = ftp://ftp.tu-chemnitz.de/pub/linux/sunsite.unc-mirror/distributions/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 Server = ftp://ftp.hosteurope.de/mirror/ftp.archlinux.org/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Great Britain
 Server = http://ftp.parrswood.manchester.sch.uk/Mirrors/ftp.archlinux.org/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Greece
 Server = ftp://ftp.ntua.gr/pub/linux/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Ireland
 Server = ftp://ftp.heanet.ie/mirrors/ftp.archlinux.org/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Italy
 Server = ftp://mi.mirror.garr.it/mirrors/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Lithuania
 Server = ftp://saule.mintis.lt/pub/linux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Netherlands
 Server = ftp://ftp.nluug.nl/pub/metalab/distributions/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 Server = ftp://ftp.surfnet.nl/pub/os/Linux/distr/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Norway
 Server = ftp://mirror.djzradio.net/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Poland
 Server = ftp://sunsite.icm.edu.pl/site/linux-sunsite/distributions/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 Server = ftp://mirror.icis.pcz.pl/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Portugal
 Server = ftp://gul.est.ips.pt/repos/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 Server = ftp://cesium.di.uminho.pt/pub/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 Server = ftp://darkstar.ist.utl.pt/pub/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Romania
 Server = ftp://ftp.iasi.roedu.net/mirrors/archlinux.org/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Sweden
 Server = ftp://ftp.ds.hj.se/pub/os/linux/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 Server = ftp://ftp.gigabit.nu/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Switzerland
 Server = ftp://archlinux.puzzle.ch/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # - Ukraine
 Server = ftp://ftp.linux.kiev.ua/pub/Linux/ArchLinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # Australia
 Server = ftp://mirror.pacific.net.au/linux/archlinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 # Asia
 # - China
 Server = http://mirror.vxmatrix.net/ArchLinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 Server = http://dxmirror.vxmatrix.net/ArchLinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
 Server = http://cncmirror.vxmatrix.net/ArchLinux/@@REPO@@/os/@CARCH@
--- a/507
+++ b/507
@ -0,0 +1,507 @@
 #!/bin/sh
 # install - install a program, script, or datafile
 scriptversion=2006-10-14.15
 # This originates from X11R5 (mit/util/scripts/install.sh), which was
 # later released in X11R6 (xc/config/util/install.sh) with the
 # following copyright and license.
 #
 # Copyright (C) 1994 X Consortium
 #
 # Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
 # of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to
 # deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
 # rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
 # sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
 # furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
 #
 # The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
 # all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
 #
 # THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
 # IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
 # FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
 # X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
 # AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNEC-
 # TION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
 #
 # Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not
 # be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other deal-
 # ings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X Consor-
 # tium.
 #
 #
 # FSF changes to this file are in the public domain.
 #
 # Calling this script install-sh is preferred over install.sh, to prevent
 # `make' implicit rules from creating a file called install from it
 # when there is no Makefile.
 #
 # This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written
 # from scratch.
 nl='
 '
 IFS=" ""	$nl"
 # set DOITPROG to echo to test this script
 # Don't use :- since 4.3BSD and earlier shells don't like it.
 doit="${DOITPROG-}"
 if test -z "$doit"; then
  doit_exec=exec
 else
  doit_exec=$doit
 fi
 # Put in absolute file names if you don't have them in your path;
 # or use environment vars.
 mvprog="${MVPROG-mv}"
 cpprog="${CPPROG-cp}"
 chmodprog="${CHMODPROG-chmod}"
 chownprog="${CHOWNPROG-chown}"
 chgrpprog="${CHGRPPROG-chgrp}"
 stripprog="${STRIPPROG-strip}"
 rmprog="${RMPROG-rm}"
 mkdirprog="${MKDIRPROG-mkdir}"
 posix_glob=
 posix_mkdir=
 # Desired mode of installed file.
 mode=0755
 chmodcmd=$chmodprog
 chowncmd=
 chgrpcmd=
 stripcmd=
 rmcmd="$rmprog -f"
 mvcmd="$mvprog"
 src=
 dst=
 dir_arg=
 dstarg=
 no_target_directory=
 usage="Usage: $0 [OPTION]... [-T] SRCFILE DSTFILE
   or: $0 [OPTION]... SRCFILES... DIRECTORY
   or: $0 [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SRCFILES...
   or: $0 [OPTION]... -d DIRECTORIES...
 In the 1st form, copy SRCFILE to DSTFILE.
 In the 2nd and 3rd, copy all SRCFILES to DIRECTORY.
 In the 4th, create DIRECTORIES.
 Options:
 -c         (ignored)
 -d         create directories instead of installing files.
 -g GROUP   $chgrpprog installed files to GROUP.
 -m MODE    $chmodprog installed files to MODE.
 -o USER    $chownprog installed files to USER.
 -s         $stripprog installed files.
 -t DIRECTORY  install into DIRECTORY.
 -T         report an error if DSTFILE is a directory.
 --help     display this help and exit.
 --version  display version info and exit.
 Environment variables override the default commands:
  CHGRPPROG CHMODPROG CHOWNPROG CPPROG MKDIRPROG MVPROG RMPROG STRIPPROG
 "
 while test $# -ne 0; do
  case $1 in
    -c) shift
        continue;;
    -d) dir_arg=true
        shift
        continue;;
    -g) chgrpcmd="$chgrpprog $2"
        shift
        shift
        continue;;
    --help) echo "$usage"; exit $?;;
    -m) mode=$2
        shift
        shift
 	case $mode in
 	  *' '* | *'	'* | *'
 '*	  | *'*'* | *'?'* | *'['*)
 	    echo "$0: invalid mode: $mode" >&2
 	    exit 1;;
 	esac
        continue;;
    -o) chowncmd="$chownprog $2"
        shift
        shift
        continue;;
    -s) stripcmd=$stripprog
        shift
        continue;;
    -t) dstarg=$2
 	shift
 	shift
 	continue;;
    -T) no_target_directory=true
 	shift
 	continue;;
    --version) echo "$0 $scriptversion"; exit $?;;
    --)	shift
 	break;;
    -*)	echo "$0: invalid option: $1" >&2
 	exit 1;;
    *)  break;;
  esac
 done
 if test $# -ne 0 && test -z "$dir_arg$dstarg"; then
  # When -d is used, all remaining arguments are directories to create.
  # When -t is used, the destination is already specified.
  # Otherwise, the last argument is the destination.  Remove it from $@.
  for arg
  do
    if test -n "$dstarg"; then
      # $@ is not empty: it contains at least $arg.
      set fnord "$@" "$dstarg"
      shift # fnord
    fi
    shift # arg
    dstarg=$arg
  done
 fi
 if test $# -eq 0; then
  if test -z "$dir_arg"; then
    echo "$0: no input file specified." >&2
    exit 1
  fi
  # It's OK to call `install-sh -d' without argument.
  # This can happen when creating conditional directories.
  exit 0
 fi
 if test -z "$dir_arg"; then
  trap '(exit $?); exit' 1 2 13 15
  # Set umask so as not to create temps with too-generous modes.
  # However, 'strip' requires both read and write access to temps.
  case $mode in
    # Optimize common cases.
    *644) cp_umask=133;;
    *755) cp_umask=22;;
    *[0-7])
      if test -z "$stripcmd"; then
 	u_plus_rw=
      else
 	u_plus_rw='% 200'
      fi
      cp_umask=`expr '(' 777 - $mode % 1000 ')' $u_plus_rw`;;
    *)
      if test -z "$stripcmd"; then
 	u_plus_rw=
      else
 	u_plus_rw=,u+rw
      fi
      cp_umask=$mode$u_plus_rw;;
  esac
 fi
 for src
 do
  # Protect names starting with `-'.
  case $src in
    -*) src=./$src ;;
  esac
  if test -n "$dir_arg"; then
    dst=$src
    dstdir=$dst
    test -d "$dstdir"
    dstdir_status=$?
  else
    # Waiting for this to be detected by the "$cpprog $src $dsttmp" command
    # might cause directories to be created, which would be especially bad
    # if $src (and thus $dsttmp) contains '*'.
    if test ! -f "$src" && test ! -d "$src"; then
      echo "$0: $src does not exist." >&2
      exit 1
    fi
    if test -z "$dstarg"; then
      echo "$0: no destination specified." >&2
      exit 1
    fi
    dst=$dstarg
    # Protect names starting with `-'.
    case $dst in
      -*) dst=./$dst ;;
    esac
    # If destination is a directory, append the input filename; won't work
    # if double slashes aren't ignored.
    if test -d "$dst"; then
      if test -n "$no_target_directory"; then
 	echo "$0: $dstarg: Is a directory" >&2
 	exit 1
      fi
      dstdir=$dst
      dst=$dstdir/`basename "$src"`
      dstdir_status=0
    else
      # Prefer dirname, but fall back on a substitute if dirname fails.
      dstdir=`
 	(dirname "$dst") 2>/dev/null ||
 	expr X"$dst" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \
 	     X"$dst" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \
 	     X"$dst" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \
 	     X"$dst" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null ||
 	echo X"$dst" |
 	    sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{
 		   s//\1/
 		   q
 		 }
 		 /^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{
 		   s//\1/
 		   q
 		 }
 		 /^X\(\/\/\)$/{
 		   s//\1/
 		   q
 		 }
 		 /^X\(\/\).*/{
 		   s//\1/
 		   q
 		 }
 		 s/.*/./; q'
      `
      test -d "$dstdir"
      dstdir_status=$?
    fi
  fi
  obsolete_mkdir_used=false
  if test $dstdir_status != 0; then
    case $posix_mkdir in
      '')
 	# Create intermediate dirs using mode 755 as modified by the umask.
 	# This is like FreeBSD 'install' as of 1997-10-28.
 	umask=`umask`
 	case $stripcmd.$umask in
 	  # Optimize common cases.
 	  *[2367][2367]) mkdir_umask=$umask;;
 	  .*0[02][02] | .[02][02] | .[02]) mkdir_umask=22;;
 	  *[0-7])
 	    mkdir_umask=`expr $umask + 22 \
 	      - $umask % 100 % 40 + $umask % 20 \
 	      - $umask % 10 % 4 + $umask % 2
 	    `;;
 	  *) mkdir_umask=$umask,go-w;;
 	esac
 	# With -d, create the new directory with the user-specified mode.
 	# Otherwise, rely on $mkdir_umask.
 	if test -n "$dir_arg"; then
 	  mkdir_mode=-m$mode
 	else
 	  mkdir_mode=
 	fi
 	posix_mkdir=false
 	case $umask in
 	  *[123567][0-7][0-7])
 	    # POSIX mkdir -p sets u+wx bits regardless of umask, which
 	    # is incompatible with FreeBSD 'install' when (umask & 300) != 0.
 	    ;;
 	  *)
 	    tmpdir=${TMPDIR-/tmp}/ins$RANDOM-$$
 	    trap 'ret=$?; rmdir "$tmpdir/d" "$tmpdir" 2>/dev/null; exit $ret' 0
 	    if (umask $mkdir_umask &&
 		exec $mkdirprog $mkdir_mode -p -- "$tmpdir/d") >/dev/null 2>&1
 	    then
 	      if test -z "$dir_arg" || {
 		   # Check for POSIX incompatibilities with -m.
 		   # HP-UX 11.23 and IRIX 6.5 mkdir -m -p sets group- or
 		   # other-writeable bit of parent directory when it shouldn't.
 		   # FreeBSD 6.1 mkdir -m -p sets mode of existing directory.
 		   ls_ld_tmpdir=`ls -ld "$tmpdir"`
 		   case $ls_ld_tmpdir in
 		     d????-?r-*) different_mode=700;;
 		     d????-?--*) different_mode=755;;
 		     *) false;;
 		   esac &&
 		   $mkdirprog -m$different_mode -p -- "$tmpdir" && {
 		     ls_ld_tmpdir_1=`ls -ld "$tmpdir"`
 		     test "$ls_ld_tmpdir" = "$ls_ld_tmpdir_1"
 		   }
 		 }
 	      then posix_mkdir=:
 	      fi
 	      rmdir "$tmpdir/d" "$tmpdir"
 	    else
 	      # Remove any dirs left behind by ancient mkdir implementations.
 	      rmdir ./$mkdir_mode ./-p ./-- 2>/dev/null
 	    fi
 	    trap '' 0;;
 	esac;;
    esac
    if
      $posix_mkdir && (
 	umask $mkdir_umask &&
 	$doit_exec $mkdirprog $mkdir_mode -p -- "$dstdir"
      )
    then :
    else
      # The umask is ridiculous, or mkdir does not conform to POSIX,
      # or it failed possibly due to a race condition.  Create the
      # directory the slow way, step by step, checking for races as we go.
      case $dstdir in
 	/*) prefix=/ ;;
 	-*) prefix=./ ;;
 	*)  prefix= ;;
      esac
      case $posix_glob in
        '')
 	  if (set -f) 2>/dev/null; then
 	    posix_glob=true
 	  else
 	    posix_glob=false
 	  fi ;;
      esac
      oIFS=$IFS
      IFS=/
      $posix_glob && set -f
      set fnord $dstdir
      shift
      $posix_glob && set +f
      IFS=$oIFS
      prefixes=
      for d
      do
 	test -z "$d" && continue
 	prefix=$prefix$d
 	if test -d "$prefix"; then
 	  prefixes=
 	else
 	  if $posix_mkdir; then
 	    (umask=$mkdir_umask &&
 	     $doit_exec $mkdirprog $mkdir_mode -p -- "$dstdir") && break
 	    # Don't fail if two instances are running concurrently.
 	    test -d "$prefix" || exit 1
 	  else
 	    case $prefix in
 	      *\'*) qprefix=`echo "$prefix" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"`;;
 	      *) qprefix=$prefix;;
 	    esac
 	    prefixes="$prefixes '$qprefix'"
 	  fi
 	fi
 	prefix=$prefix/
      done
      if test -n "$prefixes"; then
 	# Don't fail if two instances are running concurrently.
 	(umask $mkdir_umask &&
 	 eval "\$doit_exec \$mkdirprog $prefixes") ||
 	  test -d "$dstdir" || exit 1
 	obsolete_mkdir_used=true
      fi
    fi
  fi
  if test -n "$dir_arg"; then
    { test -z "$chowncmd" || $doit $chowncmd "$dst"; } &&
    { test -z "$chgrpcmd" || $doit $chgrpcmd "$dst"; } &&
    { test "$obsolete_mkdir_used$chowncmd$chgrpcmd" = false ||
      test -z "$chmodcmd" || $doit $chmodcmd $mode "$dst"; } || exit 1
  else
    # Make a couple of temp file names in the proper directory.
    dsttmp=$dstdir/_inst.$$_
    rmtmp=$dstdir/_rm.$$_
    # Trap to clean up those temp files at exit.
    trap 'ret=$?; rm -f "$dsttmp" "$rmtmp" && exit $ret' 0
    # Copy the file name to the temp name.
    (umask $cp_umask && $doit_exec $cpprog "$src" "$dsttmp") &&
    # and set any options; do chmod last to preserve setuid bits.
    #
    # If any of these fail, we abort the whole thing.  If we want to
    # ignore errors from any of these, just make sure not to ignore
    # errors from the above "$doit $cpprog $src $dsttmp" command.
    #
    { test -z "$chowncmd" || $doit $chowncmd "$dsttmp"; } \
      && { test -z "$chgrpcmd" || $doit $chgrpcmd "$dsttmp"; } \
      && { test -z "$stripcmd" || $doit $stripcmd "$dsttmp"; } \
      && { test -z "$chmodcmd" || $doit $chmodcmd $mode "$dsttmp"; } &&
    # Now rename the file to the real destination.
    { $doit $mvcmd -f "$dsttmp" "$dst" 2>/dev/null \
      || {
 	   # The rename failed, perhaps because mv can't rename something else
 	   # to itself, or perhaps because mv is so ancient that it does not
 	   # support -f.
 	   # Now remove or move aside any old file at destination location.
 	   # We try this two ways since rm can't unlink itself on some
 	   # systems and the destination file might be busy for other
 	   # reasons.  In this case, the final cleanup might fail but the new
 	   # file should still install successfully.
 	   {
 	     if test -f "$dst"; then
 	       $doit $rmcmd -f "$dst" 2>/dev/null \
 	       || { $doit $mvcmd -f "$dst" "$rmtmp" 2>/dev/null \
 		     && { $doit $rmcmd -f "$rmtmp" 2>/dev/null; :; }; }\
 	       || {
 		 echo "$0: cannot unlink or rename $dst" >&2
 		 (exit 1); exit 1
 	       }
 	     else
 	       :
 	     fi
 	   } &&
 	   # Now rename the file to the real destination.
 	   $doit $mvcmd "$dsttmp" "$dst"
 	 }
    } || exit 1
    trap '' 0
  fi
 done
 # Local variables:
 # eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
 # time-stamp-start: "scriptversion="
 # time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
 # time-stamp-end: "$"
 # End:
--- a/lib/libalpm/.cvsignore
+++ b/lib/libalpm/.cvsignore
@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
 .deps
 .libs
 Makefile
 Makefile.in
 *.lo
 *.la
 libalpm.pc
--- a/lib/libalpm/Doxyfile
+++ b/lib/libalpm/Doxyfile
@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
 # Doxyfile 1.4.5
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Project related configuration options
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 PROJECT_NAME           = libalpm
 PROJECT_NUMBER         = 
 OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = 
 CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
 OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
 USE_WINDOWS_ENCODING   = NO
 BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
 REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
 ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
                         "The $name widget" \
                         "The $name file" \
                         is \
                         provides \
                         specifies \
                         contains \
                         represents \
                         a \
                         an \
                         the
 ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
 INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
 FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
 STRIP_FROM_PATH        = 
 STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    = 
 SHORT_NAMES            = NO
 JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
 MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
 DETAILS_AT_TOP         = NO
 INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
 SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
 TAB_SIZE               = 8
 ALIASES                = 
 OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
 OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
 BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
 DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
 SUBGROUPING            = YES
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Build related configuration options
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 EXTRACT_ALL            = NO
 EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = NO
 EXTRACT_STATIC         = NO
 EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
 EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
 HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = YES
 HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = YES
 HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
 HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
 INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
 CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = YES
 HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
 SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
 INLINE_INFO            = YES
 SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
 SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
 SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
 GENERATE_TODOLIST      = YES
 GENERATE_TESTLIST      = YES
 GENERATE_BUGLIST       = YES
 GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
 ENABLED_SECTIONS       = 
 MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
 SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
 SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
 FILE_VERSION_FILTER    = 
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # configuration options related to warning and progress messages
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 QUIET                  = NO
 WARNINGS               = YES
 WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
 WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
 WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = NO
 WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
 WARN_LOGFILE           = 
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # configuration options related to the input files
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 INPUT                  = 
 FILE_PATTERNS          = *.c
 RECURSIVE              = NO
 EXCLUDE                = 
 EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
 EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
 EXAMPLE_PATH           = 
 EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
 EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
 IMAGE_PATH             = 
 INPUT_FILTER           = 
 FILTER_PATTERNS        = 
 FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # configuration options related to source browsing
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = NO
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # configuration options related to the HTML output
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 GENERATE_HTML          = NO
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # configuration options related to the LaTeX output
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # configuration options related to the RTF output
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 GENERATE_RTF           = NO
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # configuration options related to the man page output
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 GENERATE_MAN           = YES
 MAN_OUTPUT             = ../../doc
 MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
 MAN_LINKS              = YES
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # configuration options related to the XML output
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 GENERATE_XML           = NO
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # configuration options related to the Perl module output
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Configuration options related to the preprocessor   
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
 MACRO_EXPANSION        = NO
 EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = NO
 SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
 INCLUDE_PATH           = 
 INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  = 
 PREDEFINED             = 
 EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = 
 SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # Configuration options related to the dot tool   
 #---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
--- a/lib/libalpm/Makefile.am
+++ b/lib/libalpm/Makefile.am
@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
 AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS = gnu
 SUBDIRS = po
 lib_LTLIBRARIES = libalpm.la
 include_HEADERS = alpm_list.h alpm.h
 localedir = $(datadir)/locale
 DEFS = -DLOCALEDIR=\"$(localedir)\" @DEFS@
 AM_CFLAGS = -fvisibility=hidden -pedantic -D_GNU_SOURCE
 EXTRA_DIST = Doxyfile
 libalpm_la_SOURCES = \
 	add.h add.c \
 	alpm.h alpm.c \
 	alpm_list.h alpm_list.c \
 	backup.h backup.c \
 	be_files.c \
 	cache.h cache.c \
 	conflict.h conflict.c \
 	db.h db.c \
 	deps.h deps.c \
 	error.h error.c \
 	group.h group.c \
 	handle.h handle.c \
 	log.h log.c \
 	md5.h md5.c \
 	md5driver.c \
 	package.h package.c \
 	provide.h provide.c \
 	remove.h remove.c \
 	server.h server.c \
 	sha1.h sha1.c \
 	sync.h sync.c \
 	trans.h trans.c \
 	util.h util.c \
 	versioncmp.h versioncmp.c
 libalpm_la_LDFLAGS = -no-undefined -version-info $(LIB_VERSION_INFO)
 libalpm_la_LIBADD = -larchive -ldownload -lm
 if HAS_DOXYGEN
 all: doxygen.in
 doxygen.in:
 	doxygen $(srcdir)/Doxyfile
 endif
--- a/lib/libalpm/add.c
+++ b/lib/libalpm/add.c
--- a/lib/libalpm/add.h
+++ b/lib/libalpm/add.h
@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
 /*
 *  add.h
 * 
 *  Copyright (c) 2006-2025 Pacman Development Team <pacman-dev@lists.archlinux.org>
 *  Copyright (c) 2002-2006 by Judd Vinet <jvinet@zeroflux.org>
 * 
 *  This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
@ -15,15 +14,21 @@
 *  GNU General Public License for more details.
 *
 *  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
- *  along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+ *  along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
 *  Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, 
 *  USA.
 */
-#ifndef ALPM_ADD_H
+#ifndef _ALPM_ADD_H
-#define ALPM_ADD_H
+#define _ALPM_ADD_H
 #include "db.h"
 #include "alpm_list.h"
 #include "trans.h"
-int _alpm_upgrade_packages(alpm_handle_t *handle);
+int _alpm_add_loadtarget(pmtrans_t *trans, pmdb_t *db, char *name);
 int _alpm_add_prepare(pmtrans_t *trans, pmdb_t *db, alpm_list_t **data);
 int _alpm_add_commit(pmtrans_t *trans, pmdb_t *db);
-#endif /* ALPM_ADD_H */
+#endif /* _ALPM_ADD_H */
 /* vim: set ts=2 sw=2 noet: */
--- a/lib/libalpm/alpm.c
+++ b/lib/libalpm/alpm.c
--- a/lib/libalpm/alpm.h
+++ b/lib/libalpm/alpm.h
--- a/Show more
+++ b/Show more